]> code.delx.au - gnu-emacs/blob - etc/NEWS
Update for MH-E release 8.0.
[gnu-emacs] / etc / NEWS
1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2003-05-21
2 Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006
3 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 See the end for copying conditions.
5
6 Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
7 For older news, see the file ONEWS
8 You can narrow news to the specific version by calling
9 `view-emacs-news' with a prefix argument or by typing C-u C-h C-n.
10
11 Temporary note:
12 +++ indicates that the appropriate manual has already been updated.
13 --- means no change in the manuals is called for.
14 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
15 so we will look at it and add it to the manual.
16
17 \f
18 * Installation Changes in Emacs 22.1
19
20 ---
21 ** Emacs now supports new configure options `--program-prefix',
22 `--program-suffix' and `--program-transform-name' that affect the names of
23 installed programs.
24
25 ---
26 ** Emacs can now be built without sound support.
27
28 ---
29 ** You can build Emacs with Gtk+ widgets by specifying `--with-x-toolkit=gtk'
30 when you run configure. This requires Gtk+ 2.4 or newer. This port
31 provides a way to display multilingual text in menus (with some caveats).
32
33 ---
34 ** The `emacsserver' program has been removed, replaced with Lisp code.
35
36 ---
37 ** By default, Emacs now uses a setgid helper program to update game
38 scores. The directory ${localstatedir}/games/emacs is the normal
39 place for game scores to be stored. You can control this with the
40 configure option `--with-game-dir'. The specific user that Emacs uses
41 to own the game scores is controlled by `--with-game-user'. If access
42 to a game user is not available, then scores will be stored separately
43 in each user's home directory.
44
45 ---
46 ** Leim is now part of the Emacs distribution.
47 You no longer need to download a separate tarball in order to build
48 Emacs with Leim.
49
50 +++
51 ** The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual is now part of the distribution.
52
53 The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual in Info format is built as part of the
54 Emacs build procedure and installed together with the Emacs User
55 Manual. A menu item was added to the menu bar that makes it easy
56 accessible (Help->More Manuals->Emacs Lisp Reference).
57
58 ---
59 ** The Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp manual is now part of
60 the distribution.
61
62 This manual is now part of the standard distribution and is installed,
63 together with the Emacs User Manual, into the Info directory. A menu
64 item was added to the menu bar that makes it easy accessible
65 (Help->More Manuals->Introduction to Emacs Lisp).
66
67 ---
68 ** New translations of the Emacs Tutorial are available in the
69 following languages: Brasilian Portuguese, Bulgarian, Chinese (both
70 with simplified and traditional characters), French, and Italian.
71 Type `C-u C-h t' to choose one of them in case your language setup
72 doesn't automatically select the right one.
73
74 ---
75 ** A French translation of the `Emacs Survival Guide' is available.
76
77 ---
78 ** Emacs now includes support for loading image libraries on demand.
79 (Currently this feature is only used on MS Windows.) You can configure
80 the supported image types and their associated dynamic libraries by
81 setting the variable `image-library-alist'.
82
83 ---
84 ** Support for Cygwin was added.
85
86 ---
87 ** Support for FreeBSD/Alpha has been added.
88
89 ---
90 ** Support for GNU/Linux systems on S390 machines was added.
91
92 ---
93 ** Support for MacOS X was added.
94 See the files mac/README and mac/INSTALL for build instructions.
95
96 ---
97 ** Support for GNU/Linux systems on X86-64 machines was added.
98
99 ---
100 ** Mac OS 9 port now uses the Carbon API by default. You can also
101 create non-Carbon build by specifying `NonCarbon' as a target. See
102 the files mac/README and mac/INSTALL for build instructions.
103
104 ---
105 ** Building with -DENABLE_CHECKING does not automatically build with union
106 types any more. Add -DUSE_LISP_UNION_TYPE if you want union types.
107
108 ---
109 ** When pure storage overflows while dumping, Emacs now prints how
110 much pure storage it will approximately need.
111
112 ** The script etc/emacs-buffer.gdb can be used with gdb to retrieve the
113 contents of buffers from a core dump and save them to files easily, should
114 emacs crash.
115
116 ---
117 ** The Emacs terminal emulation in term.el uses a different terminfo name.
118 The Emacs terminal emulation in term.el now uses "eterm-color" as its
119 terminfo name, since term.el now supports color.
120
121 ---
122 ** Emacs Lisp source files are compressed by default if `gzip' is available.
123
124 \f
125 * Startup Changes in Emacs 22.1
126
127 +++
128 ** New command line option -Q or --quick.
129 This is like using -q --no-site-file, but in addition it also disables
130 the fancy startup screen.
131
132 +++
133 ** New command line option -D or --basic-display.
134 Disables the menu-bar, the tool-bar, the scroll-bars, tool tips, and
135 the blinking cursor.
136
137 +++
138 ** New command line option -nbc or --no-blinking-cursor disables
139 the blinking cursor on graphical terminals.
140
141 +++
142 ** The option --script FILE runs Emacs in batch mode and loads FILE.
143 It is useful for writing Emacs Lisp shell script files, because they
144 can start with this line:
145
146 #!/usr/bin/emacs --script
147
148 +++
149 ** The option --directory DIR now modifies `load-path' immediately.
150 Directories are added to the front of `load-path' in the order they
151 appear on the command line. For example, with this command line:
152
153 emacs -batch -L .. -L /tmp --eval "(require 'foo)"
154
155 Emacs looks for library `foo' in the parent directory, then in /tmp, then
156 in the other directories in `load-path'. (-L is short for --directory.)
157
158 +++
159 ** The command line option --no-windows has been changed to
160 --no-window-system. The old one still works, but is deprecated.
161
162 ---
163 ** If the environment variable DISPLAY specifies an unreachable X display,
164 Emacs will now startup as if invoked with the --no-window-system option.
165
166 +++
167 ** The -f option, used from the command line to call a function,
168 now reads arguments for the function interactively if it is
169 an interactively callable function.
170
171 +++
172 ** When you specify a frame size with --geometry, the size applies to
173 all frames you create. A position specified with --geometry only
174 affects the initial frame.
175
176 +++
177 ** Emacs can now be invoked in full-screen mode on a windowed display.
178 When Emacs is invoked on a window system, the new command-line options
179 `--fullwidth', `--fullheight', and `--fullscreen' produce a frame
180 whose width, height, or both width and height take up the entire
181 screen size. (For now, this does not work with some window managers.)
182
183 +++
184 ** Emacs now displays a splash screen by default even if command-line
185 arguments were given. The new command-line option --no-splash
186 disables the splash screen; see also the variable
187 `inhibit-startup-message' (which is also aliased as
188 `inhibit-splash-screen').
189
190 +++
191 ** The default is now to use a bitmap as the icon, so the command-line options
192 --icon-type, -i has been replaced with options --no-bitmap-icon, -nbi to turn
193 the bitmap icon off.
194
195 +++
196 ** New user option `inhibit-startup-buffer-menu'.
197 When loading many files, for instance with `emacs *', Emacs normally
198 displays a buffer menu. This option turns the buffer menu off.
199
200 +++
201 ** Init file changes
202 If the init file ~/.emacs does not exist, Emacs will try
203 ~/.emacs.d/init.el or ~/.emacs.d/init.elc. You can also put the shell
204 init file .emacs_SHELL under ~/.emacs.d.
205
206 +++
207 ** Emacs now reads the standard abbrevs file ~/.abbrev_defs
208 automatically at startup, if it exists. When Emacs offers to save
209 modified buffers, it saves the abbrevs too if they have changed. It
210 can do this either silently or asking for confirmation first,
211 according to the value of `save-abbrevs'.
212 \f
213 * Incompatible Editing Changes in Emacs 22.1
214
215 +++
216 ** M-g is now a prefix key.
217 M-g g and M-g M-g run goto-line.
218 M-g n and M-g M-n run next-error (like C-x `).
219 M-g p and M-g M-p run previous-error.
220
221 +++
222 ** C-u M-g M-g switches to the most recent previous buffer,
223 and goes to the specified line in that buffer.
224
225 When goto-line starts to execute, if there's a number in the buffer at
226 point then it acts as the default argument for the minibuffer.
227
228 +++
229 ** The old bindings C-M-delete and C-M-backspace have been deleted,
230 since there are situations where one or the other will shut down
231 the operating system or your X server.
232
233 +++
234 ** line-move-ignore-invisible now defaults to t.
235
236 +++
237 ** When the undo information of the current command gets really large
238 (beyond the value of `undo-outer-limit'), Emacs discards it and warns
239 you about it.
240
241 +++
242 ** `apply-macro-to-region-lines' now operates on all lines that begin
243 in the region, rather than on all complete lines in the region.
244
245 +++
246 ** A prefix argument is no longer required to repeat a jump to a
247 previous mark if you set `set-mark-command-repeat-pop' to t. I.e. C-u
248 C-SPC C-SPC C-SPC ... cycles through the mark ring. Use C-u C-u C-SPC
249 to set the mark immediately after a jump.
250
251 +++
252 ** The info-search bindings on C-h C-f, C-h C-k and C-h C-i
253 have been moved to C-h F, C-h K and C-h S.
254
255 +++
256 ** In incremental search, C-w is changed. M-%, C-M-w and C-M-y are special.
257
258 See below under "incremental search changes".
259
260 ---
261 ** C-x C-f RET, typing nothing in the minibuffer, is no longer a special case.
262
263 Since the default input is the current directory, this has the effect
264 of specifying the current directory. Normally that means to visit the
265 directory with Dired.
266
267 You can get the old behavior by typing C-x C-f M-n RET, which fetches
268 the actual file name into the minibuffer.
269
270 +++
271 ** The completion commands TAB, SPC and ? in the minibuffer apply only
272 to the text before point. If there is text in the buffer after point,
273 it remains unchanged.
274
275 +++
276 ** When Emacs prompts for file names, SPC no longer completes the file name.
277 This is so filenames with embedded spaces could be input without the
278 need to quote the space with a C-q. The underlying changes in the
279 keymaps that are active in the minibuffer are described below under
280 "New keymaps for typing file names".
281
282 +++
283 ** M-o now is the prefix key for setting text properties;
284 M-o M-o requests refontification.
285
286 +++
287 ** You can now follow links by clicking Mouse-1 on the link.
288
289 See below for more details.
290
291 +++
292 ** In Dired's ! command (dired-do-shell-command), `*' and `?' now
293 control substitution of the file names only when they are surrounded
294 by whitespace. This means you can now use them as shell wildcards
295 too. If you want to use just plain `*' as a wildcard, type `*""'; the
296 doublequotes make no difference in the shell, but they prevent
297 special treatment in `dired-do-shell-command'.
298 \f
299 * Editing Changes in Emacs 22.1
300
301 +++
302 ** !MEM FULL! at the start of the mode line indicates that Emacs
303 cannot get any more memory for Lisp data. This often means it could
304 crash soon if you do things that use more memory. On most systems,
305 killing buffers will get out of this state. If killing buffers does
306 not make !MEM FULL! disappear, you should save your work and start
307 a new Emacs.
308
309 +++
310 ** The max size of buffers and integers has been doubled.
311 On 32bit machines, it is now 256M (i.e. 268435455).
312
313 +++
314 ** You can now switch buffers in a cyclic order with C-x C-left
315 (previous-buffer) and C-x C-right (next-buffer). C-x left and
316 C-x right can be used as well. The functions keep a different buffer
317 cycle for each frame, using the frame-local buffer list.
318
319 +++
320 ** `undo-only' does an undo which does not redo any previous undo.
321
322 +++
323 ** M-SPC (just-one-space) when given a numeric argument N
324 converts whitespace around point to N spaces.
325
326 ---
327 ** C-x 5 C-o displays a specified buffer in another frame
328 but does not switch to that frame. It's the multi-frame
329 analogue of C-x 4 C-o.
330
331 ---
332 ** New commands to operate on pairs of open and close characters:
333 `insert-pair', `delete-pair', `raise-sexp'.
334
335 +++
336 ** New command `kill-whole-line' kills an entire line at once.
337 By default, it is bound to C-S-<backspace>.
338
339 +++
340 ** Yanking text now discards certain text properties that can
341 be inconvenient when you did not expect them. The variable
342 `yank-excluded-properties' specifies which ones. Insertion
343 of register contents and rectangles also discards these properties.
344
345 +++
346 ** The default values of paragraph-start and indent-line-function have
347 been changed to reflect those used in Text mode rather than those used
348 in Indented-Text mode.
349
350 +++
351 ** M-x setenv now expands environment variable references.
352
353 Substrings of the form `$foo' and `${foo}' in the specified new value
354 now refer to the value of environment variable foo. To include a `$'
355 in the value, use `$$'.
356
357 +++
358 ** `special-display-buffer-names' and `special-display-regexps' now
359 understand two new boolean pseudo-frame-parameters `same-frame' and
360 `same-window'.
361
362 +++
363 ** The default for the paper size (variable ps-paper-type) is taken
364 from the locale.
365
366 ** The command `list-faces-display' now accepts a prefix arg.
367 When passed, the function prompts for a regular expression and lists
368 only faces matching this regexp.
369
370 ** Mark command changes:
371
372 +++
373 *** A prefix argument is no longer required to repeat a jump to a
374 previous mark, i.e. C-u C-SPC C-SPC C-SPC ... cycles through the
375 mark ring. Use C-u C-u C-SPC to set the mark immediately after a jump.
376
377 +++
378 *** Marking commands extend the region when invoked multiple times.
379
380 If you type C-M-SPC (mark-sexp), M-@ (mark-word), M-h
381 (mark-paragraph), or C-M-h (mark-defun) repeatedly, the marked region
382 extends each time, so you can mark the next two sexps with M-C-SPC
383 M-C-SPC, for example. This feature also works for
384 mark-end-of-sentence, if you bind that to a key. It also extends the
385 region when the mark is active in Transient Mark mode, regardless of
386 the last command. To start a new region with one of marking commands
387 in Transient Mark mode, you can deactivate the active region with C-g,
388 or set the new mark with C-SPC.
389
390 +++
391 *** M-h (mark-paragraph) now accepts a prefix arg.
392
393 With positive arg, M-h marks the current and the following paragraphs;
394 if the arg is negative, it marks the current and the preceding
395 paragraphs.
396
397 +++
398 *** Some commands do something special in Transient Mark mode when the
399 mark is active--for instance, they limit their operation to the
400 region. Even if you don't normally use Transient Mark mode, you might
401 want to get this behavior from a particular command. There are two
402 ways you can enable Transient Mark mode and activate the mark, for one
403 command only.
404
405 One method is to type C-SPC C-SPC; this enables Transient Mark mode
406 and sets the mark at point. The other method is to type C-u C-x C-x.
407 This enables Transient Mark mode temporarily but does not alter the
408 mark or the region.
409
410 After these commands, Transient Mark mode remains enabled until you
411 deactivate the mark. That typically happens when you type a command
412 that alters the buffer, but you can also deactivate the mark by typing
413 C-g.
414
415 +++
416 *** Movement commands `beginning-of-buffer', `end-of-buffer',
417 `beginning-of-defun', `end-of-defun' do not set the mark if the mark
418 is already active in Transient Mark mode.
419
420 ** Help command changes:
421
422 +++
423 *** Changes in C-h bindings:
424
425 C-h e displays the *Messages* buffer.
426
427 C-h d runs apropos-documentation.
428
429 C-h followed by a control character is used for displaying files
430 that do not change:
431
432 C-h C-f displays the FAQ.
433 C-h C-e displays the PROBLEMS file.
434
435 The info-search bindings on C-h C-f, C-h C-k and C-h C-i
436 have been moved to C-h F, C-h K and C-h S.
437
438 C-h c, C-h k, C-h w, and C-h f now handle remapped interactive commands.
439 - C-h c and C-h k report the actual command (after possible remapping)
440 run by the key sequence.
441 - C-h w and C-h f on a command which has been remapped now report the
442 command it is remapped to, and the keys which can be used to run
443 that command.
444
445 For example, if C-k is bound to kill-line, and kill-line is remapped
446 to new-kill-line, these commands now report:
447 - C-h c and C-h k C-k reports:
448 C-k runs the command new-kill-line
449 - C-h w and C-h f kill-line reports:
450 kill-line is remapped to new-kill-line which is on C-k, <deleteline>
451 - C-h w and C-h f new-kill-line reports:
452 new-kill-line is on C-k
453
454 ---
455 *** Help commands `describe-function' and `describe-key' now show function
456 arguments in lowercase italics on displays that support it. To change the
457 default, customize face `help-argument-name' or redefine the function
458 `help-default-arg-highlight'.
459
460 +++
461 *** C-h v and C-h f commands now include a hyperlink to the C source for
462 variables and functions defined in C (if the C source is available).
463
464 +++
465 *** Help mode now only makes hyperlinks for faces when the face name is
466 preceded or followed by the word `face'. It no longer makes
467 hyperlinks for variables without variable documentation, unless
468 preceded by one of the words `variable' or `option'. It now makes
469 hyperlinks to Info anchors (or nodes) if the anchor (or node) name is
470 enclosed in single quotes and preceded by `info anchor' or `Info
471 anchor' (in addition to earlier `info node' and `Info node'). In
472 addition, it now makes hyperlinks to URLs as well if the URL is
473 enclosed in single quotes and preceded by `URL'.
474
475 +++
476 *** The new command `describe-char' (C-u C-x =) pops up a buffer with
477 description various information about a character, including its
478 encodings and syntax, its text properties, how to input, overlays, and
479 widgets at point. You can get more information about some of them, by
480 clicking on mouse-sensitive areas or moving there and pressing RET.
481
482 +++
483 *** The command `list-text-properties-at' has been deleted because
484 C-u C-x = gives the same information and more.
485
486 +++
487 *** New command `display-local-help' displays any local help at point
488 in the echo area. It is bound to `C-h .'. It normally displays the
489 same string that would be displayed on mouse-over using the
490 `help-echo' property, but, in certain cases, it can display a more
491 keyboard oriented alternative.
492
493 +++
494 *** New user option `help-at-pt-display-when-idle' allows to
495 automatically show the help provided by `display-local-help' on
496 point-over, after suitable idle time. The amount of idle time is
497 determined by the user option `help-at-pt-timer-delay' and defaults
498 to one second. This feature is turned off by default.
499
500 +++
501 *** The apropos commands now accept a list of words to match.
502 When more than one word is specified, at least two of those words must
503 be present for an item to match. Regular expression matching is still
504 available.
505
506 +++
507 *** The new option `apropos-sort-by-scores' causes the matching items
508 to be sorted according to their score. The score for an item is a
509 number calculated to indicate how well the item matches the words or
510 regular expression that you entered to the apropos command. The best
511 match is listed first, and the calculated score is shown for each
512 matching item.
513
514 ** Incremental Search changes:
515
516 +++
517 *** Vertical scrolling is now possible within incremental search.
518 To enable this feature, customize the new user option
519 `isearch-allow-scroll'. User written commands which satisfy stringent
520 constraints can be marked as "scrolling commands". See the Emacs manual
521 for details.
522
523 +++
524 *** C-w in incremental search now grabs either a character or a word,
525 making the decision in a heuristic way. This new job is done by the
526 command `isearch-yank-word-or-char'. To restore the old behavior,
527 bind C-w to `isearch-yank-word' in `isearch-mode-map'.
528
529 +++
530 *** C-y in incremental search now grabs the next line if point is already
531 at the end of a line.
532
533 +++
534 *** C-M-w deletes and C-M-y grabs a character in isearch mode.
535 Another method to grab a character is to enter the minibuffer by `M-e'
536 and to type `C-f' at the end of the search string in the minibuffer.
537
538 +++
539 *** M-% typed in isearch mode invokes `query-replace' or
540 `query-replace-regexp' (depending on search mode) with the current
541 search string used as the string to replace.
542
543 +++
544 *** Isearch no longer adds `isearch-resume' commands to the command
545 history by default. To enable this feature, customize the new
546 user option `isearch-resume-in-command-history'.
547
548 ** Replace command changes:
549
550 ---
551 *** New user option `query-replace-skip-read-only': when non-nil,
552 `query-replace' and related functions simply ignore
553 a match if part of it has a read-only property.
554
555 +++
556 *** When used interactively, the commands `query-replace-regexp' and
557 `replace-regexp' allow \,expr to be used in a replacement string,
558 where expr is an arbitrary Lisp expression evaluated at replacement
559 time. In many cases, this will be more convenient than using
560 `query-replace-regexp-eval'. `\#' in a replacement string now refers
561 to the count of replacements already made by the replacement command.
562 All regular expression replacement commands now allow `\?' in the
563 replacement string to specify a position where the replacement string
564 can be edited for each replacement.
565
566 +++
567 *** query-replace uses isearch lazy highlighting when the new user option
568 `query-replace-lazy-highlight' is non-nil.
569
570 ---
571 *** The current match in query-replace is highlighted in new face
572 `query-replace' which by default inherits from isearch face.
573
574 ** File operation changes:
575
576 +++
577 *** Unquoted `$' in file names do not signal an error any more when
578 the corresponding environment variable does not exist.
579 Instead, the `$ENVVAR' text is left as is, so that `$$' quoting
580 is only rarely needed.
581
582 +++
583 *** In processing a local variables list, Emacs strips the prefix and
584 suffix from every line before processing all the lines.
585
586 +++
587 *** If the local variables list contains any variable-value pairs that
588 are not known to be safe, Emacs shows a prompt asking whether to apply
589 the local variables list as a whole. In earlier versions, a prompt
590 was only issued for variables explicitly marked as risky (for the
591 definition of risky variables, see `risky-local-variable-p').
592
593 At the prompt, the user can choose to save the contents of this local
594 variables list to `safe-local-variable-values'. This new customizable
595 option is a list of variable-value pairs that are known to be safe.
596 Variables can also be marked as safe with the existing
597 `safe-local-variable' property (see `safe-local-variable-p').
598 However, risky variables will not be added to
599 `safe-local-variable-values' in this way.
600
601 +++
602 *** find-file-read-only visits multiple files in read-only mode,
603 when the file name contains wildcard characters.
604
605 +++
606 *** find-alternate-file replaces the current file with multiple files,
607 when the file name contains wildcard characters.
608
609 +++
610 *** Auto Compression mode is now enabled by default.
611
612 ---
613 *** C-x C-f RET, typing nothing in the minibuffer, is no longer a special case.
614
615 Since the default input is the current directory, this has the effect
616 of specifying the current directory. Normally that means to visit the
617 directory with Dired.
618
619 +++
620 *** When you are root, and you visit a file whose modes specify
621 read-only, the Emacs buffer is now read-only too. Type C-x C-q if you
622 want to make the buffer writable. (As root, you can in fact alter the
623 file.)
624
625 +++
626 *** C-x s (save-some-buffers) now offers an option `d' to diff a buffer
627 against its file, so you can see what changes you would be saving.
628
629 +++
630 *** The commands copy-file, rename-file, make-symbolic-link and
631 add-name-to-file, when given a directory as the "new name" argument,
632 convert it to a file name by merging in the within-directory part of
633 the existing file's name. (This is the same convention that shell
634 commands cp, mv, and ln follow.) Thus, M-x copy-file RET ~/foo RET
635 /tmp RET copies ~/foo to /tmp/foo.
636
637 ---
638 *** When used interactively, `format-write-file' now asks for confirmation
639 before overwriting an existing file, unless a prefix argument is
640 supplied. This behavior is analogous to `write-file'.
641
642 ---
643 *** The variable `auto-save-file-name-transforms' now has a third element that
644 controls whether or not the function `make-auto-save-file-name' will
645 attempt to construct a unique auto-save name (e.g. for remote files).
646
647 +++
648 *** The new option `write-region-inhibit-fsync' disables calls to fsync
649 in `write-region'. This can be useful on laptops to avoid spinning up
650 the hard drive upon each file save. Enabling this variable may result
651 in data loss, use with care.
652
653 +++
654 *** If the user visits a file larger than `large-file-warning-threshold',
655 Emacs asks for confirmation.
656
657 +++
658 *** require-final-newline now has two new possible values:
659
660 `visit' means add a newline (as an undoable change) if it's needed
661 when visiting the file.
662
663 `visit-save' means add a newline (as an undoable change) if it's
664 needed when visiting the file, and also add a newline if it's needed
665 when saving the file.
666
667 +++
668 *** The new option mode-require-final-newline controls how certain
669 major modes enable require-final-newline. Any major mode that's
670 designed for a kind of file that should normally end in a newline
671 sets require-final-newline based on mode-require-final-newline.
672 So you can customize mode-require-final-newline to control what these
673 modes do.
674
675 ** Minibuffer changes:
676
677 +++
678 *** The new file-name-shadow-mode is turned ON by default, so that when
679 entering a file name, any prefix which Emacs will ignore is dimmed.
680
681 +++
682 *** There's a new face `minibuffer-prompt'.
683 Emacs adds this face to the list of text properties stored in the
684 variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', which is used to display the
685 prompt string.
686
687 ---
688 *** Enhanced visual feedback in `*Completions*' buffer.
689
690 Completions lists use faces to highlight what all completions
691 have in common and where they begin to differ.
692
693 The common prefix shared by all possible completions uses the face
694 `completions-common-part', while the first character that isn't the
695 same uses the face `completions-first-difference'. By default,
696 `completions-common-part' inherits from `default', and
697 `completions-first-difference' inherits from `bold'. The idea of
698 `completions-common-part' is that you can use it to make the common
699 parts less visible than normal, so that the rest of the differing
700 parts is, by contrast, slightly highlighted.
701
702 Above fontification is always done when listing completions is
703 triggered at minibuffer. If you want to fontify completions whose
704 listing is triggered at the other normal buffer, you have to pass
705 the common prefix of completions to `display-completion-list' as
706 its second argument.
707
708 +++
709 *** File-name completion can now ignore specified directories.
710 If an element of the list in `completion-ignored-extensions' ends in a
711 slash `/', it indicates a subdirectory that should be ignored when
712 completing file names. Elements of `completion-ignored-extensions'
713 which do not end in a slash are never considered when a completion
714 candidate is a directory.
715
716 +++
717 *** The completion commands TAB, SPC and ? in the minibuffer apply only
718 to the text before point. If there is text in the buffer after point,
719 it remains unchanged.
720
721 +++
722 *** New user option `history-delete-duplicates'.
723 If set to t when adding a new history element, all previous identical
724 elements are deleted.
725
726 ** Redisplay changes:
727
728 +++
729 *** The mode line position information now comes before the major mode.
730 When the file is maintained under version control, that information
731 appears between the position information and the major mode.
732
733 +++
734 *** New face `escape-glyph' highlights control characters and escape glyphs.
735
736 +++
737 *** Non-breaking space and hyphens are now displayed with a special
738 face, either nobreak-space or escape-glyph. You can turn this off or
739 specify a different mode by setting the variable `nobreak-char-display'.
740
741 +++
742 *** The parameters of automatic hscrolling can now be customized.
743 The variable `hscroll-margin' determines how many columns away from
744 the window edge point is allowed to get before automatic hscrolling
745 will horizontally scroll the window. The default value is 5.
746
747 The variable `hscroll-step' determines how many columns automatic
748 hscrolling scrolls the window when point gets too close to the
749 window edge. If its value is zero, the default, Emacs scrolls the
750 window so as to center point. If its value is an integer, it says how
751 many columns to scroll. If the value is a floating-point number, it
752 gives the fraction of the window's width to scroll the window.
753
754 The variable `automatic-hscrolling' was renamed to
755 `auto-hscroll-mode'. The old name is still available as an alias.
756
757 ---
758 *** Moving or scrolling through images (and other lines) taller than
759 the window now works sensibly, by automatically adjusting the window's
760 vscroll property.
761
762 +++
763 *** The new face `mode-line-inactive' is used to display the mode line
764 of non-selected windows. The `mode-line' face is now used to display
765 the mode line of the currently selected window.
766
767 The new variable `mode-line-in-non-selected-windows' controls whether
768 the `mode-line-inactive' face is used.
769
770 +++
771 *** You can now customize the use of window fringes. To control this
772 for all frames, use M-x fringe-mode or the Show/Hide submenu of the
773 top-level Options menu, or customize the `fringe-mode' variable. To
774 control this for a specific frame, use the command M-x
775 set-fringe-style.
776
777 +++
778 *** Angle icons in the fringes can indicate the buffer boundaries. In
779 addition, up and down arrow bitmaps in the fringe indicate which ways
780 the window can be scrolled.
781
782 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
783 `indicate-buffer-boundaries' to a non-nil value. The default value of
784 this variable is found in `default-indicate-buffer-boundaries'.
785
786 If value is `left' or `right', both angle and arrow bitmaps are
787 displayed in the left or right fringe, resp.
788
789 The value can also be an alist which specifies the presence and
790 position of each bitmap individually.
791
792 For example, ((top . left) (t . right)) places the top angle bitmap
793 in left fringe, the bottom angle bitmap in right fringe, and both
794 arrow bitmaps in right fringe. To show just the angle bitmaps in the
795 left fringe, but no arrow bitmaps, use ((top . left) (bottom . left)).
796
797 +++
798 *** On window systems, lines which are exactly as wide as the window
799 (not counting the final newline character) are no longer broken into
800 two lines on the display (with just the newline on the second line).
801 Instead, the newline now "overflows" into the right fringe, and the
802 cursor will be displayed in the fringe when positioned on that newline.
803
804 The new user option 'overflow-newline-into-fringe' can be set to nil to
805 revert to the old behavior of continuing such lines.
806
807 +++
808 *** When a window has display margin areas, the fringes are now
809 displayed between the margins and the buffer's text area, rather than
810 outside those margins.
811
812 +++
813 *** A window can now have individual fringe and scroll-bar settings,
814 in addition to the individual display margin settings.
815
816 Such individual settings are now preserved when windows are split
817 horizontally or vertically, a saved window configuration is restored,
818 or when the frame is resized.
819
820 ** Cursor display changes:
821
822 +++
823 *** On X, MS Windows, and Mac OS, the blinking cursor's "off" state is
824 now controlled by the variable `blink-cursor-alist'.
825
826 +++
827 *** The X resource cursorBlink can be used to turn off cursor blinking.
828
829 +++
830 *** Emacs can produce an underscore-like (horizontal bar) cursor.
831 The underscore cursor is set by putting `(cursor-type . hbar)' in
832 default-frame-alist. It supports variable heights, like the `bar'
833 cursor does.
834
835 +++
836 *** Display of hollow cursors now obeys the buffer-local value (if any)
837 of `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' in the buffer that the cursor
838 appears in.
839
840 +++
841 *** The variable `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' can now be set to any
842 of the recognized cursor types.
843
844 +++
845 *** On text terminals, the variable `visible-cursor' controls whether Emacs
846 uses the "very visible" cursor (the default) or the normal cursor.
847
848 ** New faces:
849
850 +++
851 *** `mode-line-highlight' is the standard face indicating mouse sensitive
852 elements on mode-line (and header-line) like `highlight' face on text
853 areas.
854
855 *** `mode-line-buffer-id' is the standard face for buffer identification
856 parts of the mode line.
857
858 +++
859 *** `shadow' face defines the appearance of the "shadowed" text, i.e.
860 the text which should be less noticeable than the surrounding text.
861 This can be achieved by using shades of grey in contrast with either
862 black or white default foreground color. This generic shadow face
863 allows customization of the appearance of shadowed text in one place,
864 so package-specific faces can inherit from it.
865
866 +++
867 *** `vertical-border' face is used for the vertical divider between windows.
868
869 ** Font-Lock changes:
870
871 +++
872 *** M-o now is the prefix key for setting text properties;
873 M-o M-o requests refontification.
874
875 +++
876 *** All modes now support using M-x font-lock-mode to toggle
877 fontification, even those such as Occur, Info, and comint-derived
878 modes that do their own fontification in a special way.
879
880 The variable `Info-fontify' is no longer applicable; to disable
881 fontification in Info, remove `turn-on-font-lock' from
882 `Info-mode-hook'.
883
884 +++
885 *** font-lock: in modes like C and Lisp where the fontification assumes that
886 an open-paren in column 0 is always outside of any string or comment,
887 font-lock now highlights any such open-paren-in-column-zero in bold-red
888 if it is inside a string or a comment, to indicate that it can cause
889 trouble with fontification and/or indentation.
890
891 +++
892 *** New standard font-lock face `font-lock-preprocessor-face'.
893
894 +++
895 *** New standard font-lock face `font-lock-comment-delimiter-face'.
896
897 +++
898 *** Easy to overlook single character negation can now be font-locked.
899 You can use the new variable `font-lock-negation-char-face' and the face of
900 the same name to customize this. Currently the cc-modes, sh-script-mode,
901 cperl-mode and make-mode support this.
902
903 ---
904 *** The default settings for JIT stealth lock parameters are changed.
905 The default value for the user option jit-lock-stealth-time is now 16
906 instead of 3, and the default value of jit-lock-stealth-nice is now
907 0.5 instead of 0.125. The new defaults should lower the CPU usage
908 when Emacs is fontifying in the background.
909
910 ---
911 *** jit-lock can now be delayed with `jit-lock-defer-time'.
912
913 If this variable is non-nil, its value should be the amount of Emacs
914 idle time in seconds to wait before starting fontification. For
915 example, if you set `jit-lock-defer-time' to 0.25, fontification will
916 only happen after 0.25s of idle time.
917
918 ---
919 *** contextual refontification is now separate from stealth fontification.
920
921 jit-lock-defer-contextually is renamed jit-lock-contextually and
922 jit-lock-context-time determines the delay after which contextual
923 refontification takes place.
924
925 ** Menu support:
926
927 ---
928 *** A menu item "Show/Hide" was added to the top-level menu "Options".
929 This menu allows you to turn various display features on and off (such
930 as the fringes, the tool bar, the speedbar, and the menu bar itself).
931 You can also move the vertical scroll bar to either side here or turn
932 it off completely. There is also a menu-item to toggle displaying of
933 current date and time, current line and column number in the mode-line.
934
935 ---
936 *** Speedbar has moved from the "Tools" top level menu to "Show/Hide".
937
938 ---
939 *** You can exit dialog windows and menus by typing C-g.
940
941 ---
942 *** The menu item "Open File..." has been split into two items, "New File..."
943 and "Open File...". "Open File..." now opens only existing files. This is
944 to support existing GUI file selection dialogs better.
945
946 +++
947 *** The file selection dialog for Gtk+, Mac, W32 and Motif/Lesstif can be
948 disabled by customizing the variable `use-file-dialog'.
949
950 ---
951 *** The pop up menus for Lucid now stay up if you do a fast click and can
952 be navigated with the arrow keys (like Gtk+, Mac and W32).
953
954 +++
955 *** The Lucid menus can display multilingual text in your locale. You have
956 to explicitly specify a fontSet resource for this to work, for example
957 `-xrm "Emacs*fontSet: -*-helvetica-medium-r-*--*-120-*-*-*-*-*-*,*"'.
958
959 ---
960 *** Dialogs for Lucid/Athena and Lesstif/Motif now pops down when pressing
961 ESC, like they do for Gtk+, Mac and W32.
962
963 +++
964 *** For the Gtk+ version, you can make Emacs use the old file dialog
965 by setting the variable `x-use-old-gtk-file-dialog' to t. Default is to use
966 the new dialog.
967
968 ** Mouse changes:
969
970 +++
971 *** If you set the new variable `mouse-autoselect-window' to a non-nil
972 value, windows are automatically selected as you move the mouse from
973 one Emacs window to another, even within a frame. A minibuffer window
974 can be selected only when it is active.
975
976 +++
977 *** On X, when the window manager requires that you click on a frame to
978 select it (give it focus), the selected window and cursor position
979 normally changes according to the mouse click position. If you set
980 the variable x-mouse-click-focus-ignore-position to t, the selected
981 window and cursor position do not change when you click on a frame
982 to give it focus.
983
984 +++
985 *** You can now follow links by clicking Mouse-1 on the link.
986
987 Traditionally, Emacs uses a Mouse-1 click to set point and a Mouse-2
988 click to follow a link, whereas most other applications use a Mouse-1
989 click for both purposes, depending on whether you click outside or
990 inside a link. Now the behavior of a Mouse-1 click has been changed
991 to match this context-sentitive dual behavior. (If you prefer the old
992 behavior, set the user option `mouse-1-click-follows-link' to nil.)
993
994 Depending on the current mode, a Mouse-2 click in Emacs can do much
995 more than just follow a link, so the new Mouse-1 behavior is only
996 activated for modes which explicitly mark a clickable text as a "link"
997 (see the new function `mouse-on-link-p' for details). The Lisp
998 packages that are included in release 22.1 have been adapted to do
999 this, but external packages may not yet support this. However, there
1000 is no risk in using such packages, as the worst thing that could
1001 happen is that you get the original Mouse-1 behavior when you click
1002 on a link, which typically means that you set point where you click.
1003
1004 If you want to get the original Mouse-1 action also inside a link, you
1005 just need to press the Mouse-1 button a little longer than a normal
1006 click (i.e. press and hold the Mouse-1 button for half a second before
1007 you release it).
1008
1009 Dragging the Mouse-1 inside a link still performs the original
1010 drag-mouse-1 action, typically copy the text.
1011
1012 You can customize the new Mouse-1 behavior via the new user options
1013 `mouse-1-click-follows-link' and `mouse-1-click-in-non-selected-windows'.
1014
1015 +++
1016 *** Emacs normally highlights mouse sensitive text whenever the mouse
1017 is over the text. By setting the new variable `mouse-highlight', you
1018 can optionally enable mouse highlighting only after you move the
1019 mouse, so that highlighting disappears when you press a key. You can
1020 also disable mouse highlighting.
1021
1022 +++
1023 *** You can now customize if selecting a region by dragging the mouse
1024 shall not copy the selected text to the kill-ring by setting the new
1025 variable mouse-drag-copy-region to nil.
1026
1027 ---
1028 *** mouse-wheels can now scroll a specific fraction of the window
1029 (rather than a fixed number of lines) and the scrolling is `progressive'.
1030
1031 ---
1032 *** Emacs ignores mouse-2 clicks while the mouse wheel is being moved.
1033
1034 People tend to push the mouse wheel (which counts as a mouse-2 click)
1035 unintentionally while turning the wheel, so these clicks are now
1036 ignored. You can customize this with the mouse-wheel-click-event and
1037 mouse-wheel-inhibit-click-time variables.
1038
1039 +++
1040 *** Under X, mouse-wheel-mode is turned on by default.
1041
1042 ** Multilingual Environment (Mule) changes:
1043
1044 ---
1045 *** Language environment and various default coding systems are setup
1046 more correctly according to the current locale name. If the locale
1047 name doesn't specify a charset, the default is what glibc defines.
1048 This change can result in using the different coding systems as
1049 default in some locale (e.g. vi_VN).
1050
1051 +++
1052 *** The keyboard-coding-system is now automatically set based on your
1053 current locale settings if you are not using a window system. This
1054 can mean that the META key doesn't work but generates non-ASCII
1055 characters instead, depending on how the terminal (or terminal
1056 emulator) works. Use `set-keyboard-coding-system' (or customize
1057 keyboard-coding-system) if you prefer META to work (the old default)
1058 or if the locale doesn't describe the character set actually generated
1059 by the keyboard. See Info node `Single-Byte Character Support'.
1060
1061 +++
1062 *** The new command `revert-buffer-with-coding-system' (C-x RET r)
1063 revisits the current file using a coding system that you specify.
1064
1065 +++
1066 *** New command `recode-region' decodes the region again by a specified
1067 coding system.
1068
1069 +++
1070 *** The new command `recode-file-name' changes the encoding of the name
1071 of a file.
1072
1073 ---
1074 *** New command `ucs-insert' inserts a character specified by its
1075 unicode.
1076
1077 +++
1078 *** The new command `set-file-name-coding-system' (C-x RET F) sets
1079 coding system for encoding and decoding file names. A new menu item
1080 (Options->Mule->Set Coding Systems->For File Name) invokes this
1081 command.
1082
1083 +++
1084 *** New command quail-show-key shows what key (or key sequence) to type
1085 in the current input method to input a character at point.
1086
1087 +++
1088 *** Limited support for character `unification' has been added.
1089 Emacs now knows how to translate between different representations of
1090 the same characters in various Emacs charsets according to standard
1091 Unicode mappings. This applies mainly to characters in the ISO 8859
1092 sets plus some other 8-bit sets, but can be extended. For instance,
1093 translation works amongst the Emacs ...-iso8859-... charsets and the
1094 mule-unicode-... ones.
1095
1096 By default this translation happens automatically on encoding.
1097 Self-inserting characters are translated to make the input conformant
1098 with the encoding of the buffer in which it's being used, where
1099 possible.
1100
1101 You can force a more complete unification with the user option
1102 unify-8859-on-decoding-mode. That maps all the Latin-N character sets
1103 into Unicode characters (from the latin-iso8859-1 and
1104 mule-unicode-0100-24ff charsets) on decoding. Note that this mode
1105 will often effectively clobber data with an iso-2022 encoding.
1106
1107 ---
1108 *** There is support for decoding Greek and Cyrillic characters into
1109 either Unicode (the mule-unicode charsets) or the iso-8859 charsets,
1110 when possible. The latter are more space-efficient. This is
1111 controlled by user option utf-fragment-on-decoding.
1112
1113 ---
1114 *** New language environments: French, Ukrainian, Tajik,
1115 Bulgarian, Belarusian, Ukrainian, UTF-8, Windows-1255, Welsh, Latin-6,
1116 Latin-7, Lithuanian, Latvian, Swedish, Slovenian, Croatian, Georgian,
1117 Italian, Russian, Malayalam, Tamil, Russian, Chinese-EUC-TW. (Set up
1118 automatically according to the locale.)
1119
1120 ---
1121 *** New input methods: latin-alt-postfix, latin-postfix, latin-prefix,
1122 ukrainian-computer, belarusian, bulgarian-bds, russian-computer,
1123 vietnamese-telex, lithuanian-numeric, lithuanian-keyboard,
1124 latvian-keyboard, welsh, georgian, rfc1345, ucs, sgml,
1125 bulgarian-phonetic, dutch, slovenian, croatian, malayalam-inscript,
1126 tamil-inscript.
1127
1128 ---
1129 *** New input method chinese-sisheng for inputting Chinese Pinyin
1130 characters.
1131
1132 ---
1133 *** Improved Thai support. A new minor mode `thai-word-mode' (which is
1134 automatically activated if you select Thai as a language
1135 environment) changes key bindings of most word-oriented commands to
1136 versions which recognize Thai words. Affected commands are
1137 M-f (forward-word)
1138 M-b (backward-word)
1139 M-d (kill-word)
1140 M-DEL (backward-kill-word)
1141 M-t (transpose-words)
1142 M-q (fill-paragraph)
1143
1144 ---
1145 *** Indian support has been updated.
1146 The in-is13194 coding system is now Unicode-based. CDAC fonts are
1147 assumed. There is a framework for supporting various
1148 Indian scripts, but currently only Devanagari, Malayalam and Tamil are
1149 supported.
1150
1151 ---
1152 *** A UTF-7 coding system is available in the library `utf-7'.
1153
1154 ---
1155 *** The utf-8/16 coding systems have been enhanced.
1156 By default, untranslatable utf-8 sequences are simply composed into
1157 single quasi-characters. User option `utf-translate-cjk-mode' (it is
1158 turned on by default) arranges to translate many utf-8 CJK character
1159 sequences into real Emacs characters in a similar way to the Mule-UCS
1160 system. As this loads a fairly big data on demand, people who are not
1161 interested in CJK characters may want to customize it to nil.
1162 You can augment/amend the CJK translation via hash tables
1163 `ucs-mule-cjk-to-unicode' and `ucs-unicode-to-mule-cjk'. The utf-8
1164 coding system now also encodes characters from most of Emacs's
1165 one-dimensional internal charsets, specifically the ISO-8859 ones.
1166 The utf-16 coding system is affected similarly.
1167
1168 ---
1169 *** A new coding system `euc-tw' has been added for traditional Chinese
1170 in CNS encoding; it accepts both Big 5 and CNS as input; on saving,
1171 Big 5 is then converted to CNS.
1172
1173 ---
1174 *** Many new coding systems are available in the `code-pages' library.
1175 These include complete versions of most of those in codepage.el, based
1176 on Unicode mappings. `codepage-setup' is now obsolete and is used
1177 only in the MS-DOS port of Emacs. All coding systems defined in
1178 `code-pages' are auto-loaded.
1179
1180 ---
1181 *** New variable `utf-translate-cjk-unicode-range' controls which
1182 Unicode characters to translate in `utf-translate-cjk-mode'.
1183
1184 ---
1185 *** iso-10646-1 (`Unicode') fonts can be used to display any range of
1186 characters encodable by the utf-8 coding system. Just specify the
1187 fontset appropriately.
1188
1189 ** Customize changes:
1190
1191 +++
1192 *** Custom themes are collections of customize options. Create a
1193 custom theme with M-x customize-create-theme. Use M-x load-theme to
1194 load and enable a theme, and M-x disable-theme to disable it. Use M-x
1195 enable-theme to enable a disabled theme.
1196
1197 +++
1198 *** The commands M-x customize-face and M-x customize-face-other-window
1199 now look at the character after point. If a face or faces are
1200 specified for that character, the commands by default customize those
1201 faces.
1202
1203 ---
1204 *** The face-customization widget has been reworked to be less confusing.
1205 In particular, when you enable a face attribute using the corresponding
1206 check-box, there's no longer a redundant `*' option in value selection
1207 for that attribute; the values you can choose are only those which make
1208 sense for the attribute. When an attribute is de-selected by unchecking
1209 its check-box, then the (now ignored, but still present temporarily in
1210 case you re-select the attribute) value is hidden.
1211
1212 +++
1213 *** When you set or reset a variable's value in a Customize buffer,
1214 the previous value becomes the "backup value" of the variable.
1215 You can go back to that backup value by selecting "Use Backup Value"
1216 under the "[State]" button.
1217
1218 ** Buffer Menu changes:
1219
1220 +++
1221 *** New command `Buffer-menu-toggle-files-only' toggles display of file
1222 buffers only in the Buffer Menu. It is bound to T in Buffer Menu
1223 mode.
1224
1225 +++
1226 *** `buffer-menu' and `list-buffers' now list buffers whose names begin
1227 with a space, when those buffers are visiting files. Normally buffers
1228 whose names begin with space are omitted.
1229
1230 ---
1231 *** The new options `buffers-menu-show-directories' and
1232 `buffers-menu-show-status' let you control how buffers are displayed
1233 in the menu dropped down when you click "Buffers" from the menu bar.
1234
1235 `buffers-menu-show-directories' controls whether the menu displays
1236 leading directories as part of the file name visited by the buffer.
1237 If its value is `unless-uniquify', the default, directories are
1238 shown unless uniquify-buffer-name-style' is non-nil. The value of nil
1239 and t turn the display of directories off and on, respectively.
1240
1241 `buffers-menu-show-status' controls whether the Buffers menu includes
1242 the modified and read-only status of the buffers. By default it is
1243 t, and the status is shown.
1244
1245 Setting these variables directly does not take effect until next time
1246 the Buffers menu is regenerated.
1247
1248 ** Dired mode:
1249
1250 ---
1251 *** New faces dired-header, dired-mark, dired-marked, dired-flagged,
1252 dired-ignored, dired-directory, dired-symlink, dired-warning
1253 introduced for Dired mode instead of font-lock faces.
1254
1255 +++
1256 *** New Dired command `dired-compare-directories' marks files
1257 with different file attributes in two dired buffers.
1258
1259 +++
1260 *** New Dired command `dired-do-touch' (bound to T) changes timestamps
1261 of marked files with the value entered in the minibuffer.
1262
1263 +++
1264 *** In Dired's ! command (dired-do-shell-command), `*' and `?' now
1265 control substitution of the file names only when they are surrounded
1266 by whitespace. This means you can now use them as shell wildcards
1267 too. If you want to use just plain `*' as a wildcard, type `*""'; the
1268 double quotes make no difference in the shell, but they prevent
1269 special treatment in `dired-do-shell-command'.
1270
1271 +++
1272 *** In Dired, the w command now copies the current line's file name
1273 into the kill ring. With a zero prefix arg, copies absolute file names.
1274
1275 +++
1276 *** In Dired-x, Omitting files is now a minor mode, dired-omit-mode.
1277
1278 The mode toggling command is bound to M-o. A new command
1279 dired-mark-omitted, bound to * O, marks omitted files. The variable
1280 dired-omit-files-p is obsoleted, use the mode toggling function
1281 instead.
1282
1283 +++
1284 *** The variables dired-free-space-program and dired-free-space-args
1285 have been renamed to directory-free-space-program and
1286 directory-free-space-args, and they now apply whenever Emacs puts a
1287 directory listing into a buffer.
1288
1289 ** Comint changes:
1290
1291 ---
1292 *** The comint prompt can now be made read-only, using the new user
1293 option `comint-prompt-read-only'. This is not enabled by default,
1294 except in IELM buffers. The read-only status of IELM prompts can be
1295 controlled with the new user option `ielm-prompt-read-only', which
1296 overrides `comint-prompt-read-only'.
1297
1298 The new commands `comint-kill-whole-line' and `comint-kill-region'
1299 support editing comint buffers with read-only prompts.
1300
1301 `comint-kill-whole-line' is like `kill-whole-line', but ignores both
1302 read-only and field properties. Hence, it always kill entire
1303 lines, including any prompts.
1304
1305 `comint-kill-region' is like `kill-region', except that it ignores
1306 read-only properties, if it is safe to do so. This means that if any
1307 part of a prompt is deleted, then the entire prompt must be deleted
1308 and that all prompts must stay at the beginning of a line. If this is
1309 not the case, then `comint-kill-region' behaves just like
1310 `kill-region' if read-only properties are involved: it copies the text
1311 to the kill-ring, but does not delete it.
1312
1313 +++
1314 *** The new command `comint-insert-previous-argument' in comint-derived
1315 modes (shell-mode, etc.) inserts arguments from previous command lines,
1316 like bash's `ESC .' binding. It is bound by default to `C-c .', but
1317 otherwise behaves quite similarly to the bash version.
1318
1319 +++
1320 *** `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields' has been renamed
1321 `comint-use-prompt-regexp'. The old name has been kept as an alias,
1322 but declared obsolete.
1323
1324 ** M-x Compile changes:
1325
1326 ---
1327 *** M-x compile has become more robust and reliable
1328
1329 Quite a few more kinds of messages are recognized. Messages that are
1330 recognized as warnings or informational come in orange or green, instead of
1331 red. Informational messages are by default skipped with `next-error'
1332 (controlled by `compilation-skip-threshold').
1333
1334 Location data is collected on the fly as the *compilation* buffer changes.
1335 This means you could modify messages to make them point to different files.
1336 This also means you can not go to locations of messages you may have deleted.
1337
1338 The variable `compilation-error-regexp-alist' has now become customizable. If
1339 you had added your own regexps to this, you'll probably need to include a
1340 leading `^', otherwise they'll match anywhere on a line. There is now also a
1341 `compilation-mode-font-lock-keywords' and it nicely handles all the checks
1342 that configure outputs and -o options so you see at a glance where you are.
1343
1344 The new file etc/compilation.txt gives examples of each type of message.
1345
1346 +++
1347 *** New user option `compilation-environment'.
1348 This option allows you to specify environment variables for inferior
1349 compilation processes without affecting the environment that all
1350 subprocesses inherit.
1351
1352 +++
1353 *** New user option `compilation-disable-input'.
1354 If this is non-nil, send end-of-file as compilation process input.
1355
1356 +++
1357 *** New options `next-error-highlight' and `next-error-highlight-no-select'
1358 specify the method of highlighting of the corresponding source line
1359 in new face `next-error'.
1360
1361 +++
1362 *** A new minor mode `next-error-follow-minor-mode' can be used in
1363 compilation-mode, grep-mode, occur-mode, and diff-mode (i.e. all the
1364 modes that can use `next-error'). In this mode, cursor motion in the
1365 buffer causes automatic display in another window of the corresponding
1366 matches, compilation errors, etc. This minor mode can be toggled with
1367 C-c C-f.
1368
1369 +++
1370 *** When the left fringe is displayed, an arrow points to current message in
1371 the compilation buffer.
1372
1373 +++
1374 *** The new variable `compilation-context-lines' controls lines of leading
1375 context before the current message. If nil and the left fringe is displayed,
1376 it doesn't scroll the compilation output window. If there is no left fringe,
1377 no arrow is displayed and a value of nil means display the message at the top
1378 of the window.
1379
1380 ** Occur mode changes:
1381
1382 +++
1383 *** In the *Occur* buffer, `o' switches to it in another window, and
1384 C-o displays the current line's occurrence in another window without
1385 switching to it.
1386
1387 +++
1388 *** You can now use next-error (C-x `) and previous-error to advance to
1389 the next/previous matching line found by M-x occur.
1390
1391 +++
1392 *** The new command `multi-occur' is just like `occur', except it can
1393 search multiple buffers. There is also a new command
1394 `multi-occur-in-matching-buffers' which allows you to specify the
1395 buffers to search by their filenames or buffer names. Internally,
1396 Occur mode has been rewritten, and now uses font-lock, among other
1397 changes.
1398
1399 ** Grep changes:
1400
1401 +++
1402 *** Grep has been decoupled from compilation mode setup.
1403
1404 There's a new separate package grep.el, with its own submenu and
1405 customization group.
1406
1407 +++
1408 *** `grep-find' is now also available under the name `find-grep' where
1409 people knowing `find-grep-dired' would probably expect it.
1410
1411 +++
1412 *** New commands `lgrep' (local grep) and `rgrep' (recursive grep) are
1413 more user-friendly versions of `grep' and `grep-find', which prompt
1414 separately for the regular expression to match, the files to search,
1415 and the base directory for the search (rgrep only). Case sensitivitivy
1416 of the search is controlled by the current value of `case-fold-search'.
1417
1418 These commands build the shell commands based on the new variables
1419 `grep-template' (lgrep) and `grep-find-template' (rgrep).
1420
1421 The files to search can use aliases defined in `grep-files-aliases'.
1422
1423 Subdirectories listed in `grep-find-ignored-directories' such as those
1424 typically used by various version control systems, like CVS and arch,
1425 are automatically skipped by `rgrep'.
1426
1427 ---
1428 *** The grep commands provide highlighting support.
1429
1430 Hits are fontified in green, and hits in binary files in orange. Grep buffers
1431 can be saved and automatically revisited.
1432
1433 ---
1434 *** The new variables `grep-window-height' and `grep-scroll-output' override
1435 the corresponding compilation mode settings, for grep commands only.
1436
1437 +++
1438 *** New option `grep-highlight-matches' highlights matches in *grep*
1439 buffer. It uses a special feature of some grep programs which accept
1440 --color option to output markers around matches. When going to the next
1441 match with `next-error' the exact match is highlighted in the source
1442 buffer. Otherwise, if `grep-highlight-matches' is nil, the whole
1443 source line is highlighted.
1444
1445 +++
1446 *** New key bindings in grep output window:
1447 SPC and DEL scrolls window up and down. C-n and C-p moves to next and
1448 previous match in the grep window. RET jumps to the source line of
1449 the current match. `n' and `p' shows next and previous match in
1450 other window, but does not switch buffer. `{' and `}' jumps to the
1451 previous or next file in the grep output. TAB also jumps to the next
1452 file.
1453
1454 +++
1455 *** M-x grep now tries to avoid appending `/dev/null' to the command line
1456 by using GNU grep `-H' option instead. M-x grep automatically
1457 detects whether this is possible or not the first time it is invoked.
1458 When `-H' is used, the grep command line supplied by the user is passed
1459 unchanged to the system to execute, which allows more complicated
1460 command lines to be used than was possible before.
1461
1462 ** X Windows Support:
1463
1464 +++
1465 *** Emacs now supports drag and drop for X. Dropping a file on a window
1466 opens it, dropping text inserts the text. Dropping a file on a dired
1467 buffer copies or moves the file to that directory.
1468
1469 +++
1470 *** Under X11, it is possible to swap Alt and Meta (and Super and Hyper).
1471 The new variables `x-alt-keysym', `x-hyper-keysym', `x-meta-keysym',
1472 and `x-super-keysym' can be used to choose which keysyms Emacs should
1473 use for the modifiers. For example, the following two lines swap
1474 Meta and Alt:
1475 (setq x-alt-keysym 'meta)
1476 (setq x-meta-keysym 'alt)
1477
1478 +++
1479 *** The X resource useXIM can be used to turn off use of XIM, which can
1480 speed up Emacs with slow networking to the X server.
1481
1482 If the configure option `--without-xim' was used to turn off use of
1483 XIM by default, the X resource useXIM can be used to turn it on.
1484
1485 ---
1486 *** The new variable `x-select-request-type' controls how Emacs
1487 requests X selection. The default value is nil, which means that
1488 Emacs requests X selection with types COMPOUND_TEXT and UTF8_STRING,
1489 and use the more appropriately result.
1490
1491 ---
1492 *** The scrollbar under LessTif or Motif has a smoother drag-scrolling.
1493 On the other hand, the size of the thumb does not represent the actual
1494 amount of text shown any more (only a crude approximation of it).
1495
1496 ** Xterm support:
1497
1498 ---
1499 *** If you enable Xterm Mouse mode, Emacs will respond to mouse clicks
1500 on the mode line, header line and display margin, when run in an xterm.
1501
1502 ---
1503 *** Improved key bindings support when running in an xterm.
1504 When emacs is running in an xterm more key bindings are available. The
1505 following should work:
1506 {C,S,C-S,A}-{right,left,up,down,prior,next,delete,insert,F1-12}.
1507 These key bindings work on xterm from X.org 6.8, they might not work on
1508 some older versions of xterm, or on some proprietary versions.
1509
1510 ** Character terminal color support changes:
1511
1512 +++
1513 *** The new command-line option --color=MODE lets you specify a standard
1514 mode for a tty color support. It is meant to be used on character
1515 terminals whose capabilities are not set correctly in the terminal
1516 database, or with terminal emulators which support colors, but don't
1517 set the TERM environment variable to a name of a color-capable
1518 terminal. "emacs --color" uses the same color commands as GNU `ls'
1519 when invoked with "ls --color", so if your terminal can support colors
1520 in "ls --color", it will support "emacs --color" as well. See the
1521 user manual for the possible values of the MODE parameter.
1522
1523 ---
1524 *** Emacs now supports several character terminals which provide more
1525 than 8 colors. For example, for `xterm', 16-color, 88-color, and
1526 256-color modes are supported. Emacs automatically notes at startup
1527 the extended number of colors, and defines the appropriate entries for
1528 all of these colors.
1529
1530 +++
1531 *** Emacs now uses the full range of available colors for the default
1532 faces when running on a color terminal, including 16-, 88-, and
1533 256-color xterms. This means that when you run "emacs -nw" on an
1534 88-color or 256-color xterm, you will see essentially the same face
1535 colors as on X.
1536
1537 ---
1538 *** There's a new support for colors on `rxvt' terminal emulator.
1539 \f
1540 * New Modes and Packages in Emacs 22.1
1541
1542 ** ERC is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1543
1544 ERC is a powerful, modular, and extensible IRC client for Emacs.
1545
1546 To see what modules are available, type
1547 M-x customize-option erc-modules RET.
1548
1549 To start an IRC session, type M-x erc-select, and follow the prompts
1550 for server, port, and nick.
1551
1552 ---
1553 ** Rcirc is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1554
1555 Rcirc is an Internet relay chat (IRC) client. It supports
1556 simultaneous connections to multiple IRC servers. Each discussion
1557 takes place in its own buffer. For each connection you can join
1558 several channels (many-to-many) and participate in private
1559 (one-to-one) chats. Both channel and private chats are contained in
1560 separate buffers.
1561
1562 To start an IRC session, type M-x irc, and follow the prompts for
1563 server, port, nick and initial channels.
1564
1565 ---
1566 ** Newsticker is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1567
1568 Newsticker asynchronously retrieves headlines (RSS) from a list of news
1569 sites, prepares these headlines for reading, and allows for loading the
1570 corresponding articles in a web browser. Its documentation is in a
1571 separate manual.
1572
1573 +++
1574 ** savehist saves minibuffer histories between sessions.
1575 To use this feature, turn on savehist-mode in your `.emacs' file.
1576
1577 +++
1578 ** Filesets are collections of files. You can define a fileset in
1579 various ways, such as based on a directory tree or based on
1580 program files that include other program files.
1581
1582 Once you have defined a fileset, you can perform various operations on
1583 all the files in it, such as visiting them or searching and replacing
1584 in them.
1585
1586 +++
1587 ** Calc is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1588
1589 Calc is an advanced desk calculator and mathematical tool written in
1590 Emacs Lisp. The prefix for Calc has been changed to `C-x *' and Calc
1591 can be started with `C-x * *'. The Calc manual is separate from the
1592 Emacs manual; within Emacs, type "C-h i m calc RET" to read the
1593 manual. A reference card is available in `etc/calccard.tex' and
1594 `etc/calccard.ps'.
1595
1596 ---
1597 ** The new package ibuffer provides a powerful, completely
1598 customizable replacement for buff-menu.el.
1599
1600 ---
1601 ** Ido mode is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1602
1603 The ido (interactively do) package is an extension of the iswitchb
1604 package to do interactive opening of files and directories in addition
1605 to interactive buffer switching. Ido is a superset of iswitchb (with
1606 a few exceptions), so don't enable both packages.
1607
1608 +++
1609 ** Image files are normally visited in Image mode, which lets you toggle
1610 between viewing the image and viewing the text using C-c C-c.
1611
1612 ---
1613 ** CUA mode is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1614
1615 The new cua package provides CUA-like keybindings using C-x for
1616 cut (kill), C-c for copy, C-v for paste (yank), and C-z for undo.
1617 With cua, the region can be set and extended using shifted movement
1618 keys (like pc-selection-mode) and typed text replaces the active
1619 region (like delete-selection-mode). Do not enable these modes with
1620 cua-mode. Customize the variable `cua-mode' to enable cua.
1621
1622 In addition, cua provides unified rectangle support with visible
1623 rectangle highlighting: Use C-return to start a rectangle, extend it
1624 using the movement commands (or mouse-3), and cut or copy it using C-x
1625 or C-c (using C-w and M-w also works).
1626
1627 Use M-o and M-c to `open' or `close' the rectangle, use M-b or M-f, to
1628 fill it with blanks or another character, use M-u or M-l to upcase or
1629 downcase the rectangle, use M-i to increment the numbers in the
1630 rectangle, use M-n to fill the rectangle with a numeric sequence (such
1631 as 10 20 30...), use M-r to replace a regexp in the rectangle, and use
1632 M-' or M-/ to restrict command on the rectangle to a subset of the
1633 rows. See the commentary in cua-base.el for more rectangle commands.
1634
1635 Cua also provides unified support for registers: Use a numeric
1636 prefix argument between 0 and 9, i.e. M-0 .. M-9, for C-x, C-c, and
1637 C-v to cut or copy into register 0-9, or paste from register 0-9.
1638
1639 The last text deleted (not killed) is automatically stored in
1640 register 0. This includes text deleted by typing text.
1641
1642 Finally, cua provides a global mark which is set using S-C-space.
1643 When the global mark is active, any text which is cut or copied is
1644 automatically inserted at the global mark position. See the
1645 commentary in cua-base.el for more global mark related commands.
1646
1647 The features of cua also works with the standard emacs bindings for
1648 kill, copy, yank, and undo. If you want to use cua mode, but don't
1649 want the C-x, C-c, C-v, and C-z bindings, you can customize the
1650 `cua-enable-cua-keys' variable.
1651
1652 Note: This version of cua mode is not backwards compatible with older
1653 versions of cua.el and cua-mode.el. To ensure proper operation, you
1654 must remove older versions of cua.el or cua-mode.el as well as the
1655 loading and customization of those packages from the .emacs file.
1656
1657 +++
1658 ** Org mode is now part of the Emacs distribution
1659
1660 Org mode is a mode for keeping notes, maintaining ToDo lists, and
1661 doing project planning with a fast and effective plain-text system.
1662 It also contains a plain-text table editor with spreadsheet-like
1663 capabilities.
1664
1665 The Org mode table editor can be integrated into any major mode by
1666 activating the minor Orgtbl-mode.
1667
1668 The documentation for org-mode is in a separate manual; within Emacs,
1669 type "C-h i m org RET" to read that manual. A reference card is
1670 available in `etc/orgcard.tex' and `etc/orgcard.ps'.
1671
1672 +++
1673 ** The new package dns-mode.el add syntax highlight of DNS master files.
1674 The key binding C-c C-s (`dns-mode-soa-increment-serial') can be used
1675 to increment the SOA serial.
1676
1677 ---
1678 ** The new global minor mode `file-name-shadow-mode' modifies the way
1679 filenames being entered by the user in the minibuffer are displayed, so
1680 that it's clear when part of the entered filename will be ignored due to
1681 emacs' filename parsing rules. The ignored portion can be made dim,
1682 invisible, or otherwise less visually noticeable. The display method can
1683 be displayed by customizing the variable `file-name-shadow-properties'.
1684
1685 +++
1686 ** The new package flymake.el does on-the-fly syntax checking of program
1687 source files. See the Flymake's Info manual for more details.
1688
1689 +++
1690 ** The new keypad setup package provides several common bindings for
1691 the numeric keypad which is available on most keyboards. The numeric
1692 keypad typically has the digits 0 to 9, a decimal point, keys marked
1693 +, -, /, and *, an Enter key, and a NumLock toggle key. The keypad
1694 package only controls the use of the digit and decimal keys.
1695
1696 By customizing the variables `keypad-setup', `keypad-shifted-setup',
1697 `keypad-numlock-setup', and `keypad-numlock-shifted-setup', or by
1698 using the function `keypad-setup', you can rebind all digit keys and
1699 the decimal key of the keypad in one step for each of the four
1700 possible combinations of the Shift key state (not pressed/pressed) and
1701 the NumLock toggle state (off/on).
1702
1703 The choices for the keypad keys in each of the above states are:
1704 `Plain numeric keypad' where the keys generates plain digits,
1705 `Numeric keypad with decimal key' where the character produced by the
1706 decimal key can be customized individually (for internationalization),
1707 `Numeric Prefix Arg' where the keypad keys produce numeric prefix args
1708 for emacs editing commands, `Cursor keys' and `Shifted Cursor keys'
1709 where the keys work like (shifted) arrow keys, home/end, etc., and
1710 `Unspecified/User-defined' where the keypad keys (kp-0, kp-1, etc.)
1711 are left unspecified and can be bound individually through the global
1712 or local keymaps.
1713
1714 +++
1715 ** The new kmacro package provides a simpler user interface to
1716 emacs' keyboard macro facilities.
1717
1718 Basically, it uses two function keys (default F3 and F4) like this:
1719 F3 starts a macro, F4 ends the macro, and pressing F4 again executes
1720 the last macro. While defining the macro, F3 inserts a counter value
1721 which automatically increments every time the macro is executed.
1722
1723 There is now a keyboard macro ring which stores the most recently
1724 defined macros.
1725
1726 The C-x C-k sequence is now a prefix for the kmacro keymap which
1727 defines bindings for moving through the keyboard macro ring,
1728 C-x C-k C-p and C-x C-k C-n, editing the last macro C-x C-k C-e,
1729 manipulating the macro counter and format via C-x C-k C-c,
1730 C-x C-k C-a, and C-x C-k C-f. See the commentary in kmacro.el
1731 for more commands.
1732
1733 The normal macro bindings C-x (, C-x ), and C-x e now interfaces to
1734 the keyboard macro ring.
1735
1736 The C-x e command now automatically terminates the current macro
1737 before calling it, if used while defining a macro.
1738
1739 In addition, when ending or calling a macro with C-x e, the macro can
1740 be repeated immediately by typing just the `e'. You can customize
1741 this behavior via the variables kmacro-call-repeat-key and
1742 kmacro-call-repeat-with-arg.
1743
1744 Keyboard macros can now be debugged and edited interactively.
1745 C-x C-k SPC steps through the last keyboard macro one key sequence
1746 at a time, prompting for the actions to take.
1747
1748 ---
1749 ** New minor mode, Visible mode, toggles invisibility in the current buffer.
1750 When enabled, it makes all invisible text visible. When disabled, it
1751 restores the previous value of `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
1752
1753 +++
1754 ** The wdired.el package allows you to use normal editing commands on Dired
1755 buffers to change filenames, permissions, etc...
1756
1757 +++
1758 ** The new package longlines.el provides a minor mode for editing text
1759 files composed of long lines, based on the `use-hard-newlines'
1760 mechanism. The long lines are broken up by inserting soft newlines,
1761 which are automatically removed when saving the file to disk or
1762 copying into the kill ring, clipboard, etc. By default, Longlines
1763 mode inserts soft newlines automatically during editing, a behavior
1764 referred to as "soft word wrap" in other text editors. This is
1765 similar to Refill mode, but more reliable. To turn the word wrap
1766 feature off, set `longlines-auto-wrap' to nil.
1767
1768 +++
1769 ** The printing package is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1770
1771 If you enable the printing package by including (require 'printing) in
1772 the .emacs file, the normal Print item on the File menu is replaced
1773 with a Print sub-menu which allows you to preview output through
1774 ghostview, use ghostscript to print (if you don't have a PostScript
1775 printer) or send directly to printer a PostScript code generated by
1776 `ps-print' package. Use M-x pr-help for more information.
1777
1778 ---
1779 ** The minor mode Reveal mode makes text visible on the fly as you
1780 move your cursor into hidden regions of the buffer.
1781 It should work with any package that uses overlays to hide parts
1782 of a buffer, such as outline-minor-mode, hs-minor-mode, hide-ifdef-mode, ...
1783
1784 There is also Global Reveal mode which affects all buffers.
1785
1786 ---
1787 ** The ruler-mode.el library provides a minor mode for displaying an
1788 "active" ruler in the header line. You can use the mouse to visually
1789 change the `fill-column', `window-margins' and `tab-stop-list'
1790 settings.
1791
1792 +++
1793 ** SES mode (ses-mode) is a new major mode for creating and editing
1794 spreadsheet files. Besides the usual Emacs features (intuitive command
1795 letters, undo, cell formulas in Lisp, plaintext files, etc.) it also offers
1796 viral immunity and import/export of tab-separated values.
1797
1798 +++
1799 ** The new global minor mode `size-indication-mode' (off by default)
1800 shows the size of accessible part of the buffer on the mode line.
1801
1802 +++
1803 ** The new package table.el implements editable, WYSIWYG, embedded
1804 `text tables' in Emacs buffers. It simulates the effect of putting
1805 these tables in a special major mode. The package emulates WYSIWYG
1806 table editing available in modern word processors. The package also
1807 can generate a table source in typesetting and markup languages such
1808 as latex and html from the visually laid out text table.
1809
1810 ** The tumme.el package allows you to easily view, tag and in other ways
1811 manipulate image files and their thumbnails, using dired as the main interface.
1812 Tumme provides functionality to generate simple image galleries.
1813
1814 +++
1815 ** Tramp is now part of the distribution.
1816
1817 This package is similar to Ange-FTP: it allows you to edit remote
1818 files. But whereas Ange-FTP uses FTP to access the remote host,
1819 Tramp uses a shell connection. The shell connection is always used
1820 for filename completion and directory listings and suchlike, but for
1821 the actual file transfer, you can choose between the so-called
1822 `inline' methods (which transfer the files through the shell
1823 connection using base64 or uu encoding) and the `out-of-band' methods
1824 (which invoke an external copying program such as `rcp' or `scp' or
1825 `rsync' to do the copying).
1826
1827 Shell connections can be acquired via `rsh', `ssh', `telnet' and also
1828 `su' and `sudo'. Ange-FTP is still supported via the `ftp' method.
1829
1830 If you want to disable Tramp you should set
1831
1832 (setq tramp-default-method "ftp")
1833
1834 Removing Tramp, and re-enabling Ange-FTP, can be achieved by M-x
1835 tramp-unload-tramp.
1836
1837 ---
1838 ** The URL package (which had been part of W3) is now part of Emacs.
1839
1840 ---
1841 ** `cfengine-mode' is a major mode for editing GNU Cfengine
1842 configuration files.
1843
1844 +++
1845 ** The new package conf-mode.el handles thousands of configuration files, with
1846 varying syntaxes for comments (;, #, //, /* */ or !), assignment (var = value,
1847 var : value, var value or keyword var value) and sections ([section] or
1848 section { }). Many files under /etc/, or with suffixes like .cf through
1849 .config, .properties (Java), .desktop (KDE/Gnome), .ini and many others are
1850 recognized.
1851
1852 ---
1853 ** GDB-Script-mode is used for files like .gdbinit.
1854
1855 +++
1856 ** The new python.el package is used to edit Python and Jython programs.
1857
1858 ---
1859 ** The TCL package tcl-mode.el was replaced by tcl.el.
1860 This was actually done in Emacs-21.1, and was not documented.
1861
1862 ** The new package scroll-lock.el provides the Scroll Lock minor mode
1863 for pager-like scrolling. Keys which normally move point by line or
1864 paragraph will scroll the buffer by the respective amount of lines
1865 instead and point will be kept vertically fixed relative to window
1866 boundaries during scrolling.
1867
1868 ** The file t-mouse.el is now part of Emacs and provides access to mouse
1869 events from the console. It still requires gpm to work but has been updated
1870 for Emacs 22. In particular, the mode-line is now position sensitive.
1871 \f
1872 * Changes in Specialized Modes and Packages in Emacs 22.1:
1873
1874 ** Changes in Dired
1875
1876 +++
1877 *** Bindings for Tumme added
1878 Several new keybindings, all starting with the C-t prefix, have been
1879 added to Dired. They are all bound to commands in Tumme. As a starting
1880 point, mark some image files in a dired buffer and do C-t d to display
1881 thumbnails of them in a separate buffer.
1882
1883 ** Changes in Hi Lock
1884
1885 +++
1886 *** hi-lock-mode now only affects a single buffer, and a new function
1887 `global-hi-lock-mode' enables Hi Lock in all buffers. By default, if
1888 hi-lock-mode is used in what appears to be the initialization file, a
1889 warning message suggests to use global-hi-lock-mode instead. However,
1890 if the new variable `hi-lock-archaic-interface-deduce' is non-nil,
1891 using hi-lock-mode in an initialization file will turn on Hi Lock in all
1892 buffers and no warning will be issued (for compatibility with the
1893 behavior in older versions of Emacs).
1894
1895 ** Changes in Allout
1896
1897 *** Topic cryptography added, enabling easy gpg topic encryption and
1898 decryption. Per-topic basis enables interspersing encrypted-text and
1899 clear-text within a single file to your heart's content, using symmetric
1900 and/or public key modes. Time-limited key caching, user-provided
1901 symmetric key hinting and consistency verification, auto-encryption of
1902 pending topics on save, and more, make it easy to use encryption in
1903 powerful ways.
1904
1905 *** Default command prefix changed to "\C-c " (control-c space), to avoid
1906 intruding on user's keybinding space. Customize the
1907 `allout-command-prefix' variable to your preference.
1908
1909 *** Allout now uses text overlay's `invisible' property (and others) for
1910 concealed text, instead of selective-display. This simplifies the code, in
1911 particularly avoiding the need for kludges for isearch dynamic-display,
1912 discretionary handling of edits of concealed text, undo concerns, etc.
1913
1914 *** Many substantial fixes and refinements, including:
1915
1916 - repaired inhibition of inadvertent edits to concealed text
1917 - repaired retention of topic body hanging indent upon topic depth shifts
1918 - refuse to create "containment discontinuities", where a
1919 topic is shifted deeper than the offspring-depth of its' container
1920 - bulleting variation is simpler and more accommodating, both in the
1921 default behavior and in ability to vary when creating new topics
1922 - many internal fixes and refinements
1923 - many module and function docstring clarifications
1924 - version number incremented to 2.2
1925
1926 ** The variable `woman-topic-at-point' was renamed
1927 to `woman-use-topic-at-point' and behaves differently: if this
1928 variable is non-nil, the `woman' command uses the word at point
1929 automatically, without asking for a confirmation. Otherwise, the word
1930 at point is suggested as default, but not inserted at the prompt.
1931
1932 ---
1933 ** Changes to cmuscheme
1934
1935 *** Emacs now offers to start Scheme if the user tries to
1936 evaluate a Scheme expression but no Scheme subprocess is running.
1937
1938 *** If a file `.emacs_NAME' (where NAME is the name of the Scheme interpreter)
1939 exists in the user's home directory or in ~/.emacs.d, its
1940 contents are sent to the Scheme subprocess upon startup.
1941
1942 *** There are new commands to instruct the Scheme interpreter to trace
1943 procedure calls (`scheme-trace-procedure') and to expand syntactic forms
1944 (`scheme-expand-current-form'). The commands actually sent to the Scheme
1945 subprocess are controlled by the user options `scheme-trace-command',
1946 `scheme-untrace-command' and `scheme-expand-current-form'.
1947
1948 ---
1949 ** Makefile mode has submodes for automake, gmake, makepp, BSD make and imake.
1950
1951 The former two couldn't be differentiated before, and the latter three
1952 are new. Font-locking is robust now and offers new customizable
1953 faces.
1954
1955 +++
1956 ** In Outline mode, `hide-body' no longer hides lines at the top
1957 of the file that precede the first header line.
1958
1959 +++
1960 ** Telnet now prompts you for a port number with C-u M-x telnet.
1961
1962 ---
1963 ** The terminal emulation code in term.el has been improved; it can
1964 run most curses applications now.
1965
1966 +++
1967 ** M-x diff uses Diff mode instead of Compilation mode.
1968
1969 +++
1970 ** Diff mode key bindings changed.
1971
1972 These are the new bindings:
1973
1974 C-c C-e diff-ediff-patch (old M-A)
1975 C-c C-n diff-restrict-view (old M-r)
1976 C-c C-r diff-reverse-direction (old M-R)
1977 C-c C-u diff-context->unified (old M-U)
1978 C-c C-w diff-refine-hunk (old C-c C-r)
1979
1980 To convert unified to context format, use C-u C-c C-u.
1981 In addition, C-c C-u now operates on the region
1982 in Transient Mark mode when the mark is active.
1983
1984 +++
1985 ** You can now customize `fill-nobreak-predicate' to control where
1986 filling can break lines. The value is now normally a list of
1987 functions, but it can also be a single function, for compatibility.
1988
1989 Emacs provide two predicates, `fill-single-word-nobreak-p' and
1990 `fill-french-nobreak-p', for use as the value of
1991 `fill-nobreak-predicate'.
1992
1993 ---
1994 ** M-x view-file and commands that use it now avoid interfering
1995 with special modes such as Tar mode.
1996
1997 ---
1998 ** Commands `winner-redo' and `winner-undo', from winner.el, are now
1999 bound to C-c <left> and C-c <right>, respectively. This is an
2000 incompatible change.
2001
2002 ---
2003 ** `global-whitespace-mode' is a new alias for `whitespace-global-mode'.
2004
2005 +++
2006 ** M-x compare-windows now can automatically skip non-matching text to
2007 resync points in both windows.
2008
2009 +++
2010 ** New user option `add-log-always-start-new-record'.
2011
2012 When this option is enabled, M-x add-change-log-entry always
2013 starts a new record regardless of when the last record is.
2014
2015 ---
2016 ** PO translation files are decoded according to their MIME headers
2017 when Emacs visits them.
2018
2019 ** Info mode changes:
2020
2021 +++
2022 *** A numeric prefix argument of `info' selects an Info buffer
2023 with the number appended to the `*info*' buffer name (e.g. "*info*<2>").
2024
2025 +++
2026 *** isearch in Info uses Info-search and searches through multiple nodes.
2027
2028 Before leaving the initial Info node isearch fails once with the error
2029 message [initial node], and with subsequent C-s/C-r continues through
2030 other nodes. When isearch fails for the rest of the manual, it wraps
2031 around the whole manual to the top/final node. The user option
2032 `Info-isearch-search' controls whether to use Info-search for isearch,
2033 or the default isearch search function that wraps around the current
2034 Info node.
2035
2036 ---
2037 *** New search commands: `Info-search-case-sensitively' (bound to S),
2038 `Info-search-backward', and `Info-search-next' which repeats the last
2039 search without prompting for a new search string.
2040
2041 +++
2042 *** New command `Info-history-forward' (bound to r and new toolbar icon)
2043 moves forward in history to the node you returned from after using
2044 `Info-history-back' (renamed from `Info-last').
2045
2046 ---
2047 *** New command `Info-history' (bound to L) displays a menu of visited nodes.
2048
2049 ---
2050 *** New command `Info-toc' (bound to T) creates a node with table of contents
2051 from the tree structure of menus of the current Info file.
2052
2053 +++
2054 *** New command `info-apropos' searches the indices of the known
2055 Info files on your system for a string, and builds a menu of the
2056 possible matches.
2057
2058 ---
2059 *** New command `Info-copy-current-node-name' (bound to w) copies
2060 the current Info node name into the kill ring. With a zero prefix
2061 arg, puts the node name inside the `info' function call.
2062
2063 +++
2064 *** New face `info-xref-visited' distinguishes visited nodes from unvisited
2065 and a new option `Info-fontify-visited-nodes' to control this.
2066
2067 ---
2068 *** http and ftp links in Info are now operational: they look like cross
2069 references and following them calls `browse-url'.
2070
2071 +++
2072 *** Info now hides node names in menus and cross references by default.
2073
2074 If you prefer the old behavior, you can set the new user option
2075 `Info-hide-note-references' to nil.
2076
2077 ---
2078 *** Images in Info pages are supported.
2079
2080 Info pages show embedded images, in Emacs frames with image support.
2081 Info documentation that includes images, processed with makeinfo
2082 version 4.7 or newer, compiles to Info pages with embedded images.
2083
2084 +++
2085 *** The default value for `Info-scroll-prefer-subnodes' is now nil.
2086
2087 ---
2088 *** `Info-index' offers completion.
2089
2090 ** Lisp mode changes:
2091
2092 ---
2093 *** Lisp mode now uses `font-lock-doc-face' for doc strings.
2094
2095 +++
2096 *** C-u C-M-q in Emacs Lisp mode pretty-prints the list after point.
2097
2098 *** New features in evaluation commands
2099
2100 +++
2101 **** The function `eval-defun' (C-M-x) called on defface reinitializes
2102 the face to the value specified in the defface expression.
2103
2104 +++
2105 **** Typing C-x C-e twice prints the value of the integer result
2106 in additional formats (octal, hexadecimal, character) specified
2107 by the new function `eval-expression-print-format'. The same
2108 function also defines the result format for `eval-expression' (M-:),
2109 `eval-print-last-sexp' (C-j) and some edebug evaluation functions.
2110
2111 +++
2112 ** CC mode changes.
2113
2114 *** The CC Mode manual has been extensively revised.
2115 The information about using CC Mode has been separated from the larger
2116 and more difficult chapters about configuration.
2117
2118 *** Changes in Key Sequences
2119 **** c-toggle-auto-hungry-state is no longer bound to C-c C-t.
2120
2121 **** c-toggle-hungry-state is no longer bound to C-c C-d.
2122 This binding has been taken over by c-hungry-delete-forwards.
2123
2124 **** c-toggle-auto-state (C-c C-t) has been renamed to c-toggle-auto-newline.
2125 c-toggle-auto-state remains as an alias.
2126
2127 **** The new commands c-hungry-backspace and c-hungry-delete-forwards
2128 have key bindings C-c C-DEL (or C-c DEL, for the benefit of TTYs) and
2129 C-c C-d (or C-c C-<delete> or C-c <delete>) respectively. These
2130 commands delete entire blocks of whitespace with a single
2131 key-sequence. [N.B. "DEL" is the <backspace> key.]
2132
2133 **** The new command c-toggle-electric-mode is bound to C-c C-l.
2134
2135 **** The new command c-subword-mode is bound to C-c C-w.
2136
2137 *** C-c C-s (`c-show-syntactic-information') now highlights the anchor
2138 position(s).
2139
2140 *** New Minor Modes
2141 **** Electric Minor Mode toggles the electric action of non-alphabetic keys.
2142 The new command c-toggle-electric-mode is bound to C-c C-l. Turning the
2143 mode off can be helpful for editing chaotically indented code and for
2144 users new to CC Mode, who sometimes find electric indentation
2145 disconcerting. Its current state is displayed in the mode line with an
2146 'l', e.g. "C/al".
2147
2148 **** Subword Minor Mode makes Emacs recognize word boundaries at upper case
2149 letters in StudlyCapsIdentifiers. You enable this feature by C-c C-w. It can
2150 also be used in non-CC Mode buffers. :-) Contributed by Masatake YAMATO.
2151
2152 *** New clean-ups
2153
2154 **** `comment-close-slash'.
2155 With this clean-up, a block (i.e. c-style) comment can be terminated by
2156 typing a slash at the start of a line.
2157
2158 **** `c-one-liner-defun'
2159 This clean-up compresses a short enough defun (for example, an AWK
2160 pattern/action pair) onto a single line. "Short enough" is configurable.
2161
2162 *** Font lock support.
2163 CC Mode now provides font lock support for all its languages. This
2164 supersedes the font lock patterns that have been in the core font lock
2165 package for C, C++, Java and Objective-C. Like indentation, font
2166 locking is done in a uniform way across all languages (except the new
2167 AWK mode - see below). That means that the new font locking will be
2168 different from the old patterns in various details for most languages.
2169
2170 The main goal of the font locking in CC Mode is accuracy, to provide a
2171 dependable aid in recognizing the various constructs. Some, like
2172 strings and comments, are easy to recognize while others like
2173 declarations and types can be very tricky. CC Mode can go to great
2174 lengths to recognize declarations and casts correctly, especially when
2175 the types aren't recognized by standard patterns. This is a fairly
2176 demanding analysis which can be slow on older hardware, and it can
2177 therefore be disabled by choosing a lower decoration level with the
2178 variable font-lock-maximum-decoration.
2179
2180 Note that the most demanding font lock level has been tuned with lazy
2181 fontification in mind; Just-In-Time-Lock mode should be enabled for
2182 the highest font lock level (by default, it is). Fontifying a file
2183 with several thousand lines in one go can take the better part of a
2184 minute.
2185
2186 **** The (c|c++|objc|java|idl|pike)-font-lock-extra-types variables
2187 are now used by CC Mode to recognize identifiers that are certain to
2188 be types. (They are also used in cases that aren't related to font
2189 locking.) At the maximum decoration level, types are often recognized
2190 properly anyway, so these variables should be fairly restrictive and
2191 not contain patterns for uncertain types.
2192
2193 **** Support for documentation comments.
2194 There is a "plugin" system to fontify documentation comments like
2195 Javadoc and the markup within them. It's independent of the host
2196 language, so it's possible to e.g. turn on Javadoc font locking in C
2197 buffers. See the variable c-doc-comment-style for details.
2198
2199 Currently three kinds of doc comment styles are recognized: Sun's
2200 Javadoc, Autodoc (which is used in Pike) and GtkDoc (used in C). (The
2201 last was contributed by Masatake YAMATO). This is by no means a
2202 complete list of the most common tools; if your doc comment extractor
2203 of choice is missing then please drop a note to bug-cc-mode@gnu.org.
2204
2205 **** Better handling of C++ templates.
2206 As a side effect of the more accurate font locking, C++ templates are
2207 now handled much better. The angle brackets that delimit them are
2208 given parenthesis syntax so that they can be navigated like other
2209 parens.
2210
2211 This also improves indentation of templates, although there still is
2212 work to be done in that area. E.g. it's required that multiline
2213 template clauses are written in full and then refontified to be
2214 recognized, and the indentation of nested templates is a bit odd and
2215 not as configurable as it ought to be.
2216
2217 **** Improved handling of Objective-C and CORBA IDL.
2218 Especially the support for Objective-C and IDL has gotten an overhaul.
2219 The special "@" declarations in Objective-C are handled correctly.
2220 All the keywords used in CORBA IDL, PSDL, and CIDL are recognized and
2221 handled correctly, also wrt indentation.
2222
2223 *** Support for the AWK language.
2224 Support for the AWK language has been introduced. The implementation is
2225 based around GNU AWK version 3.1, but it should work pretty well with
2226 any AWK. As yet, not all features of CC Mode have been adapted for AWK.
2227 Here is a summary:
2228
2229 **** Indentation Engine
2230 The CC Mode indentation engine fully supports AWK mode.
2231
2232 AWK mode handles code formatted in the conventional AWK fashion: `{'s
2233 which start actions, user-defined functions, or compound statements are
2234 placed on the same line as the associated construct; the matching `}'s
2235 are normally placed under the start of the respective pattern, function
2236 definition, or structured statement.
2237
2238 The predefined line-up functions haven't yet been adapted for AWK
2239 mode, though some of them may work serendipitously. There shouldn't
2240 be any problems writing custom indentation functions for AWK mode.
2241
2242 **** Font Locking
2243 There is a single level of font locking in AWK mode, rather than the
2244 three distinct levels the other modes have. There are several
2245 idiosyncrasies in AWK mode's font-locking due to the peculiarities of
2246 the AWK language itself.
2247
2248 **** Comment and Movement Commands
2249 These commands all work for AWK buffers. The notion of "defun" has
2250 been augmented to include AWK pattern-action pairs - the standard
2251 "defun" commands on key sequences C-M-a, C-M-e, and C-M-h use this
2252 extended definition.
2253
2254 **** "awk" style, Auto-newline Insertion and Clean-ups
2255 A new style, "awk" has been introduced, and this is now the default
2256 style for AWK code. With auto-newline enabled, the clean-up
2257 c-one-liner-defun (see above) is useful.
2258
2259 *** New syntactic symbols in IDL mode.
2260 The top level constructs "module" and "composition" (from CIDL) are
2261 now handled like "namespace" in C++: They are given syntactic symbols
2262 module-open, module-close, inmodule, composition-open,
2263 composition-close, and incomposition.
2264
2265 *** New functions to do hungry delete without enabling hungry delete mode.
2266 The new functions `c-hungry-backspace' and `c-hungry-delete-forward'
2267 provide hungry deletion without having to toggle a mode. They are
2268 bound to C-c C-DEL and C-c C-d (and several variants, for the benefit
2269 of different keyboard setups. See "Changes in key sequences" above).
2270
2271 *** Better control over `require-final-newline'.
2272
2273 The variable `c-require-final-newline' specifies which of the modes
2274 implemented by CC mode should insert final newlines. Its value is a
2275 list of modes, and only those modes should do it. By default the list
2276 includes C, C++ and Objective-C modes.
2277
2278 Whichever modes are in this list will set `require-final-newline'
2279 based on `mode-require-final-newline'.
2280
2281 *** Format change for syntactic context elements.
2282
2283 The elements in the syntactic context returned by `c-guess-basic-syntax'
2284 and stored in `c-syntactic-context' has been changed somewhat to allow
2285 attaching more information. They are now lists instead of single cons
2286 cells. E.g. a line that previously had the syntactic analysis
2287
2288 ((inclass . 11) (topmost-intro . 13))
2289
2290 is now analyzed as
2291
2292 ((inclass 11) (topmost-intro 13))
2293
2294 In some cases there are more than one position given for a syntactic
2295 symbol.
2296
2297 This change might affect code that calls `c-guess-basic-syntax'
2298 directly, and custom lineup functions if they use
2299 `c-syntactic-context'. However, the argument given to lineup
2300 functions is still a single cons cell with nil or an integer in the
2301 cdr.
2302
2303 *** API changes for derived modes.
2304
2305 There have been extensive changes "under the hood" which can affect
2306 derived mode writers. Some of these changes are likely to cause
2307 incompatibilities with existing derived modes, but on the other hand
2308 care has now been taken to make it possible to extend and modify CC
2309 Mode with less risk of such problems in the future.
2310
2311 **** New language variable system.
2312 These are variables whose values vary between CC Mode's different
2313 languages. See the comment blurb near the top of cc-langs.el.
2314
2315 **** New initialization functions.
2316 The initialization procedure has been split up into more functions to
2317 give better control: `c-basic-common-init', `c-font-lock-init', and
2318 `c-init-language-vars'.
2319
2320 *** Changes in analysis of nested syntactic constructs.
2321 The syntactic analysis engine has better handling of cases where
2322 several syntactic constructs appear nested on the same line. They are
2323 now handled as if each construct started on a line of its own.
2324
2325 This means that CC Mode now indents some cases differently, and
2326 although it's more consistent there might be cases where the old way
2327 gave results that's more to one's liking. So if you find a situation
2328 where you think that the indentation has become worse, please report
2329 it to bug-cc-mode@gnu.org.
2330
2331 **** New syntactic symbol substatement-label.
2332 This symbol is used when a label is inserted between a statement and
2333 its substatement. E.g:
2334
2335 if (x)
2336 x_is_true:
2337 do_stuff();
2338
2339 *** Better handling of multiline macros.
2340
2341 **** Syntactic indentation inside macros.
2342 The contents of multiline #define's are now analyzed and indented
2343 syntactically just like other code. This can be disabled by the new
2344 variable `c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros'. A new syntactic symbol
2345 `cpp-define-intro' has been added to control the initial indentation
2346 inside `#define's.
2347
2348 **** New lineup function `c-lineup-cpp-define'.
2349
2350 Now used by default to line up macro continuation lines. The behavior
2351 of this function closely mimics the indentation one gets if the macro
2352 is indented while the line continuation backslashes are temporarily
2353 removed. If syntactic indentation in macros is turned off, it works
2354 much line `c-lineup-dont-change', which was used earlier, but handles
2355 empty lines within the macro better.
2356
2357 **** Automatically inserted newlines continues the macro if used within one.
2358 This applies to the newlines inserted by the auto-newline mode, and to
2359 `c-context-line-break' and `c-context-open-line'.
2360
2361 **** Better alignment of line continuation backslashes.
2362 `c-backslash-region' tries to adapt to surrounding backslashes. New
2363 variable `c-backslash-max-column' puts a limit on how far out
2364 backslashes can be moved.
2365
2366 **** Automatic alignment of line continuation backslashes.
2367 This is controlled by the new variable `c-auto-align-backslashes'. It
2368 affects `c-context-line-break', `c-context-open-line' and newlines
2369 inserted in Auto-Newline mode.
2370
2371 **** Line indentation works better inside macros.
2372 Regardless whether syntactic indentation and syntactic indentation
2373 inside macros are enabled or not, line indentation now ignores the
2374 line continuation backslashes. This is most noticeable when syntactic
2375 indentation is turned off and there are empty lines (save for the
2376 backslash) in the macro.
2377
2378 *** indent-for-comment is more customizable.
2379 The behavior of M-; (indent-for-comment) is now configurable through
2380 the variable `c-indent-comment-alist'. The indentation behavior is
2381 based on the preceding code on the line, e.g. to get two spaces after
2382 #else and #endif but indentation to `comment-column' in most other
2383 cases (something which was hardcoded earlier).
2384
2385 *** New function `c-context-open-line'.
2386 It's the open-line equivalent of `c-context-line-break'.
2387
2388 *** New lineup functions
2389
2390 **** `c-lineup-string-cont'
2391 This lineup function lines up a continued string under the one it
2392 continues. E.g:
2393
2394 result = prefix + "A message "
2395 "string."; <- c-lineup-string-cont
2396
2397 **** `c-lineup-cascaded-calls'
2398 Lines up series of calls separated by "->" or ".".
2399
2400 **** `c-lineup-knr-region-comment'
2401 Gives (what most people think is) better indentation of comments in
2402 the "K&R region" between the function header and its body.
2403
2404 **** `c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg'
2405 Provides better indentation inside asm blocks.
2406
2407 **** `c-lineup-argcont'
2408 Lines up continued function arguments after the preceding comma.
2409
2410 *** Better caching of the syntactic context.
2411 CC Mode caches the positions of the opening parentheses (of any kind)
2412 of the lists surrounding the point. Those positions are used in many
2413 places as anchor points for various searches. The cache is now
2414 improved so that it can be reused to a large extent when the point is
2415 moved. The less it moves, the less needs to be recalculated.
2416
2417 The effect is that CC Mode should be fast most of the time even when
2418 opening parens are hung (i.e. aren't in column zero). It's typically
2419 only the first time after the point is moved far down in a complex
2420 file that it'll take noticeable time to find out the syntactic
2421 context.
2422
2423 *** Statements are recognized in a more robust way.
2424 Statements are recognized most of the time even when they occur in an
2425 "invalid" context, e.g. in a function argument. In practice that can
2426 happen when macros are involved.
2427
2428 *** Improved the way `c-indent-exp' chooses the block to indent.
2429 It now indents the block for the closest sexp following the point
2430 whose closing paren ends on a different line. This means that the
2431 point doesn't have to be immediately before the block to indent.
2432 Also, only the block and the closing line is indented; the current
2433 line is left untouched.
2434
2435 *** Added toggle for syntactic indentation.
2436 The function `c-toggle-syntactic-indentation' can be used to toggle
2437 syntactic indentation.
2438
2439 ** In sh-script, a continuation line is only indented if the backslash was
2440 preceded by a SPC or a TAB.
2441
2442 ---
2443 ** Perl mode has a new variable `perl-indent-continued-arguments'.
2444
2445 ---
2446 ** The old Octave mode bindings C-c f and C-c i have been changed
2447 to C-c C-f and C-c C-i. The C-c C-i subcommands now have duplicate
2448 bindings on control characters--thus, C-c C-i C-b is the same as
2449 C-c C-i b, and so on.
2450
2451 ** Fortran mode changes:
2452
2453 ---
2454 *** Fortran mode does more font-locking by default. Use level 3
2455 highlighting for the old default.
2456
2457 +++
2458 *** Fortran mode has a new variable `fortran-directive-re'.
2459 Adapt this to match the format of any compiler directives you use.
2460 Lines that match are never indented, and are given distinctive font-locking.
2461
2462 +++
2463 *** F90 mode and Fortran mode have new navigation commands
2464 `f90-end-of-block', `f90-beginning-of-block', `f90-next-block',
2465 `f90-previous-block', `fortran-end-of-block',
2466 `fortran-beginning-of-block'.
2467
2468 ---
2469 *** F90 mode and Fortran mode have support for `hs-minor-mode' (hideshow).
2470 It cannot deal with every code format, but ought to handle a sizeable
2471 majority.
2472
2473 ---
2474 *** The new function `f90-backslash-not-special' can be used to change
2475 the syntax of backslashes in F90 buffers.
2476
2477 ---
2478 ** Reftex mode changes
2479
2480 +++
2481 *** Changes to RefTeX's table of contents
2482
2483 The new command keys "<" and ">" in the TOC buffer promote/demote the
2484 section at point or all sections in the current region, with full
2485 support for multifile documents.
2486
2487 The new command `reftex-toc-recenter' (`C-c -') shows the current
2488 section in the TOC buffer without selecting the TOC window.
2489 Recentering can happen automatically in idle time when the option
2490 `reftex-auto-recenter-toc' is turned on. The highlight in the TOC
2491 buffer stays when the focus moves to a different window. A dedicated
2492 frame can show the TOC with the current section always automatically
2493 highlighted. The frame is created and deleted from the toc buffer
2494 with the `d' key.
2495
2496 The toc window can be split off horizontally instead of vertically.
2497 See new option `reftex-toc-split-windows-horizontally'.
2498
2499 Labels can be renamed globally from the table of contents using the
2500 key `M-%'.
2501
2502 The new command `reftex-goto-label' jumps directly to a label
2503 location.
2504
2505 +++
2506 *** Changes related to citations and BibTeX database files
2507
2508 Commands that insert a citation now prompt for optional arguments when
2509 called with a prefix argument. Related new options are
2510 `reftex-cite-prompt-optional-args' and `reftex-cite-cleanup-optional-args'.
2511
2512 The new command `reftex-create-bibtex-file' creates a BibTeX database
2513 with all entries referenced in the current document. The keys "e" and
2514 "E" allow to produce a BibTeX database file from entries marked in a
2515 citation selection buffer.
2516
2517 The command `reftex-citation' uses the word in the buffer before the
2518 cursor as a default search string.
2519
2520 The support for chapterbib has been improved. Different chapters can
2521 now use BibTeX or an explicit `thebibliography' environment.
2522
2523 The macros which specify the bibliography file (like \bibliography)
2524 can be configured with the new option `reftex-bibliography-commands'.
2525
2526 Support for jurabib has been added.
2527
2528 +++
2529 *** Global index matched may be verified with a user function
2530
2531 During global indexing, a user function can verify an index match.
2532 See new option `reftex-index-verify-function'.
2533
2534 +++
2535 *** Parsing documents with many labels can be sped up.
2536
2537 Operating in a document with thousands of labels can be sped up
2538 considerably by allowing RefTeX to derive the type of a label directly
2539 from the label prefix like `eq:' or `fig:'. The option
2540 `reftex-trust-label-prefix' needs to be configured in order to enable
2541 this feature. While the speed-up is significant, this may reduce the
2542 quality of the context offered by RefTeX to describe a label.
2543
2544 +++
2545 *** Miscellaneous changes
2546
2547 The macros which input a file in LaTeX (like \input, \include) can be
2548 configured in the new option `reftex-include-file-commands'.
2549
2550 RefTeX supports global incremental search.
2551
2552 +++
2553 ** Prolog mode has a new variable `prolog-font-lock-keywords'
2554 to support use of font-lock.
2555
2556 ** HTML/SGML changes:
2557
2558 ---
2559 *** Emacs now tries to set up buffer coding systems for HTML/XML files
2560 automatically.
2561
2562 +++
2563 *** SGML mode has indentation and supports XML syntax.
2564 The new variable `sgml-xml-mode' tells SGML mode to use XML syntax.
2565 When this option is enabled, SGML tags are inserted in XML style,
2566 i.e., there is always a closing tag.
2567 By default, its setting is inferred on a buffer-by-buffer basis
2568 from the file name or buffer contents.
2569
2570 +++
2571 *** `xml-mode' is now an alias for `sgml-mode', which has XML support.
2572
2573 ** TeX modes:
2574
2575 +++
2576 *** C-c C-c prompts for a command to run, and tries to offer a good default.
2577
2578 +++
2579 *** The user option `tex-start-options-string' has been replaced
2580 by two new user options: `tex-start-options', which should hold
2581 command-line options to feed to TeX, and `tex-start-commands' which should hold
2582 TeX commands to use at startup.
2583
2584 ---
2585 *** verbatim environments are now highlighted in courier by font-lock
2586 and super/sub-scripts are made into super/sub-scripts.
2587
2588 +++
2589 *** New major mode Doctex mode, for *.dtx files.
2590
2591 ** BibTeX mode:
2592
2593 *** The new command `bibtex-url' browses a URL for the BibTeX entry at
2594 point (bound to C-c C-l and mouse-2, RET on clickable fields).
2595
2596 *** The new command `bibtex-entry-update' (bound to C-c C-u) updates
2597 an existing BibTeX entry by inserting fields that may occur but are not
2598 present.
2599
2600 *** New `bibtex-entry-format' option `required-fields', enabled by default.
2601
2602 *** `bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries' can take values `plain',
2603 `crossref', and `entry-class' which control the sorting scheme used
2604 for BibTeX entries. `bibtex-sort-entry-class' controls the sorting
2605 scheme `entry-class'. TAB completion for reference keys and
2606 automatic detection of duplicates does not require anymore that
2607 `bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries' is non-nil.
2608
2609 *** If the new variable `bibtex-parse-keys-fast' is non-nil,
2610 use fast but simplified algorithm for parsing BibTeX keys.
2611
2612 *** If the new variable `bibtex-autoadd-commas' is non-nil,
2613 automatically add missing commas at end of BibTeX fields.
2614
2615 *** The new variable `bibtex-autofill-types' contains a list of entry
2616 types for which fields are filled automatically (if possible).
2617
2618 *** The new command `bibtex-complete' completes word fragment before
2619 point according to context (bound to M-tab).
2620
2621 *** The new commands `bibtex-find-entry' and `bibtex-find-crossref'
2622 locate entries and crossref'd entries (bound to C-c C-s and C-c C-x).
2623 Crossref fields are clickable (bound to mouse-2, RET).
2624
2625 *** In BibTeX mode the command `fill-paragraph' (M-q) fills
2626 individual fields of a BibTeX entry.
2627
2628 *** The new variables `bibtex-files' and `bibtex-file-path' define a set
2629 of BibTeX files that are searched for entry keys.
2630
2631 *** The new command `bibtex-validate-globally' checks for duplicate keys
2632 in multiple BibTeX files.
2633
2634 *** The new command `bibtex-copy-summary-as-kill' pushes summary
2635 of BibTeX entry to kill ring (bound to C-c C-t).
2636
2637 *** The new variables bibtex-expand-strings and
2638 bibtex-autokey-expand-strings control the expansion of strings when
2639 extracting the content of a BibTeX field.
2640
2641 *** The variables `bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert' and
2642 `bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert' have been renamed to
2643 `bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert-function' and
2644 `bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert-function'. The old names are
2645 still available as aliases.
2646
2647 +++
2648 ** In Enriched mode, `set-left-margin' and `set-right-margin' are now
2649 by default bound to `C-c [' and `C-c ]' instead of the former `C-c C-l'
2650 and `C-c C-r'.
2651
2652 ** GUD changes:
2653
2654 +++
2655 *** In GUD mode, when talking to GDB, C-x C-a C-j "jumps" the program
2656 counter to the specified source line (the one where point is).
2657
2658 ---
2659 *** GUD mode has its own tool bar for controlling execution of the inferior
2660 and other common debugger commands.
2661
2662 +++
2663 *** The new package gdb-ui.el provides an enhanced graphical interface to
2664 GDB. You can interact with GDB through the GUD buffer in the usual way, but
2665 there are also further buffers which control the execution and describe the
2666 state of your program. It can separate the input/output of your program from
2667 that of GDB and watches expressions in the speedbar. It also uses features of
2668 Emacs 21/22 such as the toolbar, and bitmaps in the fringe to indicate
2669 breakpoints.
2670
2671 To use this package just type M-x gdb. See the Emacs manual if you want the
2672 old behaviour.
2673
2674 *** The variable tooltip-gud-tips-p has been removed. GUD tooltips can now be
2675 toggled independently of normal tooltips with the minor mode
2676 `gud-tooltip-mode'.
2677
2678 +++
2679 *** In graphical mode, with a C program, GUD Tooltips have been extended to
2680 display the #define directive associated with an identifier when program is
2681 not executing.
2682
2683 ---
2684 ** GUD mode improvements for jdb:
2685
2686 *** Search for source files using jdb classpath and class information.
2687 Fast startup since there is no need to scan all source files up front.
2688 There is also no need to create and maintain lists of source
2689 directories to scan. Look at `gud-jdb-use-classpath' and
2690 `gud-jdb-classpath' customization variables documentation.
2691
2692 *** Supports the standard breakpoint (gud-break, gud-clear)
2693 set/clear operations from Java source files under the classpath, stack
2694 traversal (gud-up, gud-down), and run until current stack finish
2695 (gud-finish).
2696
2697 *** Supports new jdb (Java 1.2 and later) in addition to oldjdb
2698 (Java 1.1 jdb).
2699
2700 *** The previous method of searching for source files has been
2701 preserved in case someone still wants/needs to use it.
2702 Set `gud-jdb-use-classpath' to nil.
2703
2704 *** Added Customization Variables
2705
2706 **** `gud-jdb-command-name'. What command line to use to invoke jdb.
2707
2708 **** `gud-jdb-use-classpath'. Allows selection of java source file searching
2709 method: set to t for new method, nil to scan `gud-jdb-directories' for
2710 java sources (previous method).
2711
2712 **** `gud-jdb-directories'. List of directories to scan and search for Java
2713 classes using the original gud-jdb method (if `gud-jdb-use-classpath'
2714 is nil).
2715
2716 *** Minor Improvements
2717
2718 **** The STARTTLS wrapper (starttls.el) can now use GNUTLS
2719 instead of the OpenSSL based `starttls' tool. For backwards
2720 compatibility, it prefers `starttls', but you can toggle
2721 `starttls-use-gnutls' to switch to GNUTLS (or simply remove the
2722 `starttls' tool).
2723
2724 **** Do not allow debugger output history variable to grow without bounds.
2725
2726 ** Auto-Revert changes:
2727
2728 +++
2729 *** You can now use Auto Revert mode to `tail' a file.
2730
2731 If point is at the end of a file buffer before reverting, Auto Revert
2732 mode keeps it at the end after reverting. Similarly if point is
2733 displayed at the end of a file buffer in any window, it stays at
2734 the end of the buffer in that window. This allows to tail a file:
2735 just put point at the end of the buffer and it stays there. This
2736 rule applies to file buffers. For non-file buffers, the behavior can
2737 be mode dependent.
2738
2739 If you are sure that the file will only change by growing at the end,
2740 then you can tail the file more efficiently by using the new minor
2741 mode Auto Revert Tail mode. The function `auto-revert-tail-mode'
2742 toggles this mode.
2743
2744 +++
2745 *** Auto Revert mode is now more careful to avoid excessive reverts and
2746 other potential problems when deciding which non-file buffers to
2747 revert. This matters especially if Global Auto Revert mode is enabled
2748 and `global-auto-revert-non-file-buffers' is non-nil. Auto Revert
2749 mode only reverts a non-file buffer if the buffer has a non-nil
2750 `revert-buffer-function' and a non-nil `buffer-stale-function', which
2751 decides whether the buffer should be reverted. Currently, this means
2752 that auto reverting works for Dired buffers (although this may not
2753 work properly on all operating systems) and for the Buffer Menu.
2754
2755 +++
2756 *** If the new user option `auto-revert-check-vc-info' is non-nil, Auto
2757 Revert mode reliably updates version control info (such as the version
2758 control number in the mode line), in all version controlled buffers in
2759 which it is active. If the option is nil, the default, then this info
2760 only gets updated whenever the buffer gets reverted.
2761
2762 ---
2763 ** recentf changes.
2764
2765 The recent file list is now automatically cleaned up when recentf mode is
2766 enabled. The new option `recentf-auto-cleanup' controls when to do
2767 automatic cleanup.
2768
2769 The ten most recent files can be quickly opened by using the shortcut
2770 keys 1 to 9, and 0, when the recent list is displayed in a buffer via
2771 the `recentf-open-files', or `recentf-open-more-files' commands.
2772
2773 The `recentf-keep' option replaces `recentf-keep-non-readable-files-p'
2774 and provides a more general mechanism to customize which file names to
2775 keep in the recent list.
2776
2777 With the more advanced option `recentf-filename-handlers', you can
2778 specify functions that successively transform recent file names. For
2779 example, if set to `file-truename' plus `abbreviate-file-name', the
2780 same file will not be in the recent list with different symbolic
2781 links, and the file name will be abbreviated.
2782
2783 To follow naming convention, `recentf-menu-append-commands-flag'
2784 replaces the misnamed option `recentf-menu-append-commands-p'. The
2785 old name remains available as alias, but has been marked obsolete.
2786
2787 +++
2788 ** Desktop package
2789
2790 +++
2791 *** Desktop saving is now a minor mode, `desktop-save-mode'.
2792
2793 +++
2794 *** The variable `desktop-enable' is obsolete.
2795
2796 Customize `desktop-save-mode' to enable desktop saving.
2797
2798 ---
2799 *** Buffers are saved in the desktop file in the same order as that in the
2800 buffer list.
2801
2802 +++
2803 *** The desktop package can be customized to restore only some buffers
2804 immediately, remaining buffers are restored lazily (when Emacs is
2805 idle).
2806
2807 +++
2808 *** New commands:
2809 - desktop-revert reverts to the last loaded desktop.
2810 - desktop-change-dir kills current desktop and loads a new.
2811 - desktop-save-in-desktop-dir saves desktop in the directory from which
2812 it was loaded.
2813 - desktop-lazy-complete runs the desktop load to completion.
2814 - desktop-lazy-abort aborts lazy loading of the desktop.
2815
2816 ---
2817 *** New customizable variables:
2818 - desktop-save. Determines whether the desktop should be saved when it is
2819 killed.
2820 - desktop-file-name-format. Format in which desktop file names should be saved.
2821 - desktop-path. List of directories in which to lookup the desktop file.
2822 - desktop-locals-to-save. List of local variables to save.
2823 - desktop-globals-to-clear. List of global variables that `desktop-clear' will clear.
2824 - desktop-clear-preserve-buffers-regexp. Regexp identifying buffers that `desktop-clear'
2825 should not delete.
2826 - desktop-restore-eager. Number of buffers to restore immediately. Remaining buffers are
2827 restored lazily (when Emacs is idle).
2828 - desktop-lazy-verbose. Verbose reporting of lazily created buffers.
2829 - desktop-lazy-idle-delay. Idle delay before starting to create buffers.
2830
2831 +++
2832 *** New command line option --no-desktop
2833
2834 ---
2835 *** New hooks:
2836 - desktop-after-read-hook run after a desktop is loaded.
2837 - desktop-no-desktop-file-hook run when no desktop file is found.
2838
2839 ---
2840 ** The saveplace.el package now filters out unreadable files.
2841
2842 When you exit Emacs, the saved positions in visited files no longer
2843 include files that aren't readable, e.g. files that don't exist.
2844 Customize the new option `save-place-forget-unreadable-files' to nil
2845 to get the old behavior. The new options `save-place-save-skipped'
2846 and `save-place-skip-check-regexp' allow further fine-tuning of this
2847 feature.
2848
2849 ** EDiff changes.
2850
2851 +++
2852 *** When comparing directories.
2853 Typing D brings up a buffer that lists the differences between the contents of
2854 directories. Now it is possible to use this buffer to copy the missing files
2855 from one directory to another.
2856
2857 +++
2858 *** When comparing files or buffers.
2859 Typing the = key now offers to perform the word-by-word comparison of the
2860 currently highlighted regions in an inferior Ediff session. If you answer 'n'
2861 then it reverts to the old behavior and asks the user to select regions for
2862 comparison.
2863
2864 +++
2865 *** The new command `ediff-backup' compares a file with its most recent
2866 backup using `ediff'. If you specify the name of a backup file,
2867 `ediff-backup' compares it with the file of which it is a backup.
2868
2869 +++
2870 ** Etags changes.
2871
2872 *** New regular expressions features
2873
2874 **** New syntax for regular expressions, multi-line regular expressions.
2875
2876 The syntax --ignore-case-regexp=/regex/ is now undocumented and retained
2877 only for backward compatibility. The new equivalent syntax is
2878 --regex=/regex/i. More generally, it is --regex=/TAGREGEX/TAGNAME/MODS,
2879 where `/TAGNAME' is optional, as usual, and MODS is a string of 0 or
2880 more characters among `i' (ignore case), `m' (multi-line) and `s'
2881 (single-line). The `m' and `s' modifiers behave as in Perl regular
2882 expressions: `m' allows regexps to match more than one line, while `s'
2883 (which implies `m') means that `.' matches newlines. The ability to
2884 span newlines allows writing of much more powerful regular expressions
2885 and rapid prototyping for tagging new languages.
2886
2887 **** Regular expressions can use char escape sequences as in GCC.
2888
2889 The escaped character sequence \a, \b, \d, \e, \f, \n, \r, \t, \v,
2890 respectively, stand for the ASCII characters BEL, BS, DEL, ESC, FF, NL,
2891 CR, TAB, VT.
2892
2893 **** Regular expressions can be bound to a given language.
2894
2895 The syntax --regex={LANGUAGE}REGEX means that REGEX is used to make tags
2896 only for files of language LANGUAGE, and ignored otherwise. This is
2897 particularly useful when storing regexps in a file.
2898
2899 **** Regular expressions can be read from a file.
2900
2901 The --regex=@regexfile option means read the regexps from a file, one
2902 per line. Lines beginning with space or tab are ignored.
2903
2904 *** New language parsing features
2905
2906 **** The `::' qualifier triggers C++ parsing in C file.
2907
2908 Previously, only the `template' and `class' keywords had this effect.
2909
2910 **** The GCC __attribute__ keyword is now recognized and ignored.
2911
2912 **** New language HTML.
2913
2914 Tags are generated for `title' as well as `h1', `h2', and `h3'. Also,
2915 when `name=' is used inside an anchor and whenever `id=' is used.
2916
2917 **** In Makefiles, constants are tagged.
2918
2919 If you want the old behavior instead, thus avoiding to increase the
2920 size of the tags file, use the --no-globals option.
2921
2922 **** New language Lua.
2923
2924 All functions are tagged.
2925
2926 **** In Perl, packages are tags.
2927
2928 Subroutine tags are named from their package. You can jump to sub tags
2929 as you did before, by the sub name, or additionally by looking for
2930 package::sub.
2931
2932 **** In Prolog, etags creates tags for rules in addition to predicates.
2933
2934 **** New language PHP.
2935
2936 Functions, classes and defines are tags. If the --members option is
2937 specified to etags, variables are tags also.
2938
2939 **** New default keywords for TeX.
2940
2941 The new keywords are def, newcommand, renewcommand, newenvironment and
2942 renewenvironment.
2943
2944 *** Honor #line directives.
2945
2946 When Etags parses an input file that contains C preprocessor's #line
2947 directives, it creates tags using the file name and line number
2948 specified in those directives. This is useful when dealing with code
2949 created from Cweb source files. When Etags tags the generated file, it
2950 writes tags pointing to the source file.
2951
2952 *** New option --parse-stdin=FILE.
2953
2954 This option is mostly useful when calling etags from programs. It can
2955 be used (only once) in place of a file name on the command line. Etags
2956 reads from standard input and marks the produced tags as belonging to
2957 the file FILE.
2958
2959 ** VC Changes
2960
2961 +++
2962 *** The key C-x C-q only changes the read-only state of the buffer
2963 (toggle-read-only). It no longer checks files in or out.
2964
2965 We made this change because we held a poll and found that many users
2966 were unhappy with the previous behavior. If you do prefer this
2967 behavior, you can bind `vc-toggle-read-only' to C-x C-q in your
2968 `.emacs' file:
2969
2970 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-q" 'vc-toggle-read-only)
2971
2972 The function `vc-toggle-read-only' will continue to exist.
2973
2974 +++
2975 *** The new variable `vc-cvs-global-switches' specifies switches that
2976 are passed to any CVS command invoked by VC.
2977
2978 These switches are used as "global options" for CVS, which means they
2979 are inserted before the command name. For example, this allows you to
2980 specify a compression level using the `-z#' option for CVS.
2981
2982 +++
2983 *** New backends for Subversion and Meta-CVS.
2984
2985 +++
2986 *** VC-Annotate mode enhancements
2987
2988 In VC-Annotate mode, you can now use the following key bindings for
2989 enhanced functionality to browse the annotations of past revisions, or
2990 to view diffs or log entries directly from vc-annotate-mode:
2991
2992 P: annotates the previous revision
2993 N: annotates the next revision
2994 J: annotates the revision at line
2995 A: annotates the revision previous to line
2996 D: shows the diff of the revision at line with its previous revision
2997 L: shows the log of the revision at line
2998 W: annotates the workfile (most up to date) version
2999
3000 ** pcl-cvs changes:
3001
3002 +++
3003 *** In pcl-cvs mode, there is a new `d y' command to view the diffs
3004 between the local version of the file and yesterday's head revision
3005 in the repository.
3006
3007 +++
3008 *** In pcl-cvs mode, there is a new `d r' command to view the changes
3009 anyone has committed to the repository since you last executed
3010 `checkout', `update' or `commit'. That means using cvs diff options
3011 -rBASE -rHEAD.
3012
3013 +++
3014 ** The new variable `mail-default-directory' specifies
3015 `default-directory' for mail buffers. This directory is used for
3016 auto-save files of mail buffers. It defaults to "~/".
3017
3018 +++
3019 ** The mode line can indicate new mail in a directory or file.
3020
3021 See the documentation of the user option
3022 `display-time-mail-directory'.
3023
3024 ** Rmail changes:
3025
3026 ---
3027 *** Rmail now displays 5-digit message ids in its summary buffer.
3028
3029 *** The new commands rmail-end-of-message and rmail-summary end-of-message,
3030 by default bound to `/', go to the end of the current mail message in
3031 Rmail and Rmail summary buffers.
3032
3033 +++
3034 *** Support for `movemail' from GNU mailutils was added to Rmail.
3035
3036 This version of `movemail' allows to read mail from a wide range of
3037 mailbox formats, including remote POP3 and IMAP4 mailboxes with or
3038 without TLS encryption. If GNU mailutils is installed on the system
3039 and its version of `movemail' can be found in exec-path, it will be
3040 used instead of the native one.
3041
3042 ** Gnus package
3043
3044 ---
3045 *** Gnus now includes Sieve and PGG
3046
3047 Sieve is a library for managing Sieve scripts. PGG is a library to handle
3048 PGP/MIME.
3049
3050 ---
3051 *** There are many news features, bug fixes and improvements.
3052
3053 See the file GNUS-NEWS or the node "Oort Gnus" in the Gnus manual for details.
3054
3055 ---
3056 ** MH-E changes.
3057
3058 Upgraded to MH-E version 8.0. There have been major changes since
3059 version 5.0.2; see MH-E-NEWS for details.
3060
3061 ** Calendar changes:
3062
3063 +++
3064 *** You can now use < and >, instead of C-x < and C-x >, to scroll
3065 the calendar left or right. (The old key bindings still work too.)
3066
3067 +++
3068 *** There is a new calendar package, icalendar.el, that can be used to
3069 convert Emacs diary entries to/from the iCalendar format.
3070
3071 +++
3072 *** Diary sexp entries can have custom marking in the calendar.
3073 Diary sexp functions which only apply to certain days (such as
3074 `diary-block' or `diary-cyclic') now take an optional parameter MARK,
3075 which is the name of a face or a single-character string indicating
3076 how to highlight the day in the calendar display. Specifying a
3077 single-character string as @var{mark} places the character next to the
3078 day in the calendar. Specifying a face highlights the day with that
3079 face. This lets you have different colors or markings for vacations,
3080 appointments, paydays or anything else using a sexp.
3081
3082 +++
3083 *** The new function `calendar-goto-day-of-year' (g D) prompts for a
3084 year and day number, and moves to that date. Negative day numbers
3085 count backward from the end of the year.
3086
3087 +++
3088 *** The new Calendar function `calendar-goto-iso-week' (g w)
3089 prompts for a year and a week number, and moves to the first
3090 day of that ISO week.
3091
3092 ---
3093 *** The new variable `calendar-minimum-window-height' affects the
3094 window generated by the function `generate-calendar-window'.
3095
3096 ---
3097 *** The functions `holiday-easter-etc' and `holiday-advent' now take
3098 optional arguments, in order to only report on the specified holiday
3099 rather than all. This makes customization of variables such as
3100 `christian-holidays' simpler.
3101
3102 ---
3103 *** The function `simple-diary-display' now by default sets a header line.
3104 This can be controlled through the variables `diary-header-line-flag'
3105 and `diary-header-line-format'.
3106
3107 +++
3108 *** The procedure for activating appointment reminders has changed:
3109 use the new function `appt-activate'. The new variable
3110 `appt-display-format' controls how reminders are displayed, replacing
3111 `appt-issue-message', `appt-visible', and `appt-msg-window'.
3112
3113 +++
3114 *** The new functions `diary-from-outlook', `diary-from-outlook-gnus',
3115 and `diary-from-outlook-rmail' can be used to import diary entries
3116 from Outlook-format appointments in mail messages. The variable
3117 `diary-outlook-formats' can be customized to recognize additional
3118 formats.
3119
3120 +++
3121 ** Speedbar changes:
3122
3123 *** Speedbar items can now be selected by clicking mouse-1, based on
3124 the `mouse-1-click-follows-link' mechanism.
3125
3126 *** SPC and DEL are no longer bound to scroll up/down in the speedbar
3127 keymap.
3128
3129 *** The new command `speedbar-toggle-line-expansion', bound to SPC,
3130 contracts or expands the line under the cursor.
3131
3132 *** New command `speedbar-create-directory', bound to `M'.
3133
3134 *** The new commands `speedbar-expand-line-descendants' and
3135 `speedbar-contract-line-descendants', bound to `[' and `]'
3136 respectively, expand and contract the line under cursor with all of
3137 its descendents.
3138
3139 *** The new user option `speedbar-query-confirmation-method' controls
3140 how querying is performed for file operations. A value of 'always
3141 means to always query before file operations; 'none-but-delete means
3142 to not query before any file operations, except before a file
3143 deletion.
3144
3145 *** The new user option `speedbar-select-frame-method' specifies how
3146 to select a frame for displaying a file opened with the speedbar. A
3147 value of 'attached means to use the attached frame (the frame that
3148 speedbar was started from.) A number such as 1 or -1 means to pass
3149 that number to `other-frame'.
3150
3151 *** The new user option `speedbar-use-tool-tips-flag', if non-nil,
3152 means to display tool-tips for speedbar items.
3153
3154 *** The frame management code in speedbar.el has been split into a new
3155 `dframe' library. Emacs Lisp code that makes use of the speedbar
3156 should use `dframe-attached-frame' instead of
3157 `speedbar-attached-frame', `dframe-timer' instead of `speedbar-timer',
3158 `dframe-close-frame' instead of `speedbar-close-frame', and
3159 `dframe-activity-change-focus-flag' instead of
3160 `speedbar-activity-change-focus-flag'. The variables
3161 `speedbar-update-speed' and `speedbar-navigating-speed' are also
3162 obsolete; use `dframe-update-speed' instead.
3163
3164 ---
3165 ** sql changes.
3166
3167 *** The variable `sql-product' controls the highlighting of different
3168 SQL dialects. This variable can be set globally via Customize, on a
3169 buffer-specific basis via local variable settings, or for the current
3170 session using the new SQL->Product submenu. (This menu replaces the
3171 SQL->Highlighting submenu.)
3172
3173 The following values are supported:
3174
3175 ansi ANSI Standard (default)
3176 db2 DB2
3177 informix Informix
3178 ingres Ingres
3179 interbase Interbase
3180 linter Linter
3181 ms Microsoft
3182 mysql MySQL
3183 oracle Oracle
3184 postgres Postgres
3185 solid Solid
3186 sqlite SQLite
3187 sybase Sybase
3188
3189 The current product name will be shown on the mode line following the
3190 SQL mode indicator.
3191
3192 The technique of setting `sql-mode-font-lock-defaults' directly in
3193 your `.emacs' will no longer establish the default highlighting -- Use
3194 `sql-product' to accomplish this.
3195
3196 ANSI keywords are always highlighted.
3197
3198 *** The function `sql-add-product-keywords' can be used to add
3199 font-lock rules to the product specific rules. For example, to have
3200 all identifiers ending in `_t' under MS SQLServer treated as a type,
3201 you would use the following line in your .emacs file:
3202
3203 (sql-add-product-keywords 'ms
3204 '(("\\<\\w+_t\\>" . font-lock-type-face)))
3205
3206 *** Oracle support includes keyword highlighting for Oracle 9i.
3207
3208 Most SQL and PL/SQL keywords are implemented. SQL*Plus commands are
3209 highlighted in `font-lock-doc-face'.
3210
3211 *** Microsoft SQLServer support has been significantly improved.
3212
3213 Keyword highlighting for SqlServer 2000 is implemented.
3214 sql-interactive-mode defaults to use osql, rather than isql, because
3215 osql flushes its error stream more frequently. Thus error messages
3216 are displayed when they occur rather than when the session is
3217 terminated.
3218
3219 If the username and password are not provided to `sql-ms', osql is
3220 called with the `-E' command line argument to use the operating system
3221 credentials to authenticate the user.
3222
3223 *** Postgres support is enhanced.
3224 Keyword highlighting of Postgres 7.3 is implemented. Prompting for
3225 the username and the pgsql `-U' option is added.
3226
3227 *** MySQL support is enhanced.
3228 Keyword highlighting of MySql 4.0 is implemented.
3229
3230 *** Imenu support has been enhanced to locate tables, views, indexes,
3231 packages, procedures, functions, triggers, sequences, rules, and
3232 defaults.
3233
3234 *** Added SQL->Start SQLi Session menu entry which calls the
3235 appropriate `sql-interactive-mode' wrapper for the current setting of
3236 `sql-product'.
3237
3238 ---
3239 *** sql.el supports the SQLite interpreter--call 'sql-sqlite'.
3240
3241 ** FFAP changes:
3242
3243 +++
3244 *** New ffap commands and keybindings:
3245
3246 C-x C-r (`ffap-read-only'),
3247 C-x C-v (`ffap-alternate-file'), C-x C-d (`ffap-list-directory'),
3248 C-x 4 r (`ffap-read-only-other-window'), C-x 4 d (`ffap-dired-other-window'),
3249 C-x 5 r (`ffap-read-only-other-frame'), C-x 5 d (`ffap-dired-other-frame').
3250
3251 ---
3252 *** FFAP accepts wildcards in a file name by default.
3253
3254 C-x C-f passes the file name to `find-file' with non-nil WILDCARDS
3255 argument, which visits multiple files, and C-x d passes it to `dired'.
3256
3257 ---
3258 ** In skeleton.el, `-' marks the `skeleton-point' without interregion interaction.
3259
3260 `@' has reverted to only setting `skeleton-positions' and no longer
3261 sets `skeleton-point'. Skeletons which used @ to mark
3262 `skeleton-point' independent of `_' should now use `-' instead. The
3263 updated `skeleton-insert' docstring explains these new features along
3264 with other details of skeleton construction.
3265
3266 ---
3267 ** Hideshow mode changes
3268
3269 *** New variable `hs-set-up-overlay' allows customization of the overlay
3270 used to effect hiding for hideshow minor mode. Integration with isearch
3271 handles the overlay property `display' specially, preserving it during
3272 temporary overlay showing in the course of an isearch operation.
3273
3274 *** New variable `hs-allow-nesting' non-nil means that hiding a block does
3275 not discard the hidden state of any "internal" blocks; when the parent
3276 block is later shown, the internal blocks remain hidden. Default is nil.
3277
3278 +++
3279 ** `hide-ifdef-mode' now uses overlays rather than selective-display
3280 to hide its text. This should be mostly transparent but slightly
3281 changes the behavior of motion commands like C-e and C-p.
3282
3283 ---
3284 ** `partial-completion-mode' now handles partial completion on directory names.
3285
3286 ---
3287 ** The type-break package now allows `type-break-file-name' to be nil
3288 and if so, doesn't store any data across sessions. This is handy if
3289 you don't want the `.type-break' file in your home directory or are
3290 annoyed by the need for interaction when you kill Emacs.
3291
3292 ---
3293 ** `ps-print' can now print characters from the mule-unicode charsets.
3294
3295 Printing text with characters from the mule-unicode-* sets works with
3296 `ps-print', provided that you have installed the appropriate BDF
3297 fonts. See the file INSTALL for URLs where you can find these fonts.
3298
3299 ---
3300 ** New command `strokes-global-set-stroke-string'.
3301 This is like `strokes-global-set-stroke', but it allows you to bind
3302 the stroke directly to a string to insert. This is convenient for
3303 using strokes as an input method.
3304
3305 ** Emacs server changes:
3306
3307 +++
3308 *** You can have several Emacs servers on the same machine.
3309
3310 % emacs --eval '(setq server-name "foo")' -f server-start &
3311 % emacs --eval '(setq server-name "bar")' -f server-start &
3312 % emacsclient -s foo file1
3313 % emacsclient -s bar file2
3314
3315 +++
3316 *** The `emacsclient' command understands the options `--eval' and
3317 `--display' which tell Emacs respectively to evaluate the given Lisp
3318 expression and to use the given display when visiting files.
3319
3320 +++
3321 *** User option `server-mode' can be used to start a server process.
3322
3323 ---
3324 ** LDAP support now defaults to ldapsearch from OpenLDAP version 2.
3325
3326 +++
3327 ** You can now disable pc-selection-mode after enabling it.
3328
3329 M-x pc-selection-mode behaves like a proper minor mode, and with no
3330 argument it toggles the mode. Turning off PC-Selection mode restores
3331 the global key bindings that were replaced by turning on the mode.
3332
3333 ---
3334 ** `uniquify-strip-common-suffix' tells uniquify to prefer
3335 `file|dir1' and `file|dir2' to `file|dir1/subdir' and `file|dir2/subdir'.
3336
3337 ---
3338 ** Support for `magic cookie' standout modes has been removed.
3339
3340 Emacs still works on terminals that require magic cookies in order to
3341 use standout mode, but they can no longer display mode-lines in
3342 inverse-video.
3343
3344 ---
3345 ** The game `mpuz' is enhanced.
3346
3347 `mpuz' now allows the 2nd factor not to have two identical digits. By
3348 default, all trivial operations involving whole lines are performed
3349 automatically. The game uses faces for better visual feedback.
3350
3351 ** battery.el changes:
3352
3353 ---
3354 *** display-battery-mode replaces display-battery.
3355
3356 ---
3357 *** battery.el now works on recent versions of OS X.
3358
3359 ---
3360 ** calculator.el now has radix grouping mode.
3361
3362 To enable this, set `calculator-output-radix' non-nil. In this mode a
3363 separator character is used every few digits, making it easier to see
3364 byte boundaries etc. For more info, see the documentation of the
3365 variable `calculator-radix-grouping-mode'.
3366
3367 ---
3368 ** fast-lock.el and lazy-lock.el are obsolete. Use jit-lock.el instead.
3369
3370 ---
3371 ** iso-acc.el is now obsolete. Use one of the latin input methods instead.
3372
3373 ---
3374 ** cplus-md.el has been deleted.
3375 \f
3376 * Changes in Emacs 22.1 on non-free operating systems
3377
3378 +++
3379 ** The HOME directory defaults to Application Data under the user profile.
3380
3381 If you used a previous version of Emacs without setting the HOME
3382 environment variable and a `.emacs' was saved, then Emacs will continue
3383 using C:/ as the default HOME. But if you are installing Emacs afresh,
3384 the default location will be the "Application Data" (or similar
3385 localized name) subdirectory of your user profile. A typical location
3386 of this directory is "C:\Documents and Settings\USERNAME\Application Data",
3387 where USERNAME is your user name.
3388
3389 This change means that users can now have their own `.emacs' files on
3390 shared computers, and the default HOME directory is less likely to be
3391 read-only on computers that are administered by someone else.
3392
3393 +++
3394 ** Passing resources on the command line now works on MS Windows.
3395
3396 You can use --xrm to pass resource settings to Emacs, overriding any
3397 existing values. For example:
3398
3399 emacs --xrm "Emacs.Background:red" --xrm "Emacs.Geometry:100x20"
3400
3401 will start up Emacs on an initial frame of 100x20 with red background,
3402 irrespective of geometry or background setting on the Windows registry.
3403
3404 ---
3405 ** On MS Windows, the "system caret" now follows the cursor.
3406
3407 This enables Emacs to work better with programs that need to track
3408 the cursor, for example screen magnifiers and text to speech programs.
3409
3410 ---
3411 ** Tooltips now work on MS Windows.
3412
3413 See the Emacs 21.1 NEWS entry for tooltips for details.
3414
3415 ---
3416 ** Images are now supported on MS Windows.
3417
3418 PBM and XBM images are supported out of the box. Other image formats
3419 depend on external libraries. All of these libraries have been ported
3420 to Windows, and can be found in both source and binary form at
3421 http://gnuwin32.sourceforge.net/. Note that libpng also depends on
3422 zlib, and tiff depends on the version of jpeg that it was compiled
3423 against. For additional information, see nt/INSTALL.
3424
3425 ---
3426 ** Sound is now supported on MS Windows.
3427
3428 WAV format is supported on all versions of Windows, other formats such
3429 as AU, AIFF and MP3 may be supported in the more recent versions of
3430 Windows, or when other software provides hooks into the system level
3431 sound support for those formats.
3432
3433 ---
3434 ** Different shaped mouse pointers are supported on MS Windows.
3435
3436 The mouse pointer changes shape depending on what is under the pointer.
3437
3438 ---
3439 ** Pointing devices with more than 3 buttons are now supported on MS Windows.
3440
3441 The new variable `w32-pass-extra-mouse-buttons-to-system' controls
3442 whether Emacs should handle the extra buttons itself (the default), or
3443 pass them to Windows to be handled with system-wide functions.
3444
3445 ---
3446 ** Emacs takes note of colors defined in Control Panel on MS-Windows.
3447
3448 The Control Panel defines some default colors for applications in much
3449 the same way as wildcard X Resources do on X. Emacs now adds these
3450 colors to the colormap prefixed by System (eg SystemMenu for the
3451 default Menu background, SystemMenuText for the foreground), and uses
3452 some of them to initialize some of the default faces.
3453 `list-colors-display' shows the list of System color names, in case
3454 you wish to use them in other faces.
3455
3456 ---
3457 ** On MS Windows NT/W2K/XP, Emacs uses Unicode for clipboard operations.
3458
3459 Those systems use Unicode internally, so this allows Emacs to share
3460 multilingual text with other applications. On other versions of
3461 MS Windows, Emacs now uses the appropriate locale coding-system, so
3462 the clipboard should work correctly for your local language without
3463 any customizations.
3464
3465 ---
3466 ** Running in a console window in Windows now uses the console size.
3467
3468 Previous versions of Emacs erred on the side of having a usable Emacs
3469 through telnet, even though that was inconvenient if you use Emacs in
3470 a local console window with a scrollback buffer. The default value of
3471 w32-use-full-screen-buffer is now nil, which favors local console
3472 windows. Recent versions of Windows telnet also work well with this
3473 setting. If you are using an older telnet server then Emacs detects
3474 that the console window dimensions that are reported are not sane, and
3475 defaults to 80x25. If you use such a telnet server regularly at a size
3476 other than 80x25, you can still manually set
3477 w32-use-full-screen-buffer to t.
3478
3479 ---
3480 ** On Mac OS, `keyboard-coding-system' changes based on the keyboard script.
3481
3482 ---
3483 ** The variable `mac-keyboard-text-encoding' and the constants
3484 `kTextEncodingMacRoman', `kTextEncodingISOLatin1', and
3485 `kTextEncodingISOLatin2' are obsolete.
3486
3487 ** The variable `mac-command-key-is-meta' is obsolete. Use
3488 `mac-command-modifier' and `mac-option-modifier' instead.
3489 \f
3490 * Incompatible Lisp Changes in Emacs 22.1
3491
3492 ---
3493 ** The variables post-command-idle-hook and post-command-idle-delay have
3494 been removed. Use run-with-idle-timer instead.
3495
3496 +++
3497 ** `suppress-keymap' now works by remapping `self-insert-command' to
3498 the command `undefined'. (In earlier Emacs versions, it used
3499 `substitute-key-definition' to rebind self inserting characters to
3500 `undefined'.)
3501
3502 +++
3503 ** Mode line display ignores text properties as well as the
3504 :propertize and :eval forms in the value of a variable whose
3505 `risky-local-variable' property is nil.
3506
3507 ---
3508 The function `comint-send-input' now accepts 3 optional arguments:
3509
3510 (comint-send-input &optional no-newline artificial)
3511
3512 Callers sending input not from the user should use bind the 3rd
3513 argument `artificial' to a non-nil value, to prevent Emacs from
3514 deleting the part of subprocess output that matches the input.
3515
3516 ---
3517 ** Support for Mocklisp has been removed.
3518
3519 +++
3520 ** The variable `memory-full' now remains t until
3521 there is no longer a shortage of memory.
3522 \f
3523 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 22.1
3524
3525 ** General Lisp changes:
3526
3527 *** The function `expt' handles negative exponents differently.
3528 The value for `(expt A B)', if both A and B are integers and B is
3529 negative, is now a float. For example: (expt 2 -2) => 0.25.
3530
3531 +++
3532 *** The function `eql' is now available without requiring the CL package.
3533
3534 +++
3535 *** `makehash' is now obsolete. Use `make-hash-table' instead.
3536
3537 +++
3538 *** `add-to-list' takes an optional third argument, APPEND.
3539
3540 If APPEND is non-nil, the new element gets added at the end of the
3541 list instead of at the beginning. This change actually occurred in
3542 Emacs 21.1, but was not documented then.
3543
3544 +++
3545 *** New function `add-to-ordered-list' is like `add-to-list' but
3546 associates a numeric ordering of each element added to the list.
3547
3548 +++
3549 *** New function `copy-tree' makes a copy of a tree.
3550
3551 It recursively copies through both CARs and CDRs.
3552
3553 +++
3554 *** New function `delete-dups' deletes `equal' duplicate elements from a list.
3555
3556 It modifies the list destructively, like `delete'. Of several `equal'
3557 occurrences of an element in the list, the one that's kept is the
3558 first one.
3559
3560 +++
3561 *** New function `add-to-history' adds an element to a history list.
3562
3563 By default it removes duplicate elements from the history list it
3564 updates, but if `history-delete-duplicates' is nil or the function's
3565 optional argument KEEP-DUPS is non-nil, duplicate elements are not
3566 removed.
3567
3568 Lisp packages should use this function to add elements to their
3569 history lists.
3570
3571 +++
3572 *** New function `rassq-delete-all'.
3573
3574 (rassq-delete-all VALUE ALIST) deletes, from ALIST, each element whose
3575 CDR is `eq' to the specified value.
3576
3577 +++
3578 *** The function `number-sequence' makes a list of equally-separated numbers.
3579
3580 For instance, (number-sequence 4 9) returns (4 5 6 7 8 9). By
3581 default, the separation is 1, but you can specify a different
3582 separation as the third argument. (number-sequence 1.5 6 2) returns
3583 (1.5 3.5 5.5).
3584
3585 +++
3586 *** New variables `most-positive-fixnum' and `most-negative-fixnum'.
3587
3588 They hold the largest and smallest possible integer values.
3589
3590 +++
3591 *** Minor change in the function `format'.
3592
3593 Some flags that were accepted but not implemented (such as "*") are no
3594 longer accepted.
3595
3596 +++
3597 *** Functions `get' and `plist-get' no longer give errors for bad plists.
3598
3599 They return nil for a malformed property list or if the list is
3600 cyclic.
3601
3602 +++
3603 *** New functions `lax-plist-get' and `lax-plist-put'.
3604
3605 They are like `plist-get' and `plist-put', except that they compare
3606 the property name using `equal' rather than `eq'.
3607
3608 +++
3609 *** New variable `print-continuous-numbering'.
3610
3611 When this is non-nil, successive calls to print functions use a single
3612 numbering scheme for circular structure references. This is only
3613 relevant when `print-circle' is non-nil.
3614
3615 When you bind `print-continuous-numbering' to t, you should
3616 also bind `print-number-table' to nil.
3617
3618 +++
3619 *** New function `macroexpand-all' expands all macros in a form.
3620
3621 It is similar to the Common-Lisp function of the same name.
3622 One difference is that it guarantees to return the original argument
3623 if no expansion is done, which can be tested using `eq'.
3624
3625 +++
3626 *** The function `atan' now accepts an optional second argument.
3627
3628 When called with 2 arguments, as in `(atan Y X)', `atan' returns the
3629 angle in radians between the vector [X, Y] and the X axis. (This is
3630 equivalent to the standard C library function `atan2'.)
3631
3632 +++
3633 *** A function or macro's doc string can now specify the calling pattern.
3634
3635 You put this info in the doc string's last line. It should be
3636 formatted so as to match the regexp "\n\n(fn .*)\\'". If you don't
3637 specify this explicitly, Emacs determines it from the actual argument
3638 names. Usually that default is right, but not always.
3639
3640 +++
3641 *** New macro `with-local-quit' temporarily allows quitting.
3642
3643 A quit inside the body of `with-local-quit' is caught by the
3644 `with-local-quit' form itself, but another quit will happen later once
3645 the code that has inhibited quitting exits.
3646
3647 This is for use around potentially blocking or long-running code
3648 inside timer functions and `post-command-hook' functions.
3649
3650 +++
3651 *** New macro `define-obsolete-function-alias'.
3652
3653 This combines `defalias' and `make-obsolete'.
3654
3655 +++
3656 *** New function `unsafep' determines whether a Lisp form is safe.
3657
3658 It returns nil if the given Lisp form can't possibly do anything
3659 dangerous; otherwise it returns a reason why the form might be unsafe
3660 (calls unknown function, alters global variable, etc.).
3661
3662 +++
3663 *** New macro `eval-at-startup' specifies expressions to
3664 evaluate when Emacs starts up. If this is done after startup,
3665 it evaluates those expressions immediately.
3666
3667 This is useful in packages that can be preloaded.
3668
3669 *** `list-faces-display' takes an optional argument, REGEXP.
3670
3671 If it is non-nil, the function lists only faces matching this regexp.
3672
3673 +++
3674 *** New functions `string-or-null-p' and `booleanp'.
3675
3676 `string-or-null-p' returns non-nil iff OBJECT is a string or nil.
3677 `booleanp' returns non-nil iff OBJECT is a t or nil.
3678
3679 ** Lisp code indentation features:
3680
3681 +++
3682 *** The `defmacro' form can contain indentation and edebug declarations.
3683
3684 These declarations specify how to indent the macro calls in Lisp mode
3685 and how to debug them with Edebug. You write them like this:
3686
3687 (defmacro NAME LAMBDA-LIST [DOC-STRING] [DECLARATION ...] ...)
3688
3689 DECLARATION is a list `(declare DECLARATION-SPECIFIER ...)'. The
3690 possible declaration specifiers are:
3691
3692 (indent INDENT)
3693 Set NAME's `lisp-indent-function' property to INDENT.
3694
3695 (edebug DEBUG)
3696 Set NAME's `edebug-form-spec' property to DEBUG. (This is
3697 equivalent to writing a `def-edebug-spec' for the macro,
3698 but this is cleaner.)
3699
3700 ---
3701 *** cl-indent now allows customization of Indentation of backquoted forms.
3702
3703 See the new user option `lisp-backquote-indentation'.
3704
3705 ---
3706 *** cl-indent now handles indentation of simple and extended `loop' forms.
3707
3708 The new user options `lisp-loop-keyword-indentation',
3709 `lisp-loop-forms-indentation', and `lisp-simple-loop-indentation' can
3710 be used to customize the indentation of keywords and forms in loop
3711 forms.
3712
3713 +++
3714 ** Variable aliases:
3715
3716 *** New function: defvaralias ALIAS-VAR BASE-VAR [DOCSTRING]
3717
3718 This function defines the symbol ALIAS-VAR as a variable alias for
3719 symbol BASE-VAR. This means that retrieving the value of ALIAS-VAR
3720 returns the value of BASE-VAR, and changing the value of ALIAS-VAR
3721 changes the value of BASE-VAR.
3722
3723 DOCSTRING, if present, is the documentation for ALIAS-VAR; else it has
3724 the same documentation as BASE-VAR.
3725
3726 *** New function: indirect-variable VARIABLE
3727
3728 This function returns the variable at the end of the chain of aliases
3729 of VARIABLE. If VARIABLE is not a symbol, or if VARIABLE is not
3730 defined as an alias, the function returns VARIABLE.
3731
3732 It might be noteworthy that variables aliases work for all kinds of
3733 variables, including buffer-local and frame-local variables.
3734
3735 +++
3736 *** The macro `define-obsolete-variable-alias' combines `defvaralias' and
3737 `make-obsolete-variable'.
3738
3739 ** defcustom changes:
3740
3741 +++
3742 *** The package-version keyword has been added to provide
3743 `customize-changed-options' functionality to packages in the future.
3744 Developers who make use of this keyword must also update the new
3745 variable `customize-package-emacs-version-alist'.
3746
3747 +++
3748 *** The new customization type `float' requires a floating point number.
3749
3750 ** String changes:
3751
3752 +++
3753 *** The escape sequence \s is now interpreted as a SPACE character.
3754
3755 Exception: In a character constant, if it is followed by a `-' in a
3756 character constant (e.g. ?\s-A), it is still interpreted as the super
3757 modifier. In strings, \s is always interpreted as a space.
3758
3759 +++
3760 *** A hex escape in a string constant forces the string to be multibyte.
3761
3762 +++
3763 *** An octal escape in a string constant forces the string to be unibyte.
3764
3765 +++
3766 *** `split-string' now includes null substrings in the returned list if
3767 the optional argument SEPARATORS is non-nil and there are matches for
3768 SEPARATORS at the beginning or end of the string. If SEPARATORS is
3769 nil, or if the new optional third argument OMIT-NULLS is non-nil, all
3770 empty matches are omitted from the returned list.
3771
3772 +++
3773 *** New function `string-to-multibyte' converts a unibyte string to a
3774 multibyte string with the same individual character codes.
3775
3776 +++
3777 *** New function `substring-no-properties' returns a substring without
3778 text properties.
3779
3780 +++
3781 *** The new function `assoc-string' replaces `assoc-ignore-case' and
3782 `assoc-ignore-representation', which are still available, but have
3783 been declared obsolete.
3784
3785 +++
3786 ** Displaying warnings to the user.
3787
3788 See the functions `warn' and `display-warning', or the Lisp Manual.
3789 If you want to be sure the warning will not be overlooked, this
3790 facility is much better than using `message', since it displays
3791 warnings in a separate window.
3792
3793 +++
3794 ** Progress reporters.
3795
3796 These provide a simple and uniform way for commands to present
3797 progress messages for the user.
3798
3799 See the new functions `make-progress-reporter',
3800 `progress-reporter-update', `progress-reporter-force-update',
3801 `progress-reporter-done', and `dotimes-with-progress-reporter'.
3802
3803 ** Buffer positions:
3804
3805 +++
3806 *** Function `compute-motion' now calculates the usable window
3807 width if the WIDTH argument is nil. If the TOPOS argument is nil,
3808 the usable window height and width is used.
3809
3810 +++
3811 *** The `line-move', `scroll-up', and `scroll-down' functions will now
3812 modify the window vscroll to scroll through display rows that are
3813 taller that the height of the window, for example in the presence of
3814 large images. To disable this feature, bind the new variable
3815 `auto-window-vscroll' to nil.
3816
3817 +++
3818 *** The argument to `forward-word', `backward-word' is optional.
3819
3820 It defaults to 1.
3821
3822 +++
3823 *** Argument to `forward-to-indentation' and `backward-to-indentation' is optional.
3824
3825 It defaults to 1.
3826
3827 +++
3828 *** New function `mouse-on-link-p' tests if a position is in a clickable link.
3829
3830 This is the function used by the new `mouse-1-click-follows-link'
3831 functionality.
3832
3833 +++
3834 *** New function `line-number-at-pos' returns the line number of a position.
3835
3836 It an optional buffer position argument that defaults to point.
3837
3838 +++
3839 *** `field-beginning' and `field-end' take new optional argument, LIMIT.
3840
3841 This argument tells them not to search beyond LIMIT. Instead they
3842 give up and return LIMIT.
3843
3844 +++
3845 *** Function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now returns the pixel coordinates
3846 and partial visibility state of the corresponding row, if the PARTIALLY
3847 arg is non-nil.
3848
3849 +++
3850 *** New functions `posn-at-point' and `posn-at-x-y' return
3851 click-event-style position information for a given visible buffer
3852 position or for a given window pixel coordinate.
3853
3854 ** Text modification:
3855
3856 +++
3857 *** The new function `insert-for-yank' normally works like `insert', but
3858 removes the text properties in the `yank-excluded-properties' list
3859 and handles the `yank-handler' text property.
3860
3861 +++
3862 *** The new function `insert-buffer-substring-as-yank' is like
3863 `insert-for-yank' except that it gets the text from another buffer as
3864 in `insert-buffer-substring'.
3865
3866 +++
3867 *** The new function `insert-buffer-substring-no-properties' is like
3868 `insert-buffer-substring', but removes all text properties from the
3869 inserted substring.
3870
3871 +++
3872 *** The new function `filter-buffer-substring' extracts a buffer
3873 substring, passes it through a set of filter functions, and returns
3874 the filtered substring. Use it instead of `buffer-substring' or
3875 `delete-and-extract-region' when copying text into a user-accessible
3876 data structure, such as the kill-ring, X clipboard, or a register.
3877
3878 The list of filter function is specified by the new variable
3879 `buffer-substring-filters'. For example, Longlines mode adds to
3880 `buffer-substring-filters' to remove soft newlines from the copied
3881 text.
3882
3883 +++
3884 *** Function `translate-region' accepts also a char-table as TABLE
3885 argument.
3886
3887 +++
3888 *** The new translation table `translation-table-for-input'
3889 is used for customizing self-insertion. The character to
3890 be inserted is translated through it.
3891
3892 ---
3893 *** Text clones.
3894
3895 The new function `text-clone-create'. Text clones are chunks of text
3896 that are kept identical by transparently propagating changes from one
3897 clone to the other.
3898
3899 ---
3900 *** The function `insert-string' is now obsolete.
3901
3902 ** Filling changes.
3903
3904 +++
3905 *** In determining an adaptive fill prefix, Emacs now tries the function in
3906 `adaptive-fill-function' _before_ matching the buffer line against
3907 `adaptive-fill-regexp' rather than _after_ it.
3908
3909 +++
3910 ** Atomic change groups.
3911
3912 To perform some changes in the current buffer "atomically" so that
3913 they either all succeed or are all undone, use `atomic-change-group'
3914 around the code that makes changes. For instance:
3915
3916 (atomic-change-group
3917 (insert foo)
3918 (delete-region x y))
3919
3920 If an error (or other nonlocal exit) occurs inside the body of
3921 `atomic-change-group', it unmakes all the changes in that buffer that
3922 were during the execution of the body. The change group has no effect
3923 on any other buffers--any such changes remain.
3924
3925 If you need something more sophisticated, you can directly call the
3926 lower-level functions that `atomic-change-group' uses. Here is how.
3927
3928 To set up a change group for one buffer, call `prepare-change-group'.
3929 Specify the buffer as argument; it defaults to the current buffer.
3930 This function returns a "handle" for the change group. You must save
3931 the handle to activate the change group and then finish it.
3932
3933 Before you change the buffer again, you must activate the change
3934 group. Pass the handle to `activate-change-group' afterward to
3935 do this.
3936
3937 After you make the changes, you must finish the change group. You can
3938 either accept the changes or cancel them all. Call
3939 `accept-change-group' to accept the changes in the group as final;
3940 call `cancel-change-group' to undo them all.
3941
3942 You should use `unwind-protect' to make sure the group is always
3943 finished. The call to `activate-change-group' should be inside the
3944 `unwind-protect', in case the user types C-g just after it runs.
3945 (This is one reason why `prepare-change-group' and
3946 `activate-change-group' are separate functions.) Once you finish the
3947 group, don't use the handle again--don't try to finish the same group
3948 twice.
3949
3950 To make a multibuffer change group, call `prepare-change-group' once
3951 for each buffer you want to cover, then use `nconc' to combine the
3952 returned values, like this:
3953
3954 (nconc (prepare-change-group buffer-1)
3955 (prepare-change-group buffer-2))
3956
3957 You can then activate the multibuffer change group with a single call
3958 to `activate-change-group', and finish it with a single call to
3959 `accept-change-group' or `cancel-change-group'.
3960
3961 Nested use of several change groups for the same buffer works as you
3962 would expect. Non-nested use of change groups for the same buffer
3963 will lead to undesirable results, so don't let it happen; the first
3964 change group you start for any given buffer should be the last one
3965 finished.
3966
3967 ** Buffer-related changes:
3968
3969 ---
3970 *** `list-buffers-noselect' now takes an additional argument, BUFFER-LIST.
3971
3972 If it is non-nil, it specifies which buffers to list.
3973
3974 +++
3975 *** `kill-buffer-hook' is now a permanent local.
3976
3977 +++
3978 *** The new function `buffer-local-value' returns the buffer-local
3979 binding of VARIABLE (a symbol) in buffer BUFFER. If VARIABLE does not
3980 have a buffer-local binding in buffer BUFFER, it returns the default
3981 value of VARIABLE instead.
3982
3983 *** The function `frame-or-buffer-changed-p' now lets you maintain
3984 various status records in parallel.
3985
3986 It takes a variable (a symbol) as argument. If the variable is non-nil,
3987 then its value should be a vector installed previously by
3988 `frame-or-buffer-changed-p'. If the frame names, buffer names, buffer
3989 order, or their read-only or modified flags have changed, since the
3990 time the vector's contents were recorded by a previous call to
3991 `frame-or-buffer-changed-p', then the function returns t. Otherwise
3992 it returns nil.
3993
3994 On the first call to `frame-or-buffer-changed-p', the variable's
3995 value should be nil. `frame-or-buffer-changed-p' stores a suitable
3996 vector into the variable and returns t.
3997
3998 If the variable is itself nil, then `frame-or-buffer-changed-p' uses,
3999 for compatibility, an internal variable which exists only for this
4000 purpose.
4001
4002 +++
4003 *** The function `read-buffer' follows the convention for reading from
4004 the minibuffer with a default value: if DEF is non-nil, the minibuffer
4005 prompt provided in PROMPT is edited to show the default value provided
4006 in DEF before the terminal colon and space.
4007
4008 ** Local variables lists:
4009
4010 +++
4011 *** Text properties in local variables.
4012
4013 A file local variables list cannot specify a string with text
4014 properties--any specified text properties are discarded.
4015
4016 +++
4017 *** The variable `enable-local-variables' controls how local variable
4018 lists are handled. t, the default, specifies the standard querying
4019 behavior. :safe means use only safe values, and ignore the rest.
4020 nil means ignore them all. Anything else means always query.
4021
4022 +++
4023 *** The variable `safe-local-eval-forms' specifies a list of forms that
4024 are ok to evaluate when they appear in an `eval' local variables
4025 specification. Normally Emacs asks for confirmation before evaluating
4026 such a form, but if the form appears in this list, no confirmation is
4027 needed.
4028
4029 ---
4030 *** If a function has a non-nil `safe-local-eval-function' property,
4031 that means it is ok to evaluate some calls to that function when it
4032 appears in an `eval' local variables specification. If the property
4033 is t, then any form calling that function with constant arguments is
4034 ok. If the property is a function or list of functions, they are called
4035 with the form as argument, and if any returns t, the form is ok to call.
4036
4037 If the form is not "ok to call", that means Emacs asks for
4038 confirmation as before.
4039
4040 ** Searching and matching changes:
4041
4042 +++
4043 *** New function `looking-back' checks whether a regular expression matches
4044 the text before point. Specifying the LIMIT argument bounds how far
4045 back the match can start; this is a way to keep it from taking too long.
4046
4047 +++
4048 *** The new variable `search-spaces-regexp' controls how to search
4049 for spaces in a regular expression. If it is non-nil, it should be a
4050 regular expression, and any series of spaces stands for that regular
4051 expression. If it is nil, spaces stand for themselves.
4052
4053 Spaces inside of constructs such as `[..]' and inside loops such as
4054 `*', `+', and `?' are never replaced with `search-spaces-regexp'.
4055
4056 +++
4057 *** New regular expression operators, `\_<' and `\_>'.
4058
4059 These match the beginning and end of a symbol. A symbol is a
4060 non-empty sequence of either word or symbol constituent characters, as
4061 specified by the syntax table.
4062
4063 ---
4064 *** rx.el has new corresponding `symbol-end' and `symbol-start' elements.
4065
4066 +++
4067 *** `skip-chars-forward' and `skip-chars-backward' now handle
4068 character classes such as `[:alpha:]', along with individual
4069 characters and ranges.
4070
4071 ---
4072 *** In `replace-match', the replacement text no longer inherits
4073 properties from surrounding text.
4074
4075 +++
4076 *** The list returned by `(match-data t)' now has the buffer as a final
4077 element, if the last match was on a buffer. `set-match-data'
4078 accepts such a list for restoring the match state.
4079
4080 +++
4081 *** Functions `match-data' and `set-match-data' now have an optional
4082 argument `reseat'. When non-nil, all markers in the match data list
4083 passed to these functions will be reseated to point to nowhere.
4084
4085 +++
4086 *** The default value of `sentence-end' is now defined using the new
4087 variable `sentence-end-without-space', which contains such characters
4088 that end a sentence without following spaces.
4089
4090 The function `sentence-end' should be used to obtain the value of the
4091 variable `sentence-end'. If the variable `sentence-end' is nil, then
4092 this function returns the regexp constructed from the variables
4093 `sentence-end-without-period', `sentence-end-double-space' and
4094 `sentence-end-without-space'.
4095
4096 ** Undo changes:
4097
4098 +++
4099 *** `buffer-undo-list' can allows programmable elements.
4100
4101 These elements have the form (apply FUNNAME . ARGS), where FUNNAME is
4102 a symbol other than t or nil. That stands for a high-level change
4103 that should be undone by evaluating (apply FUNNAME ARGS).
4104
4105 These entries can also have the form (apply DELTA BEG END FUNNAME . ARGS)
4106 which indicates that the change which took place was limited to the
4107 range BEG...END and increased the buffer size by DELTA.
4108
4109 +++
4110 *** If the buffer's undo list for the current command gets longer than
4111 `undo-outer-limit', garbage collection empties it. This is to prevent
4112 it from using up the available memory and choking Emacs.
4113
4114 +++
4115 ** New `yank-handler' text property can be used to control how
4116 previously killed text on the kill ring is reinserted.
4117
4118 The value of the `yank-handler' property must be a list with one to four
4119 elements with the following format:
4120 (FUNCTION PARAM NOEXCLUDE UNDO).
4121
4122 The `insert-for-yank' function looks for a yank-handler property on
4123 the first character on its string argument (typically the first
4124 element on the kill-ring). If a `yank-handler' property is found,
4125 the normal behavior of `insert-for-yank' is modified in various ways:
4126
4127 When FUNCTION is present and non-nil, it is called instead of `insert'
4128 to insert the string. FUNCTION takes one argument--the object to insert.
4129 If PARAM is present and non-nil, it replaces STRING as the object
4130 passed to FUNCTION (or `insert'); for example, if FUNCTION is
4131 `yank-rectangle', PARAM should be a list of strings to insert as a
4132 rectangle.
4133 If NOEXCLUDE is present and non-nil, the normal removal of the
4134 `yank-excluded-properties' is not performed; instead FUNCTION is
4135 responsible for removing those properties. This may be necessary
4136 if FUNCTION adjusts point before or after inserting the object.
4137 If UNDO is present and non-nil, it is a function that will be called
4138 by `yank-pop' to undo the insertion of the current object. It is
4139 called with two arguments, the start and end of the current region.
4140 FUNCTION can set `yank-undo-function' to override the UNDO value.
4141
4142 *** The functions `kill-new', `kill-append', and `kill-region' now have an
4143 optional argument to specify the `yank-handler' text property to put on
4144 the killed text.
4145
4146 *** The function `yank-pop' will now use a non-nil value of the variable
4147 `yank-undo-function' (instead of `delete-region') to undo the previous
4148 `yank' or `yank-pop' command (or a call to `insert-for-yank'). The function
4149 `insert-for-yank' automatically sets that variable according to the UNDO
4150 element of the string argument's `yank-handler' text property if present.
4151
4152 *** The function `insert-for-yank' now supports strings where the
4153 `yank-handler' property does not span the first character of the
4154 string. The old behavior is available if you call
4155 `insert-for-yank-1' instead.
4156
4157 ** Syntax table changes:
4158
4159 +++
4160 *** The macro `with-syntax-table' no longer copies the syntax table.
4161
4162 +++
4163 *** The new function `syntax-after' returns the syntax code
4164 of the character after a specified buffer position, taking account
4165 of text properties as well as the character code.
4166
4167 +++
4168 *** `syntax-class' extracts the class of a syntax code (as returned
4169 by `syntax-after').
4170
4171 +++
4172 *** The new function `syntax-ppss' provides an efficient way to find the
4173 current syntactic context at point.
4174
4175 ** File operation changes:
4176
4177 +++
4178 *** New vars `exec-suffixes' and `load-suffixes' used when
4179 searching for an executable or an Emacs Lisp file.
4180
4181 +++
4182 *** The new primitive `set-file-times' sets a file's access and
4183 modification times. Magic file name handlers can handle this
4184 operation.
4185
4186 +++
4187 *** The new function `file-remote-p' tests a file name and returns
4188 non-nil if it specifies a remote file (one that Emacs accesses using
4189 its own special methods and not directly through the file system).
4190 The value in that case is an identifier for the remote file system.
4191
4192 +++
4193 *** `buffer-auto-save-file-format' is the new name for what was
4194 formerly called `auto-save-file-format'. It is now a permanent local.
4195
4196 +++
4197 *** Functions `file-name-sans-extension' and `file-name-extension' now
4198 ignore the leading dots in file names, so that file names such as
4199 `.emacs' are treated as extensionless.
4200
4201 +++
4202 *** `copy-file' now takes an additional option arg MUSTBENEW.
4203
4204 This argument works like the MUSTBENEW argument of write-file.
4205
4206 +++
4207 *** `visited-file-modtime' and `calendar-time-from-absolute' now return
4208 a list of two integers, instead of a cons.
4209
4210 +++
4211 *** `file-chase-links' now takes an optional second argument LIMIT which
4212 specifies the maximum number of links to chase through. If after that
4213 many iterations the file name obtained is still a symbolic link,
4214 `file-chase-links' returns it anyway.
4215
4216 +++
4217 *** The new hook `before-save-hook' is invoked by `basic-save-buffer'
4218 before saving buffers. This allows packages to perform various final
4219 tasks. For example, it can be used by the copyright package to make
4220 sure saved files have the current year in any copyright headers.
4221
4222 +++
4223 *** If `buffer-save-without-query' is non-nil in some buffer,
4224 `save-some-buffers' will always save that buffer without asking (if
4225 it's modified).
4226
4227 +++
4228 *** New function `locate-file' searches for a file in a list of directories.
4229 `locate-file' accepts a name of a file to search (a string), and two
4230 lists: a list of directories to search in and a list of suffixes to
4231 try; typical usage might use `exec-path' and `load-path' for the list
4232 of directories, and `exec-suffixes' and `load-suffixes' for the list
4233 of suffixes. The function also accepts a predicate argument to
4234 further filter candidate files.
4235
4236 One advantage of using this function is that the list of suffixes in
4237 `exec-suffixes' is OS-dependant, so this function will find
4238 executables without polluting Lisp code with OS dependencies.
4239
4240 ---
4241 *** The precedence of file name handlers has been changed.
4242
4243 Instead of choosing the first handler that matches,
4244 `find-file-name-handler' now gives precedence to a file name handler
4245 that matches nearest the end of the file name. More precisely, the
4246 handler whose (match-beginning 0) is the largest is chosen. In case
4247 of ties, the old "first matched" rule applies.
4248
4249 +++
4250 *** A file name handler can declare which operations it handles.
4251
4252 You do this by putting an `operation' property on the handler name
4253 symbol. The property value should be a list of the operations that
4254 the handler really handles. It won't be called for any other
4255 operations.
4256
4257 This is useful for autoloaded handlers, to prevent them from being
4258 autoloaded when not really necessary.
4259
4260 +++
4261 *** The function `make-auto-save-file-name' is now handled by file
4262 name handlers. This will be exploited for remote files mainly.
4263
4264 ** Input changes:
4265
4266 +++
4267 *** An interactive specification can now use the code letter 'U' to get
4268 the up-event that was discarded in case the last key sequence read for a
4269 previous `k' or `K' argument was a down-event; otherwise nil is used.
4270
4271 +++
4272 *** The new interactive-specification `G' reads a file name
4273 much like `F', but if the input is a directory name (even defaulted),
4274 it returns just the directory name.
4275
4276 ---
4277 *** Functions `y-or-n-p', `read-char', `read-key-sequence' and the like, that
4278 display a prompt but don't use the minibuffer, now display the prompt
4279 using the text properties (esp. the face) of the prompt string.
4280
4281 +++
4282 *** (while-no-input BODY...) runs BODY, but only so long as no input
4283 arrives. If the user types or clicks anything, BODY stops as if a
4284 quit had occurred. `while-no-input' returns the value of BODY, if BODY
4285 finishes. It returns nil if BODY was aborted by a quit, and t if
4286 BODY was aborted by arrival of input.
4287
4288 ** Minibuffer changes:
4289
4290 +++
4291 *** The new function `minibufferp' returns non-nil if its optional
4292 buffer argument is a minibuffer. If the argument is omitted, it
4293 defaults to the current buffer.
4294
4295 +++
4296 *** New function `minibuffer-selected-window' returns the window which
4297 was selected when entering the minibuffer.
4298
4299 +++
4300 *** `read-from-minibuffer' now accepts an additional argument KEEP-ALL
4301 saying to put all inputs in the history list, even empty ones.
4302
4303 +++
4304 *** The `read-file-name' function now takes an additional argument which
4305 specifies a predicate which the file name read must satisfy. The
4306 new variable `read-file-name-predicate' contains the predicate argument
4307 while reading the file name from the minibuffer; the predicate in this
4308 variable is used by read-file-name-internal to filter the completion list.
4309
4310 ---
4311 *** The new variable `read-file-name-function' can be used by Lisp code
4312 to override the built-in `read-file-name' function.
4313
4314 +++
4315 *** The new variable `read-file-name-completion-ignore-case' specifies
4316 whether completion ignores case when reading a file name with the
4317 `read-file-name' function.
4318
4319 +++
4320 *** The new function `read-directory-name' is for reading a directory name.
4321
4322 It is like `read-file-name' except that the defaulting works better
4323 for directories, and completion inside it shows only directories.
4324
4325 ** Completion changes:
4326
4327 +++
4328 *** The new function `minibuffer-completion-contents' returns the contents
4329 of the minibuffer just before point. That is what completion commands
4330 operate on.
4331
4332 +++
4333 *** The functions `all-completions' and `try-completion' now accept lists
4334 of strings as well as hash-tables additionally to alists, obarrays
4335 and functions. Furthermore, the function `test-completion' is now
4336 exported to Lisp. The keys in alists and hash tables can be either
4337 strings or symbols, which are automatically converted with to strings.
4338
4339 +++
4340 *** The new macro `dynamic-completion-table' supports using functions
4341 as a dynamic completion table.
4342
4343 (dynamic-completion-table FUN)
4344
4345 FUN is called with one argument, the string for which completion is required,
4346 and it should return an alist containing all the intended possible
4347 completions. This alist can be a full list of possible completions so that FUN
4348 can ignore the value of its argument. If completion is performed in the
4349 minibuffer, FUN will be called in the buffer from which the minibuffer was
4350 entered. `dynamic-completion-table' then computes the completion.
4351
4352 +++
4353 *** The new macro `lazy-completion-table' initializes a variable
4354 as a lazy completion table.
4355
4356 (lazy-completion-table VAR FUN)
4357
4358 If the completion table VAR is used for the first time (e.g., by passing VAR
4359 as an argument to `try-completion'), the function FUN is called with no
4360 arguments. FUN must return the completion table that will be stored in VAR.
4361 If completion is requested in the minibuffer, FUN will be called in the buffer
4362 from which the minibuffer was entered. The return value of
4363 `lazy-completion-table' must be used to initialize the value of VAR.
4364
4365 +++
4366 ** Enhancements to keymaps.
4367
4368 *** New keymaps for typing file names
4369
4370 Two new keymaps, `minibuffer-local-filename-completion-map' and
4371 `minibuffer-local-must-match-filename-map', apply whenever
4372 Emacs reads a file name in the minibuffer. These key maps override
4373 the usual binding of SPC to `minibuffer-complete-word' (so that file
4374 names with embedded spaces could be typed without the need to quote
4375 the spaces).
4376
4377 *** Cleaner way to enter key sequences.
4378
4379 You can enter a constant key sequence in a more natural format, the
4380 same one used for saving keyboard macros, using the macro `kbd'. For
4381 example,
4382
4383 (kbd "C-x C-f") => "\^x\^f"
4384
4385 *** Interactive commands can be remapped through keymaps.
4386
4387 This is an alternative to using `defadvice' or `substitute-key-definition'
4388 to modify the behavior of a key binding using the normal keymap
4389 binding and lookup functionality.
4390
4391 When a key sequence is bound to a command, and that command is
4392 remapped to another command, that command is run instead of the
4393 original command.
4394
4395 Example:
4396 Suppose that minor mode `my-mode' has defined the commands
4397 `my-kill-line' and `my-kill-word', and it wants C-k (and any other key
4398 bound to `kill-line') to run the command `my-kill-line' instead of
4399 `kill-line', and likewise it wants to run `my-kill-word' instead of
4400 `kill-word'.
4401
4402 Instead of rebinding C-k and the other keys in the minor mode map,
4403 command remapping allows you to directly map `kill-line' into
4404 `my-kill-line' and `kill-word' into `my-kill-word' using `define-key':
4405
4406 (define-key my-mode-map [remap kill-line] 'my-kill-line)
4407 (define-key my-mode-map [remap kill-word] 'my-kill-word)
4408
4409 When `my-mode' is enabled, its minor mode keymap is enabled too. So
4410 when the user types C-k, that runs the command `my-kill-line'.
4411
4412 Only one level of remapping is supported. In the above example, this
4413 means that if `my-kill-line' is remapped to `other-kill', then C-k still
4414 runs `my-kill-line'.
4415
4416 The following changes have been made to provide command remapping:
4417
4418 - Command remappings are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
4419 `remap', i.e. `(define-key MAP [remap CMD] DEF)' remaps command CMD
4420 to definition DEF in keymap MAP. The definition is not limited to
4421 another command; it can be anything accepted for a normal binding.
4422
4423 - The new function `command-remapping' returns the binding for a
4424 remapped command in the current keymaps, or nil if not remapped.
4425
4426 - `key-binding' now remaps interactive commands unless the optional
4427 third argument NO-REMAP is non-nil.
4428
4429 - `where-is-internal' now returns nil for a remapped command (e.g.
4430 `kill-line', when `my-mode' is enabled), and the actual key binding for
4431 the command it is remapped to (e.g. C-k for my-kill-line).
4432 It also has a new optional fifth argument, NO-REMAP, which inhibits
4433 remapping if non-nil (e.g. it returns "C-k" for `kill-line', and
4434 "<kill-line>" for `my-kill-line').
4435
4436 - The new variable `this-original-command' contains the original
4437 command before remapping. It is equal to `this-command' when the
4438 command was not remapped.
4439
4440 *** If text has a `keymap' property, that keymap takes precedence
4441 over minor mode keymaps.
4442
4443 *** The `keymap' property now also works at the ends of overlays and
4444 text properties, according to their stickiness. This also means that it
4445 works with empty overlays. The same hold for the `local-map' property.
4446
4447 *** Dense keymaps now handle inheritance correctly.
4448
4449 Previously a dense keymap would hide all of the simple-char key
4450 bindings of the parent keymap.
4451
4452 *** `define-key-after' now accepts keys longer than 1.
4453
4454 *** New function `current-active-maps' returns a list of currently
4455 active keymaps.
4456
4457 *** New function `describe-buffer-bindings' inserts the list of all
4458 defined keys and their definitions.
4459
4460 *** New function `keymap-prompt' returns the prompt string of a keymap.
4461
4462 *** (map-keymap FUNCTION KEYMAP) applies the function to each binding
4463 in the keymap.
4464
4465 *** New variable `emulation-mode-map-alists'.
4466
4467 Lisp packages using many minor mode keymaps can now maintain their own
4468 keymap alist separate from `minor-mode-map-alist' by adding their
4469 keymap alist to this list.
4470
4471 ** Abbrev changes:
4472
4473 +++
4474 *** The new function `copy-abbrev-table' copies an abbrev table.
4475
4476 It returns a new abbrev table that is a copy of a given abbrev table.
4477
4478 +++
4479 *** `define-abbrev' now accepts an optional argument SYSTEM-FLAG.
4480
4481 If non-nil, this marks the abbrev as a "system" abbrev, which means
4482 that it won't be stored in the user's abbrevs file if he saves the
4483 abbrevs. Major modes that predefine some abbrevs should always
4484 specify this flag.
4485
4486 +++
4487 ** Enhancements to process support
4488
4489 *** Function `list-processes' now has an optional argument; if non-nil,
4490 it lists only the processes whose query-on-exit flag is set.
4491
4492 *** New fns `set-process-query-on-exit-flag' and `process-query-on-exit-flag'.
4493
4494 These replace the old function `process-kill-without-query'. That
4495 function is still supported, but new code should use the new
4496 functions.
4497
4498 *** Function `signal-process' now accepts a process object or process
4499 name in addition to a process id to identify the signaled process.
4500
4501 *** Processes now have an associated property list where programs can
4502 maintain process state and other per-process related information.
4503
4504 Use the new functions `process-get' and `process-put' to access, add,
4505 and modify elements on this property list. Use the new functions
4506 `process-plist' and `set-process-plist' to access and replace the
4507 entire property list of a process.
4508
4509 *** Function `accept-process-output' has a new optional fourth arg
4510 JUST-THIS-ONE. If non-nil, only output from the specified process
4511 is handled, suspending output from other processes. If value is an
4512 integer, also inhibit running timers. This feature is generally not
4513 recommended, but may be necessary for specific applications, such as
4514 speech synthesis.
4515
4516 *** Adaptive read buffering of subprocess output.
4517
4518 On some systems, when emacs reads the output from a subprocess, the
4519 output data is read in very small blocks, potentially resulting in
4520 very poor performance. This behavior can be remedied to some extent
4521 by setting the new variable `process-adaptive-read-buffering' to a
4522 non-nil value (the default), as it will automatically delay reading
4523 from such processes, allowing them to produce more output before
4524 emacs tries to read it.
4525
4526 *** The new function `call-process-shell-command'.
4527
4528 This executes a shell command synchronously in a separate process.
4529
4530 *** The new function `process-file' is similar to `call-process', but
4531 obeys file handlers. The file handler is chosen based on
4532 `default-directory'.
4533
4534 *** A process filter function gets the output as multibyte string
4535 if the process specifies t for its filter's multibyteness.
4536
4537 That multibyteness is decided by the value of
4538 `default-enable-multibyte-characters' when the process is created, and
4539 you can change it later with `set-process-filter-multibyte'.
4540
4541 *** The new function `set-process-filter-multibyte' sets the
4542 multibyteness of the strings passed to the process's filter.
4543
4544 *** The new function `process-filter-multibyte-p' returns the
4545 multibyteness of the strings passed to the process's filter.
4546
4547 *** If a process's coding system is `raw-text' or `no-conversion' and its
4548 buffer is multibyte, the output of the process is at first converted
4549 to multibyte by `string-to-multibyte' then inserted in the buffer.
4550 Previously, it was converted to multibyte by `string-as-multibyte',
4551 which was not compatible with the behavior of file reading.
4552
4553 +++
4554 ** Enhanced networking support.
4555
4556 *** The new `make-network-process' function makes network connections.
4557 It allows opening of stream and datagram connections to a server, as well as
4558 create a stream or datagram server inside emacs.
4559
4560 - A server is started using :server t arg.
4561 - Datagram connection is selected using :type 'datagram arg.
4562 - A server can open on a random port using :service t arg.
4563 - Local sockets are supported using :family 'local arg.
4564 - IPv6 is supported (when available). You may explicitly select IPv6
4565 using :family 'ipv6 arg.
4566 - Non-blocking connect is supported using :nowait t arg.
4567 - The process' property list can be initialized using :plist PLIST arg;
4568 a copy of the server process' property list is automatically inherited
4569 by new client processes created to handle incoming connections.
4570
4571 To test for the availability of a given feature, use featurep like this:
4572 (featurep 'make-network-process '(:type datagram))
4573 (featurep 'make-network-process '(:family ipv6))
4574
4575 *** The old `open-network-stream' now uses `make-network-process'.
4576
4577 *** New functions `process-datagram-address', `set-process-datagram-address'.
4578
4579 These functions are used with datagram-based network processes to get
4580 and set the current address of the remote partner.
4581
4582 *** New function `format-network-address'.
4583
4584 This function reformats the Lisp representation of a network address
4585 to a printable string. For example, an IP address A.B.C.D and port
4586 number P is represented as a five element vector [A B C D P], and the
4587 printable string returned for this vector is "A.B.C.D:P". See the doc
4588 string for other formatting options.
4589
4590 *** `process-contact' has an optional KEY argument.
4591
4592 Depending on this argument, you can get the complete list of network
4593 process properties or a specific property. Using :local or :remote as
4594 the KEY, you get the address of the local or remote end-point.
4595
4596 An Inet address is represented as a 5 element vector, where the first
4597 4 elements contain the IP address and the fifth is the port number.
4598
4599 *** New functions `stop-process' and `continue-process'.
4600
4601 These functions stop and restart communication through a network
4602 connection. For a server process, no connections are accepted in the
4603 stopped state. For a client process, no input is received in the
4604 stopped state.
4605
4606 *** New function `network-interface-list'.
4607
4608 This function returns a list of network interface names and their
4609 current network addresses.
4610
4611 *** New function `network-interface-info'.
4612
4613 This function returns the network address, hardware address, current
4614 status, and other information about a specific network interface.
4615
4616 *** Deleting a network process with `delete-process' calls the sentinel.
4617
4618 The status message passed to the sentinel for a deleted network
4619 process is "deleted". The message passed to the sentinel when the
4620 connection is closed by the remote peer has been changed to
4621 "connection broken by remote peer".
4622
4623 ** Using window objects:
4624
4625 +++
4626 *** New function `window-body-height'.
4627
4628 This is like `window-height' but does not count the mode line or the
4629 header line.
4630
4631 +++
4632 *** New function `window-body-height'.
4633
4634 This is like `window-height' but does not count the mode line
4635 or the header line.
4636
4637 +++
4638 *** You can now make a window as short as one line.
4639
4640 A window that is just one line tall does not display either a mode
4641 line or a header line, even if the variables `mode-line-format' and
4642 `header-line-format' call for them. A window that is two lines tall
4643 cannot display both a mode line and a header line at once; if the
4644 variables call for both, only the mode line actually appears.
4645
4646 +++
4647 *** The new function `window-inside-edges' returns the edges of the
4648 actual text portion of the window, not including the scroll bar or
4649 divider line, the fringes, the display margins, the header line and
4650 the mode line.
4651
4652 +++
4653 *** The new functions `window-pixel-edges' and `window-inside-pixel-edges'
4654 return window edges in units of pixels, rather than columns and lines.
4655
4656 +++
4657 *** The new macro `with-selected-window' temporarily switches the
4658 selected window without impacting the order of `buffer-list'.
4659 It saves and restores the current buffer, too.
4660
4661 +++
4662 *** `select-window' takes an optional second argument NORECORD.
4663
4664 This is like `switch-to-buffer'.
4665
4666 +++
4667 *** `save-selected-window' now saves and restores the selected window
4668 of every frame. This way, it restores everything that can be changed
4669 by calling `select-window'. It also saves and restores the current
4670 buffer.
4671
4672 +++
4673 *** `set-window-buffer' has an optional argument KEEP-MARGINS.
4674
4675 If non-nil, that says to preserve the window's current margin, fringe,
4676 and scroll-bar settings.
4677
4678 +++
4679 *** The new function `window-tree' returns a frame's window tree.
4680
4681 +++
4682 *** The functions `get-lru-window' and `get-largest-window' take an optional
4683 argument `dedicated'. If non-nil, those functions do not ignore
4684 dedicated windows.
4685
4686 +++
4687 *** The new function `adjust-window-trailing-edge' moves the right
4688 or bottom edge of a window. It does not move other window edges.
4689
4690 +++
4691 ** Customizable fringe bitmaps
4692
4693 *** New buffer-local variables `fringe-indicator-alist' and
4694 `fringe-cursor-alist' maps between logical (internal) fringe indicator
4695 and cursor symbols and the actual fringe bitmaps to be displayed.
4696 This decouples the logical meaning of the fringe indicators from the
4697 physical appearance, as well as allowing different fringe bitmaps to
4698 be used in different windows showing different buffers.
4699
4700 *** New function `define-fringe-bitmap' can now be used to create new
4701 fringe bitmaps, as well as change the built-in fringe bitmaps.
4702
4703 To change a built-in bitmap, do (require 'fringe) and use the symbol
4704 identifying the bitmap such as `left-truncation' or `continued-line'.
4705
4706 *** New function `destroy-fringe-bitmap' deletes a fringe bitmap
4707 or restores a built-in one to its default value.
4708
4709 *** New function `set-fringe-bitmap-face' specifies the face to be
4710 used for a specific fringe bitmap. The face is automatically merged
4711 with the `fringe' face, so normally, the face should only specify the
4712 foreground color of the bitmap.
4713
4714 *** There are new display properties, `left-fringe' and `right-fringe',
4715 that can be used to show a specific bitmap in the left or right fringe
4716 bitmap of the display line.
4717
4718 Format is `display (left-fringe BITMAP [FACE])', where BITMAP is a
4719 symbol identifying a fringe bitmap, either built-in or defined with
4720 `define-fringe-bitmap', and FACE is an optional face name to be used
4721 for displaying the bitmap instead of the default `fringe' face.
4722 When specified, FACE is automatically merged with the `fringe' face.
4723
4724 *** New function `fringe-bitmaps-at-pos' returns the current fringe
4725 bitmaps in the display line at a given buffer position.
4726
4727 ** Other window fringe features:
4728
4729 +++
4730 *** Controlling the default left and right fringe widths.
4731
4732 The default left and right fringe widths for all windows of a frame
4733 can now be controlled by setting the `left-fringe' and `right-fringe'
4734 frame parameters to an integer value specifying the width in pixels.
4735 Setting the width to 0 effectively removes the corresponding fringe.
4736
4737 The actual default fringe widths for the frame may deviate from the
4738 specified widths, since the combined fringe widths must match an
4739 integral number of columns. The extra width is distributed evenly
4740 between the left and right fringe. To force a specific fringe width,
4741 specify the width as a negative integer (if both widths are negative,
4742 only the left fringe gets the specified width).
4743
4744 Setting the width to nil (the default), restores the default fringe
4745 width which is the minimum number of pixels necessary to display any
4746 of the currently defined fringe bitmaps. The width of the built-in
4747 fringe bitmaps is 8 pixels.
4748
4749 +++
4750 *** Per-window fringe and scrollbar settings
4751
4752 **** Windows can now have their own individual fringe widths and
4753 position settings.
4754
4755 To control the fringe widths of a window, either set the buffer-local
4756 variables `left-fringe-width', `right-fringe-width', or call
4757 `set-window-fringes'.
4758
4759 To control the fringe position in a window, that is, whether fringes
4760 are positioned between the display margins and the window's text area,
4761 or at the edges of the window, either set the buffer-local variable
4762 `fringes-outside-margins' or call `set-window-fringes'.
4763
4764 The function `window-fringes' can be used to obtain the current
4765 settings. To make `left-fringe-width', `right-fringe-width', and
4766 `fringes-outside-margins' take effect, you must set them before
4767 displaying the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force
4768 an update of the display margins.
4769
4770 **** Windows can now have their own individual scroll-bar settings
4771 controlling the width and position of scroll-bars.
4772
4773 To control the scroll-bar of a window, either set the buffer-local
4774 variables `scroll-bar-mode' and `scroll-bar-width', or call
4775 `set-window-scroll-bars'. The function `window-scroll-bars' can be
4776 used to obtain the current settings. To make `scroll-bar-mode' and
4777 `scroll-bar-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
4778 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
4779 of the display margins.
4780
4781 ** Redisplay features:
4782
4783 +++
4784 *** `sit-for' can now be called with args (SECONDS &optional NODISP).
4785
4786 +++
4787 *** New function `force-window-update' can initiate a full redisplay of
4788 one or all windows. Normally, this is not needed as changes in window
4789 contents are detected automatically. However, certain implicit
4790 changes to mode lines, header lines, or display properties may require
4791 forcing an explicit window update.
4792
4793 +++
4794 *** (char-displayable-p CHAR) returns non-nil if Emacs ought to be able
4795 to display CHAR. More precisely, if the selected frame's fontset has
4796 a font to display the character set that CHAR belongs to.
4797
4798 Fontsets can specify a font on a per-character basis; when the fontset
4799 does that, this value cannot be accurate.
4800
4801 +++
4802 *** You can define multiple overlay arrows via the new
4803 variable `overlay-arrow-variable-list'.
4804
4805 It contains a list of variables which contain overlay arrow position
4806 markers, including the original `overlay-arrow-position' variable.
4807
4808 Each variable on this list can have individual `overlay-arrow-string'
4809 and `overlay-arrow-bitmap' properties that specify an overlay arrow
4810 string (for non-window terminals) or fringe bitmap (for window
4811 systems) to display at the corresponding overlay arrow position.
4812 If either property is not set, the default `overlay-arrow-string' or
4813 'overlay-arrow-fringe-bitmap' will be used.
4814
4815 +++
4816 *** New `line-height' and `line-spacing' properties for newline characters
4817
4818 A newline can now have `line-height' and `line-spacing' text or overlay
4819 properties that control the height of the corresponding display row.
4820
4821 If the `line-height' property value is t, the newline does not
4822 contribute to the height of the display row; instead the height of the
4823 newline glyph is reduced. Also, a `line-spacing' property on this
4824 newline is ignored. This can be used to tile small images or image
4825 slices without adding blank areas between the images.
4826
4827 If the `line-height' property value is a positive integer, the value
4828 specifies the minimum line height in pixels. If necessary, the line
4829 height it increased by increasing the line's ascent.
4830
4831 If the `line-height' property value is a float, the minimum line
4832 height is calculated by multiplying the default frame line height by
4833 the given value.
4834
4835 If the `line-height' property value is a cons (FACE . RATIO), the
4836 minimum line height is calculated as RATIO * height of named FACE.
4837 RATIO is int or float. If FACE is t, it specifies the current face.
4838
4839 If the `line-height' property value is a cons (nil . RATIO), the line
4840 height is calculated as RATIO * actual height of the line's contents.
4841
4842 If the `line-height' value is a cons (HEIGHT . TOTAL), HEIGHT specifies
4843 the line height as described above, while TOTAL is any of the forms
4844 described above and specifies the total height of the line, causing a
4845 varying number of pixels to be inserted after the line to make it line
4846 exactly that many pixels high.
4847
4848 If the `line-spacing' property value is an positive integer, the value
4849 is used as additional pixels to insert after the display line; this
4850 overrides the default frame `line-spacing' and any buffer local value of
4851 the `line-spacing' variable.
4852
4853 If the `line-spacing' property is a float or cons, the line spacing
4854 is calculated as specified above for the `line-height' property.
4855
4856 +++
4857 *** The buffer local `line-spacing' variable can now have a float value,
4858 which is used as a height relative to the default frame line height.
4859
4860 +++
4861 *** Enhancements to stretch display properties
4862
4863 The display property stretch specification form `(space PROPS)', where
4864 PROPS is a property list, now allows pixel based width and height
4865 specifications, as well as enhanced horizontal text alignment.
4866
4867 The value of these properties can now be a (primitive) expression
4868 which is evaluated during redisplay. The following expressions
4869 are supported:
4870
4871 EXPR ::= NUM | (NUM) | UNIT | ELEM | POS | IMAGE | FORM
4872 NUM ::= INTEGER | FLOAT | SYMBOL
4873 UNIT ::= in | mm | cm | width | height
4874 ELEM ::= left-fringe | right-fringe | left-margin | right-margin
4875 | scroll-bar | text
4876 POS ::= left | center | right
4877 FORM ::= (NUM . EXPR) | (OP EXPR ...)
4878 OP ::= + | -
4879
4880 The form `NUM' specifies a fractional width or height of the default
4881 frame font size. The form `(NUM)' specifies an absolute number of
4882 pixels. If a symbol is specified, its buffer-local variable binding
4883 is used. The `in', `mm', and `cm' units specifies the number of
4884 pixels per inch, milli-meter, and centi-meter, resp. The `width' and
4885 `height' units correspond to the width and height of the current face
4886 font. An image specification corresponds to the width or height of
4887 the image.
4888
4889 The `left-fringe', `right-fringe', `left-margin', `right-margin',
4890 `scroll-bar', and `text' elements specify to the width of the
4891 corresponding area of the window.
4892
4893 The `left', `center', and `right' positions can be used with :align-to
4894 to specify a position relative to the left edge, center, or right edge
4895 of the text area. One of the above window elements (except `text')
4896 can also be used with :align-to to specify that the position is
4897 relative to the left edge of the given area. Once the base offset for
4898 a relative position has been set (by the first occurrence of one of
4899 these symbols), further occurrences of these symbols are interpreted as
4900 the width of the area.
4901
4902 For example, to align to the center of the left-margin, use
4903 :align-to (+ left-margin (0.5 . left-margin))
4904
4905 If no specific base offset is set for alignment, it is always relative
4906 to the left edge of the text area. For example, :align-to 0 in a
4907 header line aligns with the first text column in the text area.
4908
4909 The value of the form `(NUM . EXPR)' is the value of NUM multiplied by
4910 the value of the expression EXPR. For example, (2 . in) specifies a
4911 width of 2 inches, while (0.5 . IMAGE) specifies half the width (or
4912 height) of the specified image.
4913
4914 The form `(+ EXPR ...)' adds up the value of the expressions.
4915 The form `(- EXPR ...)' negates or subtracts the value of the expressions.
4916
4917 +++
4918 *** Normally, the cursor is displayed at the end of any overlay and
4919 text property string that may be present at the current window
4920 position. The cursor can now be placed on any character of such
4921 strings by giving that character a non-nil `cursor' text property.
4922
4923 +++
4924 *** The display space :width and :align-to text properties are now
4925 supported on text terminals.
4926
4927 +++
4928 *** Support for displaying image slices
4929
4930 **** New display property (slice X Y WIDTH HEIGHT) can be used with
4931 an image property to display only a specific slice of the image.
4932
4933 **** Function `insert-image' has new optional fourth arg to
4934 specify image slice (X Y WIDTH HEIGHT).
4935
4936 **** New function `insert-sliced-image' inserts a given image as a
4937 specified number of evenly sized slices (rows x columns).
4938
4939 +++
4940 *** Images can now have an associated image map via the :map property.
4941
4942 An image map is an alist where each element has the format (AREA ID PLIST).
4943 An AREA is specified as either a rectangle, a circle, or a polygon:
4944 A rectangle is a cons (rect . ((X0 . Y0) . (X1 . Y1))) specifying the
4945 pixel coordinates of the upper left and bottom right corners.
4946 A circle is a cons (circle . ((X0 . Y0) . R)) specifying the center
4947 and the radius of the circle; R can be a float or integer.
4948 A polygon is a cons (poly . [X0 Y0 X1 Y1 ...]) where each pair in the
4949 vector describes one corner in the polygon.
4950
4951 When the mouse pointer is above a hot-spot area of an image, the
4952 PLIST of that hot-spot is consulted; if it contains a `help-echo'
4953 property it defines a tool-tip for the hot-spot, and if it contains
4954 a `pointer' property, it defines the shape of the mouse cursor when
4955 it is over the hot-spot. See the variable `void-area-text-pointer'
4956 for possible pointer shapes.
4957
4958 When you click the mouse when the mouse pointer is over a hot-spot,
4959 an event is composed by combining the ID of the hot-spot with the
4960 mouse event, e.g. [area4 mouse-1] if the hot-spot's ID is `area4'.
4961
4962 +++
4963 *** The function `find-image' now searches in etc/images/ and etc/.
4964 The new variable `image-load-path' is a list of locations in which to
4965 search for image files. The default is to search in etc/images, then
4966 in etc/, and finally in the directories specified by `load-path'.
4967 Subdirectories of etc/ and etc/images are not recursively searched; if
4968 you put an image file in a subdirectory, you have to specify it
4969 explicitly; for example, if an image is put in etc/images/foo/bar.xpm:
4970
4971 (defimage foo-image '((:type xpm :file "foo/bar.xpm")))
4972
4973 Note that all images formerly located in the lisp directory have been
4974 moved to etc/images.
4975
4976 +++
4977 *** New function `image-load-path-for-library' returns a suitable
4978 search path for images relative to library. This function is useful in
4979 external packages to save users from having to update
4980 `image-load-path'.
4981
4982 +++
4983 *** The new variable `max-image-size' defines the maximum size of
4984 images that Emacs will load and display.
4985
4986 ** Mouse pointer features:
4987
4988 +++ (lispref)
4989 ??? (man)
4990 *** The mouse pointer shape in void text areas (i.e. after the end of a
4991 line or below the last line in the buffer) of the text window is now
4992 controlled by the new variable `void-text-area-pointer'. The default
4993 is to use the `arrow' (non-text) pointer. Other choices are `text'
4994 (or nil), `hand', `vdrag', `hdrag', `modeline', and `hourglass'.
4995
4996 +++
4997 *** The mouse pointer shape over an image can now be controlled by the
4998 :pointer image property.
4999
5000 +++
5001 *** The mouse pointer shape over ordinary text or images can now be
5002 controlled/overridden via the `pointer' text property.
5003
5004 ** Mouse event enhancements:
5005
5006 +++
5007 *** Mouse events for clicks on window fringes now specify `left-fringe'
5008 or `right-fringe' as the area.
5009
5010 +++
5011 *** All mouse events now include a buffer position regardless of where
5012 you clicked. For mouse clicks in window margins and fringes, this is
5013 a sensible buffer position corresponding to the surrounding text.
5014
5015 +++
5016 *** `posn-point' now returns buffer position for non-text area events.
5017
5018 +++
5019 *** Function `mouse-set-point' now works for events outside text area.
5020
5021 +++
5022 *** New function `posn-area' returns window area clicked on (nil means
5023 text area).
5024
5025 +++
5026 *** Mouse events include actual glyph column and row for all event types
5027 and all areas.
5028
5029 +++
5030 *** New function `posn-actual-col-row' returns the actual glyph coordinates
5031 of the mouse event position.
5032
5033 +++
5034 *** Mouse events can now indicate an image object clicked on.
5035
5036 +++
5037 *** Mouse events include relative X and Y pixel coordinates relative to
5038 the top left corner of the object (image or character) clicked on.
5039
5040 +++
5041 *** Mouse events include the pixel width and height of the object
5042 (image or character) clicked on.
5043
5044 +++
5045 *** New functions 'posn-object', 'posn-object-x-y', 'posn-object-width-height'.
5046
5047 These return the image or string object of a mouse click, the X and Y
5048 pixel coordinates relative to the top left corner of that object, and
5049 the total width and height of that object.
5050
5051 ** Text property and overlay changes:
5052
5053 +++
5054 *** Arguments for `remove-overlays' are now optional, so that you can
5055 remove all overlays in the buffer with just (remove-overlays).
5056
5057 +++
5058 *** New variable `char-property-alias-alist'.
5059
5060 This variable allows you to create alternative names for text
5061 properties. It works at the same level as `default-text-properties',
5062 although it applies to overlays as well. This variable was introduced
5063 to implement the `font-lock-face' property.
5064
5065 +++
5066 *** New function `get-char-property-and-overlay' accepts the same
5067 arguments as `get-char-property' and returns a cons whose car is the
5068 return value of `get-char-property' called with those arguments and
5069 whose cdr is the overlay in which the property was found, or nil if
5070 it was found as a text property or not found at all.
5071
5072 +++
5073 *** The new function `remove-list-of-text-properties'.
5074
5075 It is like `remove-text-properties' except that it takes a list of
5076 property names as argument rather than a property list.
5077
5078 ** Face changes
5079
5080 +++
5081 *** The new face attribute condition `min-colors' can be used to tailor
5082 the face color to the number of colors supported by a display, and
5083 define the foreground and background colors accordingly so that they
5084 look best on a terminal that supports at least this many colors. This
5085 is now the preferred method for defining default faces in a way that
5086 makes a good use of the capabilities of the display.
5087
5088 +++
5089 *** New function `display-supports-face-attributes-p' can be used to test
5090 whether a given set of face attributes is actually displayable.
5091
5092 A new predicate `supports' has also been added to the `defface' face
5093 specification language, which can be used to do this test for faces
5094 defined with `defface'.
5095
5096 ---
5097 *** The special treatment of faces whose names are of the form `fg:COLOR'
5098 or `bg:COLOR' has been removed. Lisp programs should use the
5099 `defface' facility for defining faces with specific colors, or use
5100 the feature of specifying the face attributes :foreground and :background
5101 directly in the `face' property instead of using a named face.
5102
5103 +++
5104 *** The first face specification element in a defface can specify
5105 `default' instead of frame classification. Then its attributes act as
5106 defaults that apply to all the subsequent cases (and can be overridden
5107 by them).
5108
5109 +++
5110 *** The variable `face-font-rescale-alist' specifies how much larger
5111 (or smaller) font we should use. For instance, if the value is
5112 '((SOME-FONTNAME-PATTERN . 1.3)) and a face requests a font of 10
5113 point, we actually use a font of 13 point if the font matches
5114 SOME-FONTNAME-PATTERN.
5115
5116 ---
5117 *** The function `face-differs-from-default-p' now truly checks
5118 whether the given face displays differently from the default face or
5119 not (previously it did only a very cursory check).
5120
5121 +++
5122 *** `face-attribute', `face-foreground', `face-background', `face-stipple'.
5123
5124 These now accept a new optional argument, INHERIT, which controls how
5125 face inheritance is used when determining the value of a face
5126 attribute.
5127
5128 +++
5129 *** New functions `face-attribute-relative-p' and `merge-face-attribute'
5130 help with handling relative face attributes.
5131
5132 +++
5133 *** The priority of faces in an :inherit attribute face list is reversed.
5134
5135 If a face contains an :inherit attribute with a list of faces, earlier
5136 faces in the list override later faces in the list; in previous
5137 releases of Emacs, the order was the opposite. This change was made
5138 so that :inherit face lists operate identically to face lists in text
5139 `face' properties.
5140
5141 ---
5142 *** On terminals, faces with the :inverse-video attribute are displayed
5143 with swapped foreground and background colors even when one of them is
5144 not specified. In previous releases of Emacs, if either foreground
5145 or background color was unspecified, colors were not swapped. This
5146 was inconsistent with the face behavior under X.
5147
5148 ---
5149 *** `set-fontset-font', `fontset-info', `fontset-font' now operate on
5150 the default fontset if the argument NAME is nil..
5151
5152 ** Font-Lock changes:
5153
5154 +++
5155 *** New special text property `font-lock-face'.
5156
5157 This property acts like the `face' property, but it is controlled by
5158 M-x font-lock-mode. It is not, strictly speaking, a builtin text
5159 property. Instead, it is implemented inside font-core.el, using the
5160 new variable `char-property-alias-alist'.
5161
5162 +++
5163 *** font-lock can manage arbitrary text-properties beside `face'.
5164
5165 **** the FACENAME returned in `font-lock-keywords' can be a list of the
5166 form (face FACE PROP1 VAL1 PROP2 VAL2 ...) so you can set other
5167 properties than `face'.
5168
5169 **** `font-lock-extra-managed-props' can be set to make sure those
5170 extra properties are automatically cleaned up by font-lock.
5171
5172 ---
5173 *** jit-lock obeys a new text-property `jit-lock-defer-multiline'.
5174
5175 If a piece of text with that property gets contextually refontified
5176 (see `jit-lock-defer-contextually'), then all of that text will
5177 be refontified. This is useful when the syntax of a textual element
5178 depends on text several lines further down (and when `font-lock-multiline'
5179 is not appropriate to solve that problem). For example in Perl:
5180
5181 s{
5182 foo
5183 }{
5184 bar
5185 }e
5186
5187 Adding/removing the last `e' changes the `bar' from being a piece of
5188 text to being a piece of code, so you'd put a `jit-lock-defer-multiline'
5189 property over the second half of the command to force (deferred)
5190 refontification of `bar' whenever the `e' is added/removed.
5191
5192 ** Major mode mechanism changes:
5193
5194 +++
5195 *** `set-auto-mode' now gives the interpreter magic line (if present)
5196 precedence over the file name. Likewise an `<?xml' or `<!DOCTYPE'
5197 declaration will give the buffer XML or SGML mode, based on the new
5198 variable `magic-mode-alist'.
5199
5200 +++
5201 *** Use the new function `run-mode-hooks' to run the major mode's mode hook.
5202
5203 +++
5204 *** All major mode functions should now run the new normal hook
5205 `after-change-major-mode-hook', at their very end, after the mode
5206 hooks. `run-mode-hooks' does this automatically.
5207
5208 ---
5209 *** If a major mode function has a non-nil `no-clone-indirect'
5210 property, `clone-indirect-buffer' signals an error if you use
5211 it in that buffer.
5212
5213 +++
5214 *** Major modes can define `eldoc-documentation-function'
5215 locally to provide Eldoc functionality by some method appropriate to
5216 the language.
5217
5218 +++
5219 *** `define-derived-mode' by default creates a new empty abbrev table.
5220 It does not copy abbrevs from the parent mode's abbrev table.
5221
5222 +++
5223 *** The new function `run-mode-hooks' and the new macro `delay-mode-hooks'
5224 are used by `define-derived-mode' to make sure the mode hook for the
5225 parent mode is run at the end of the child mode.
5226
5227 ** Minor mode changes:
5228
5229 +++
5230 *** `define-minor-mode' now accepts arbitrary additional keyword arguments
5231 and simply passes them to `defcustom', if applicable.
5232
5233 +++
5234 *** `minor-mode-list' now holds a list of minor mode commands.
5235
5236 +++
5237 *** `define-global-minor-mode'.
5238
5239 This is a new name for what was formerly called
5240 `easy-mmode-define-global-mode'. The old name remains as an alias.
5241
5242 ** Command loop changes:
5243
5244 +++
5245 *** The new function `called-interactively-p' does what many people
5246 have mistakenly believed `interactive-p' to do: it returns t if the
5247 calling function was called through `call-interactively'.
5248
5249 Only use this when you cannot solve the problem by adding a new
5250 INTERACTIVE argument to the command.
5251
5252 +++
5253 *** The function `commandp' takes an additional optional argument.
5254
5255 If it is non-nil, then `commandp' checks for a function that could be
5256 called with `call-interactively', and does not return t for keyboard
5257 macros.
5258
5259 +++
5260 *** When a command returns, the command loop moves point out from
5261 within invisible text, in the same way it moves out from within text
5262 covered by an image or composition property.
5263
5264 This makes it generally unnecessary to mark invisible text as intangible.
5265 This is particularly good because the intangible property often has
5266 unexpected side-effects since the property applies to everything
5267 (including `goto-char', ...) whereas this new code is only run after
5268 `post-command-hook' and thus does not care about intermediate states.
5269
5270 +++
5271 *** If a command sets `transient-mark-mode' to `only', that
5272 enables Transient Mark mode for the following command only.
5273 During that following command, the value of `transient-mark-mode'
5274 is `identity'. If it is still `identity' at the end of the command,
5275 the next return to the command loop changes to nil.
5276
5277 +++
5278 *** Both the variable and the function `disabled-command-hook' have
5279 been renamed to `disabled-command-function'. The variable
5280 `disabled-command-hook' has been kept as an obsolete alias.
5281
5282 +++
5283 *** `emacsserver' now runs `pre-command-hook' and `post-command-hook'
5284 when it receives a request from emacsclient.
5285
5286 ** Lisp file loading changes:
5287
5288 +++
5289 *** `load-history' can now have elements of the form (t . FUNNAME),
5290 which means FUNNAME was previously defined as an autoload (before the
5291 current file redefined it).
5292
5293 +++
5294 *** `load-history' now records (defun . FUNNAME) when a function is
5295 defined. For a variable, it records just the variable name.
5296
5297 +++
5298 *** The function `symbol-file' can now search specifically for function,
5299 variable or face definitions.
5300
5301 +++
5302 *** `provide' and `featurep' now accept an optional second argument
5303 to test/provide subfeatures. Also `provide' now checks `after-load-alist'
5304 and runs any code associated with the provided feature.
5305
5306 ---
5307 *** The variable `recursive-load-depth-limit' has been deleted.
5308 Emacs now signals an error if the same file is loaded with more
5309 than 3 levels of nesting.
5310
5311 +++
5312 ** Byte compiler changes:
5313
5314 *** The byte compiler now displays the actual line and character
5315 position of errors, where possible. Additionally, the form of its
5316 warning and error messages have been brought into line with GNU standards
5317 for these. As a result, you can use next-error and friends on the
5318 compilation output buffer.
5319
5320 *** The new macro `with-no-warnings' suppresses all compiler warnings
5321 inside its body. In terms of execution, it is equivalent to `progn'.
5322
5323 *** You can avoid warnings for possibly-undefined symbols with a
5324 simple convention that the compiler understands. (This is mostly
5325 useful in code meant to be portable to different Emacs versions.)
5326 Write forms like the following, or code that macroexpands into such
5327 forms:
5328
5329 (if (fboundp 'foo) <then> <else>)
5330 (if (boundp 'foo) <then> <else)
5331
5332 In the first case, using `foo' as a function inside the <then> form
5333 won't produce a warning if it's not defined as a function, and in the
5334 second case, using `foo' as a variable won't produce a warning if it's
5335 unbound. The test must be in exactly one of the above forms (after
5336 macro expansion), but such tests can be nested. Note that `when' and
5337 `unless' expand to `if', but `cond' doesn't.
5338
5339 *** `(featurep 'xemacs)' is treated by the compiler as nil. This
5340 helps to avoid noisy compiler warnings in code meant to run under both
5341 Emacs and XEmacs and can sometimes make the result significantly more
5342 efficient. Since byte code from recent versions of XEmacs won't
5343 generally run in Emacs and vice versa, this optimization doesn't lose
5344 you anything.
5345
5346 *** The local variable `no-byte-compile' in Lisp files is now obeyed.
5347
5348 ---
5349 *** When a Lisp file uses CL functions at run-time, compiling the file
5350 now issues warnings about these calls, unless the file performs
5351 (require 'cl) when loaded.
5352
5353 ** Frame operations:
5354
5355 +++
5356 *** New functions `frame-current-scroll-bars' and `window-current-scroll-bars'.
5357
5358 These functions return the current locations of the vertical and
5359 horizontal scroll bars in a frame or window.
5360
5361 +++
5362 *** The new function `modify-all-frames-parameters' modifies parameters
5363 for all (existing and future) frames.
5364
5365 +++
5366 *** The new frame parameter `tty-color-mode' specifies the mode to use
5367 for color support on character terminal frames. Its value can be a
5368 number of colors to support, or a symbol. See the Emacs Lisp
5369 Reference manual for more detailed documentation.
5370
5371 +++
5372 *** When using non-toolkit scroll bars with the default width,
5373 the `scroll-bar-width' frame parameter value is nil.
5374
5375 ** Mule changes:
5376
5377 +++
5378 *** Already true in Emacs 21.1, but not emphasized clearly enough:
5379
5380 Multibyte buffers can now faithfully record all 256 character codes
5381 from 0 to 255. As a result, most of the past reasons to use unibyte
5382 buffers no longer exist. We only know of three reasons to use them
5383 now:
5384
5385 1. If you prefer to use unibyte text all of the time.
5386
5387 2. For reading files into temporary buffers, when you want to avoid
5388 the time it takes to convert the format.
5389
5390 3. For binary files where format conversion would be pointless and
5391 wasteful.
5392
5393 ---
5394 *** `set-buffer-file-coding-system' now takes an additional argument,
5395 NOMODIFY. If it is non-nil, it means don't mark the buffer modified.
5396
5397 +++
5398 *** The new variable `auto-coding-functions' lets you specify functions
5399 to examine a file being visited and deduce the proper coding system
5400 for it. (If the coding system is detected incorrectly for a specific
5401 file, you can put a `coding:' tags to override it.)
5402
5403 ---
5404 *** The new function `merge-coding-systems' fills in unspecified aspects
5405 of one coding system from another coding system.
5406
5407 ---
5408 *** New coding system property `mime-text-unsuitable' indicates that
5409 the coding system's `mime-charset' is not suitable for MIME text
5410 parts, e.g. utf-16.
5411
5412 +++
5413 *** New function `decode-coding-inserted-region' decodes a region as if
5414 it is read from a file without decoding.
5415
5416 ---
5417 *** New CCL functions `lookup-character' and `lookup-integer' access
5418 hash tables defined by the Lisp function `define-translation-hash-table'.
5419
5420 ---
5421 *** New function `quail-find-key' returns a list of keys to type in the
5422 current input method to input a character.
5423
5424 ** Mode line changes:
5425
5426 +++
5427 *** New function `format-mode-line'.
5428
5429 This returns the mode line or header line of the selected (or a
5430 specified) window as a string with or without text properties.
5431
5432 +++
5433 *** The new mode-line construct `(:propertize ELT PROPS...)' can be
5434 used to add text properties to mode-line elements.
5435
5436 +++
5437 *** The new `%i' and `%I' constructs for `mode-line-format' can be used
5438 to display the size of the accessible part of the buffer on the mode
5439 line.
5440
5441 +++
5442 *** Mouse-face on mode-line (and header-line) is now supported.
5443
5444 ** Menu manipulation changes:
5445
5446 ---
5447 *** To manipulate the File menu using easy-menu, you must specify the
5448 proper name "file". In previous Emacs versions, you had to specify
5449 "files", even though the menu item itself was changed to say "File"
5450 several versions ago.
5451
5452 ---
5453 *** The dummy function keys made by easy-menu are now always lower case.
5454 If you specify the menu item name "Ada", for instance, it uses `ada'
5455 as the "key" bound by that key binding.
5456
5457 This is relevant only if Lisp code looks for the bindings that were
5458 made with easy-menu.
5459
5460 ---
5461 *** `easy-menu-define' now allows you to use nil for the symbol name
5462 if you don't need to give the menu a name. If you install the menu
5463 into other keymaps right away (MAPS is non-nil), it usually doesn't
5464 need to have a name.
5465
5466 ** Operating system access:
5467
5468 +++
5469 *** The new primitive `get-internal-run-time' returns the processor
5470 run time used by Emacs since start-up.
5471
5472 +++
5473 *** Functions `user-uid' and `user-real-uid' now return floats if the
5474 user UID doesn't fit in a Lisp integer. Function `user-full-name'
5475 accepts a float as UID parameter.
5476
5477 +++
5478 *** New function `locale-info' accesses locale information.
5479
5480 ---
5481 *** On MS Windows, locale-coding-system is used to interact with the OS.
5482 The Windows specific variable w32-system-coding-system, which was
5483 formerly used for that purpose is now an alias for locale-coding-system.
5484
5485 ---
5486 *** New function `redirect-debugging-output' can be used to redirect
5487 debugging output on the stderr file handle to a file.
5488
5489 ** Miscellaneous:
5490
5491 +++
5492 *** A number of hooks have been renamed to better follow the conventions:
5493
5494 `find-file-hooks' to `find-file-hook',
5495 `find-file-not-found-hooks' to `find-file-not-found-functions',
5496 `write-file-hooks' to `write-file-functions',
5497 `write-contents-hooks' to `write-contents-functions',
5498 `x-lost-selection-hooks' to `x-lost-selection-functions',
5499 `x-sent-selection-hooks' to `x-sent-selection-functions',
5500 `delete-frame-hook' to `delete-frame-functions'.
5501
5502 In each case the old name remains as an alias for the moment.
5503
5504 +++
5505 *** Variable `local-write-file-hooks' is marked obsolete.
5506
5507 Use the LOCAL arg of `add-hook'.
5508
5509 ---
5510 *** New function `x-send-client-message' sends a client message when
5511 running under X.
5512
5513 ** GC changes:
5514
5515 +++
5516 *** New variable `gc-cons-percentage' automatically grows the GC cons threshold
5517 as the heap size increases.
5518
5519 +++
5520 *** New variables `gc-elapsed' and `gcs-done' provide extra information
5521 on garbage collection.
5522
5523 +++
5524 *** The normal hook `post-gc-hook' is run at the end of garbage collection.
5525
5526 The hook is run with GC inhibited, so use it with care.
5527 \f
5528 * New Packages for Lisp Programming in Emacs 22.1
5529
5530 +++
5531 ** The new library button.el implements simple and fast `clickable
5532 buttons' in emacs buffers. Buttons are much lighter-weight than the
5533 `widgets' implemented by widget.el, and can be used by lisp code that
5534 doesn't require the full power of widgets. Emacs uses buttons for
5535 such things as help and apropos buffers.
5536
5537 ---
5538 ** The new library tree-widget.el provides a widget to display a set
5539 of hierarchical data as an outline. For example, the tree-widget is
5540 well suited to display a hierarchy of directories and files.
5541
5542 +++
5543 ** The new library bindat.el provides functions to unpack and pack
5544 binary data structures, such as network packets, to and from Lisp
5545 data structures.
5546
5547 ---
5548 ** master-mode.el implements a minor mode for scrolling a slave
5549 buffer without leaving your current buffer, the master buffer.
5550
5551 It can be used by sql.el, for example: the SQL buffer is the master
5552 and its SQLi buffer is the slave. This allows you to scroll the SQLi
5553 buffer containing the output from the SQL buffer containing the
5554 commands.
5555
5556 This is how to use sql.el and master.el together: the variable
5557 sql-buffer contains the slave buffer. It is a local variable in the
5558 SQL buffer.
5559
5560 (add-hook 'sql-mode-hook
5561 (function (lambda ()
5562 (master-mode t)
5563 (master-set-slave sql-buffer))))
5564 (add-hook 'sql-set-sqli-hook
5565 (function (lambda ()
5566 (master-set-slave sql-buffer))))
5567
5568 +++
5569 ** The new library benchmark.el does timing measurements on Lisp code.
5570
5571 This includes measuring garbage collection time.
5572
5573 +++
5574 ** The new library testcover.el does test coverage checking.
5575
5576 This is so you can tell whether you've tested all paths in your Lisp
5577 code. It works with edebug.
5578
5579 The function `testcover-start' instruments all functions in a given
5580 file. Then test your code. The function `testcover-mark-all' adds
5581 overlay "splotches" to the Lisp file's buffer to show where coverage
5582 is lacking. The command `testcover-next-mark' (bind it to a key!)
5583 will move point forward to the next spot that has a splotch.
5584
5585 Normally, a red splotch indicates the form was never completely
5586 evaluated; a brown splotch means it always evaluated to the same
5587 value. The red splotches are skipped for forms that can't possibly
5588 complete their evaluation, such as `error'. The brown splotches are
5589 skipped for forms that are expected to always evaluate to the same
5590 value, such as (setq x 14).
5591
5592 For difficult cases, you can add do-nothing macros to your code to
5593 help out the test coverage tool. The macro `noreturn' suppresses a
5594 red splotch. It is an error if the argument to `noreturn' does
5595 return. The macro `1value' suppresses a brown splotch for its argument.
5596 This macro is a no-op except during test-coverage -- then it signals
5597 an error if the argument actually returns differing values.
5598 \f
5599 * Installation changes in Emacs 21.3
5600
5601 ** Support for GNU/Linux on little-endian MIPS and on IBM S390 has
5602 been added.
5603
5604 \f
5605 * Changes in Emacs 21.3
5606
5607 ** The obsolete C mode (c-mode.el) has been removed to avoid problems
5608 with Custom.
5609
5610 ** UTF-16 coding systems are available, encoding the same characters
5611 as mule-utf-8.
5612
5613 ** There is a new language environment for UTF-8 (set up automatically
5614 in UTF-8 locales).
5615
5616 ** Translation tables are available between equivalent characters in
5617 different Emacs charsets -- for instance `e with acute' coming from the
5618 Latin-1 and Latin-2 charsets. User options `unify-8859-on-encoding-mode'
5619 and `unify-8859-on-decoding-mode' respectively turn on translation
5620 between ISO 8859 character sets (`unification') on encoding
5621 (e.g. writing a file) and decoding (e.g. reading a file). Note that
5622 `unify-8859-on-encoding-mode' is useful and safe, but
5623 `unify-8859-on-decoding-mode' can cause text to change when you read
5624 it and write it out again without edits, so it is not generally advisable.
5625 By default `unify-8859-on-encoding-mode' is turned on.
5626
5627 ** In Emacs running on the X window system, the default value of
5628 `selection-coding-system' is now `compound-text-with-extensions'.
5629
5630 If you want the old behavior, set selection-coding-system to
5631 compound-text, which may be significantly more efficient. Using
5632 compound-text-with-extensions seems to be necessary only for decoding
5633 text from applications under XFree86 4.2, whose behavior is actually
5634 contrary to the compound text specification.
5635
5636 \f
5637 * Installation changes in Emacs 21.2
5638
5639 ** Support for BSD/OS 5.0 has been added.
5640
5641 ** Support for AIX 5.1 was added.
5642
5643 \f
5644 * Changes in Emacs 21.2
5645
5646 ** Emacs now supports compound-text extended segments in X selections.
5647
5648 X applications can use `extended segments' to encode characters in
5649 compound text that belong to character sets which are not part of the
5650 list of approved standard encodings for X, e.g. Big5. To paste
5651 selections with such characters into Emacs, use the new coding system
5652 compound-text-with-extensions as the value of selection-coding-system.
5653
5654 ** The default values of `tooltip-delay' and `tooltip-hide-delay'
5655 were changed.
5656
5657 ** On terminals whose erase-char is ^H (Backspace), Emacs
5658 now uses normal-erase-is-backspace-mode.
5659
5660 ** When the *scratch* buffer is recreated, its mode is set from
5661 initial-major-mode, which normally is lisp-interaction-mode,
5662 instead of using default-major-mode.
5663
5664 ** The new option `Info-scroll-prefer-subnodes' causes Info to behave
5665 like the stand-alone Info reader (from the GNU Texinfo package) as far
5666 as motion between nodes and their subnodes is concerned. If it is t
5667 (the default), Emacs behaves as before when you type SPC in a menu: it
5668 visits the subnode pointed to by the first menu entry. If this option
5669 is nil, SPC scrolls to the end of the current node, and only then goes
5670 to the first menu item, like the stand-alone reader does.
5671
5672 This change was already in Emacs 21.1, but wasn't advertised in the
5673 NEWS.
5674
5675 \f
5676 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 21.2
5677
5678 ** The meanings of scroll-up-aggressively and scroll-down-aggressively
5679 have been interchanged, so that the former now controls scrolling up,
5680 and the latter now controls scrolling down.
5681
5682 ** The variable `compilation-parse-errors-filename-function' can
5683 be used to transform filenames found in compilation output.
5684
5685 \f
5686 * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
5687
5688 See the INSTALL file for information on installing extra libraries and
5689 fonts to take advantage of the new graphical features and extra
5690 charsets in this release.
5691
5692 ** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
5693
5694 ** Support for LynxOS has been added.
5695
5696 ** There are new configure options associated with the support for
5697 images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
5698 to list them.
5699
5700 ** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
5701 support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
5702 maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
5703 build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
5704 necessary changes to unexec.
5705
5706 ** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
5707 Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
5708
5709 ** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
5710 Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5711
5712 ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
5713 the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
5714
5715 ** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
5716 all of the new display features described below. The port currently
5717 lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the
5718 "Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the
5719 description of aspects specific to the Mac.
5720
5721 ** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
5722 new display features described below.
5723
5724 \f
5725 * Changes in Emacs 21.1
5726
5727 ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
5728
5729 The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
5730 Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
5731 oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
5732 of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
5733 the text.
5734
5735 ** Emacs has a new face implementation.
5736
5737 The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
5738 font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
5739 height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
5740 These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
5741 specify a font.
5742
5743 Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
5744 These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
5745 under Lisp changes, below.
5746
5747 ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
5748
5749 Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
5750 Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
5751 the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
5752 italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
5753 Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
5754 attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
5755 on terminals.
5756
5757 The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
5758 supported on character terminals.
5759
5760 Emacs automatically remaps all X-style color specifications to one of
5761 the colors supported by the terminal. This means you could have the
5762 same color customizations that work both on a windowed display and on
5763 a TTY or when Emacs is invoked with the -nw option.
5764
5765 ** New default font is Courier 12pt under X.
5766
5767 ** Sound support
5768
5769 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
5770 driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
5771 supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
5772 You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' to enable
5773 sound support.
5774
5775 ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
5776
5777 If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
5778 longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
5779 is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
5780 minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
5781
5782 - User option: max-mini-window-height
5783
5784 Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
5785 fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
5786 specifies a number of lines.
5787
5788 Default is 0.25.
5789
5790 - User option: resize-mini-windows
5791
5792 How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
5793 resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
5794 grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
5795 again.
5796
5797 Default is `grow-only'.
5798
5799 ** LessTif support.
5800
5801 Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see
5802 <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will need version 0.92.26, or later.
5803
5804 ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
5805
5806 When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
5807 from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
5808 non-nil.
5809
5810 ** File selection dialog on MS-Windows is supported.
5811
5812 When a file is visited by clicking File->Open, the MS-Windows version
5813 now pops up a standard file selection dialog where you can select a
5814 file to visit. File->Save As also pops up that dialog.
5815
5816 ** Toolkit scroll bars.
5817
5818 Emacs now uses toolkit scroll bars if available. When configured for
5819 LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scroll bar. Otherwise, when
5820 configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
5821 bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
5822 bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
5823 Emacs.
5824
5825 When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
5826 Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
5827 Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
5828 Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
5829 define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
5830 `s/freebsd.h' as an example.
5831
5832 Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
5833 a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
5834 directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
5835 different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
5836 system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
5837 add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
5838
5839 The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
5840 `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
5841 This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
5842 imake configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
5843 Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
5844
5845 ** Tool bar support.
5846
5847 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
5848 of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
5849 changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
5850 displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved
5851 if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome
5852 icons will be used.
5853
5854 To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons
5855 for specific modes (with copyright assignments).
5856
5857 ** Tooltips.
5858
5859 Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
5860 mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can
5861 turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
5862
5863 Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
5864 variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
5865 the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
5866 tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
5867
5868 ** Automatic Hscrolling
5869
5870 Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
5871 `automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
5872 customized.
5873
5874 If a window is scrolled horizontally with set-window-hscroll, or
5875 scroll-left/scroll-right (C-x <, C-x >), this serves as a lower bound
5876 for automatic horizontal scrolling. Automatic scrolling will scroll
5877 the text more to the left if necessary, but won't scroll the text more
5878 to the right than the column set with set-window-hscroll etc.
5879
5880 ** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
5881 of its own. By default, when a window is selected, the cursor is
5882 solid; otherwise, it is hollow. The user-option
5883 `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to display the
5884 cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is shown, if
5885 non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown.
5886
5887 ** Fringes to the left and right of windows are used to display
5888 truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
5889 foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
5890 customizing face `fringe'.
5891
5892 ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default.
5893 You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'.
5894 In particular, setting the `:box' attribute to nil turns off the 3D
5895 appearance of the mode line. (The 3D appearance makes the mode line
5896 occupy more space, and thus might cause the first or the last line of
5897 the window to be partially obscured.)
5898
5899 The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older
5900 versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, is now deprecated.
5901 However, setting it to nil will cause the `mode-line' face to be
5902 ignored, and mode-lines to be drawn using the default text face.
5903
5904 ** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
5905
5906 Different parts of the mode line have been made mouse-sensitive on all
5907 systems which support the mouse. Moving the mouse to a
5908 mouse-sensitive part in the mode line changes the appearance of the
5909 mouse pointer to an arrow, and help about available mouse actions is
5910 displayed either in the echo area, or in the tooltip window if you
5911 have enabled one.
5912
5913 Currently, the following actions have been defined:
5914
5915 - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line goes to the next buffer.
5916
5917 - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name goes to the previous buffer.
5918
5919 - Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
5920 `*') toggles the status.
5921
5922 - Mouse-3 on the major mode name displays a major mode menu.
5923
5924 - Mouse-3 on the mode name displays a minor-mode menu.
5925
5926 ** Hourglass pointer
5927
5928 Emacs can optionally display an hourglass pointer under X. You can
5929 turn the display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
5930
5931 ** Blinking cursor
5932
5933 M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
5934 terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
5935 and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
5936 the group `cursor'.
5937
5938 ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
5939
5940 This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
5941 generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
5942 See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
5943 details.
5944
5945 Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
5946 have to do anything to activate it.
5947
5948 ** The default binding of the Delete key has changed.
5949
5950 The new user-option `normal-erase-is-backspace' can be set to
5951 determine the effect of the Delete and Backspace function keys.
5952
5953 On window systems, the default value of this option is chosen
5954 according to the keyboard used. If the keyboard has both a Backspace
5955 key and a Delete key, and both are mapped to their usual meanings, the
5956 option's default value is set to t, so that Backspace can be used to
5957 delete backward, and Delete can be used to delete forward. On
5958 keyboards which either have only one key (usually labeled DEL), or two
5959 keys DEL and BS which produce the same effect, the option's value is
5960 set to nil, and these keys delete backward.
5961
5962 If not running under a window system, setting this option accomplishes
5963 a similar effect by mapping C-h, which is usually generated by the
5964 Backspace key, to DEL, and by mapping DEL to C-d via
5965 `keyboard-translate'. The former functionality of C-h is available on
5966 the F1 key. You should probably not use this setting on a text-only
5967 terminal if you don't have both Backspace, Delete and F1 keys.
5968
5969 Programmatically, you can call function normal-erase-is-backspace-mode
5970 to toggle the behavior of the Delete and Backspace keys.
5971
5972 ** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been
5973 changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a
5974 buffer by default.
5975
5976 ** The <home> and <end> keys now move to the beginning or end of the
5977 current line, respectively. C-<home> and C-<end> move to the
5978 beginning and end of the buffer.
5979
5980 ** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
5981 recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
5982 signaled.
5983
5984 ** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
5985 file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
5986
5987 ** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
5988 compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
5989 this behavior.
5990
5991 The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs's byte
5992 compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
5993 Emacs dump core.
5994
5995 ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
5996
5997 When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
5998 widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
5999 Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
6000
6001 ** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
6002 more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
6003 now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
6004
6005 ** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
6006 using that menu.
6007
6008 ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
6009
6010 When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
6011 whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
6012 defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
6013 highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
6014 displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
6015 whitespace.
6016
6017 ** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
6018 all frames except the selected one.
6019
6020 ** The new user-option `confirm-kill-emacs' can be customized to
6021 let Emacs ask for confirmation before exiting.
6022
6023 ** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs
6024 header-line (which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window),
6025 so that it remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled.
6026 This behavior may be disabled by customizing the option
6027 `Info-use-header-line'.
6028
6029 ** Polish, Czech, German, and French translations of Emacs' reference card
6030 have been added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex', `cs-refcard.tex',
6031 `de-refcard.tex' and `fr-refcard.tex'. Postscript files are included.
6032
6033 ** An `Emacs Survival Guide', etc/survival.tex, is available.
6034
6035 ** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
6036 `dired-ref.tex'. A French translation is available in
6037 `fr-drdref.tex'.
6038
6039 ** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
6040 displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
6041 menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
6042 menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
6043
6044 ** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable through Customize.
6045
6046 You can no longer use `M-x customize-variable' to customize `load-path'
6047 because it now contains a version-dependent component. You can still
6048 use `add-to-list' and `setq' to customize this variable in your
6049 `~/.emacs' init file or to modify it from any Lisp program in general.
6050
6051 ** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
6052 point in a pop-up window.
6053
6054 ** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
6055 under XFree86. To enable this, use the `mouse-wheel-mode' command, or
6056 customize the variable `mouse-wheel-mode'.
6057
6058 The variables `mouse-wheel-follow-mouse' and `mouse-wheel-scroll-amount'
6059 determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
6060
6061 ** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
6062 sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
6063 (On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
6064 You can customize `auto-save-list-file-prefix' to change this location.
6065
6066 ** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
6067
6068 ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
6069 to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
6070
6071 ** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the
6072 trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add
6073 this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'.
6074
6075 ** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will
6076 be added to the end of the buffer even if `require-final-newline' is
6077 non-nil.
6078
6079 ** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
6080 set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
6081 file that is already visited under a different name.
6082
6083 ** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
6084 nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
6085
6086 ** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
6087 and displays information about that.
6088
6089 ** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
6090 expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
6091
6092 This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
6093 determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
6094 mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
6095 interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
6096 regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
6097 associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
6098
6099 ** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
6100 suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
6101
6102 ** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
6103 buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
6104 contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
6105 by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
6106 insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
6107 the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
6108 Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
6109
6110 ** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
6111 been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
6112
6113 ** The new Custom option `keyboard-coding-system' specifies a coding
6114 system for keyboard input.
6115
6116 ** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
6117 coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
6118 escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
6119 such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
6120 recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
6121 always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
6122 read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
6123 (`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
6124 RET C-x C-f filename RET.
6125
6126 ** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
6127 environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
6128
6129 ** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
6130 displays all characters in that character set.
6131
6132 ** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
6133 coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
6134
6135 ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
6136 and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
6137 LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
6138
6139 ** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
6140 Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
6141 8859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
6142 GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet but recent X releases have
6143 8859-15. See etc/INSTALL for information on obtaining extra fonts.
6144 There are new Leim input methods for Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix (only)
6145 and Polish `slash'.
6146
6147 ** New language environments `Dutch' and `Spanish'.
6148 These new environments mainly select appropriate translations
6149 of the tutorial.
6150
6151 ** In Ethiopic language environment, special key bindings for
6152 function keys are changed as follows. This is to conform to "Emacs
6153 Lisp Coding Convention".
6154
6155 new command old-binding
6156 --- ------- -----------
6157 f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-buffer f5
6158 S-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-region f5
6159 C-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-mail-or-marker f5
6160
6161 f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-buffer unchanged
6162 S-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-region unchanged
6163 C-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-mail-or-marker unchanged
6164
6165 S-f5 ethio-toggle-punctuation f3
6166 S-f6 ethio-modify-vowel f6
6167 S-f7 ethio-replace-space f7
6168 S-f8 ethio-input-special-character f8
6169 S-f9 ethio-replace-space unchanged
6170 C-f9 ethio-toggle-space f2
6171
6172 ** There are new Leim input methods.
6173 New input methods "turkish-postfix", "turkish-alt-postfix",
6174 "greek-mizuochi", "TeX", and "greek-babel" are now part of the Leim
6175 package.
6176
6177 ** The rule of input method "slovak" is slightly changed. Now the
6178 rules for translating "q" and "Q" to "`" (backquote) are deleted, thus
6179 typing them inserts "q" and "Q" respectively. Rules for translating
6180 "=q", "+q", "=Q", and "+Q" to "`" are also deleted. Now, to input
6181 "`", you must type "=q".
6182
6183 ** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
6184 8859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
6185 more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
6186 empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
6187 window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
6188 on.
6189
6190 ** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
6191 on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
6192 defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
6193 commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
6194
6195 ** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
6196 `display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
6197 indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
6198 indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
6199
6200 ** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
6201 on the display using several methods
6202
6203 - By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
6204 a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
6205 be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
6206
6207 - By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
6208 equivalent to specifying the frame parameter.
6209
6210 - By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
6211
6212 - By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
6213 the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
6214
6215 ** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
6216 an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
6217 command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
6218 does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
6219
6220 ** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
6221 `make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
6222 typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
6223
6224 ** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
6225 characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
6226
6227 ** New X resources recognized
6228
6229 *** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
6230 whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
6231 is useful for debugging X problems.
6232
6233 Example:
6234
6235 emacs.synchronous: true
6236
6237 *** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
6238 visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
6239 the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
6240 and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
6241 visual class names are
6242
6243 TrueColor
6244 PseudoColor
6245 DirectColor
6246 StaticColor
6247 GrayScale
6248 StaticGray
6249
6250 Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
6251 `pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
6252 meaning.
6253
6254 The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
6255 supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
6256 `visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
6257 visual.
6258
6259 Example:
6260
6261 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
6262
6263 *** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
6264 specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
6265 default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
6266 resource values are `true' or `on'.
6267
6268 Example:
6269
6270 emacs.privateColormap: true
6271
6272 ** Faces and frame parameters.
6273
6274 There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
6275 Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
6276 `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
6277 `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
6278 sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
6279 for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
6280 parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
6281
6282 Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
6283 `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
6284 `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
6285 `default' face and vice versa.
6286
6287 ** New face `menu'.
6288
6289 The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
6290
6291 ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
6292
6293 The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
6294 colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
6295 correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
6296 the screen gamma of a frame's display.
6297
6298 PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
6299 in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
6300 color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
6301
6302 The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
6303 `ScreenGamma'.
6304
6305 ** Tabs and variable-width text.
6306
6307 Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
6308 defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
6309 independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
6310 Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
6311
6312 ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
6313
6314 *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
6315
6316 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
6317
6318 The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
6319 LessTif/Motif one.
6320
6321 *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
6322 LessTif and Motif.
6323
6324 ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
6325
6326 As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
6327 drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
6328 `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
6329
6330 ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
6331 bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi and Less).
6332
6333 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
6334 `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
6335 variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
6336
6337 ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
6338
6339 When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
6340 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a
6341 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
6342 fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
6343
6344 When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
6345 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggressively' is a
6346 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
6347 fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
6348
6349 ** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
6350 M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
6351 M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
6352 buffers.
6353
6354 ** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
6355
6356 ** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
6357 abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
6358 `directory-abbrev-alist'.
6359
6360 ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
6361 the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
6362 forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
6363 value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
6364 users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
6365 even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
6366
6367 The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
6368
6369 ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
6370 notably at the end of lines.
6371
6372 All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
6373 spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
6374
6375 ** The function `replace-rectangle' is an alias for `string-rectangle'.
6376
6377 ** The new command M-x string-insert-rectangle is like `string-rectangle',
6378 but inserts text instead of replacing it.
6379
6380 ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
6381 query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
6382 after each match to get the replacement text.
6383
6384 ** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
6385 you edit the replacement string.
6386
6387 ** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB'
6388 (if you load the library `mailabbrev'), lets you complete mail aliases
6389 in the text, analogous to lisp-complete-symbol.
6390
6391 ** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
6392
6393 ** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
6394 to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
6395
6396 ** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
6397 the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
6398 MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
6399 displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
6400
6401 --
6402 ** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
6403 read mail from the menu etc.
6404
6405 ** The environment variable `EMACSLOCKDIR' is no longer used on MS-Windows.
6406 This environment variable was used when creating lock files. Emacs on
6407 MS-Windows does not use this variable anymore. This change was made
6408 before Emacs 21.1, but wasn't documented until now.
6409
6410 ** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
6411 MS-DOS version of Emacs.
6412
6413 ** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces the MS-DOS version
6414 of Emacs to behave as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons.
6415 This comes handy with mice that don't report their number of buttons
6416 correctly. One example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons,
6417 but clicks on the middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version
6418 of Emacs.
6419
6420 ** Customize changes
6421
6422 *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
6423 `State' menu to add comments, or give a prefix argument to
6424 M-x customize-set-variable or M-x customize-set-value. Note that
6425 customization comments will cause the customizations to fail in
6426 earlier versions of Emacs.
6427
6428 *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
6429 Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
6430 default).
6431
6432 *** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it
6433 does not allow you to save customizations in your `~/.emacs' init
6434 file. This is because saving customizations from such a session would
6435 wipe out all the other customizationss you might have on your init
6436 file.
6437
6438 ** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it
6439 does not save disabled and enabled commands for future sessions, to
6440 avoid overwriting existing customizations of this kind that are
6441 already in your init file.
6442
6443 ** New features in evaluation commands
6444
6445 *** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
6446 modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
6447 print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the new
6448 customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
6449 eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
6450
6451 The default values for the first two of these variables are 12 and 4
6452 respectively, which means that `eval-expression' now prints at most
6453 the first 12 members of a list and at most 4 nesting levels deep (if
6454 the list is longer or deeper than that, an ellipsis `...' is
6455 printed).
6456
6457 <RET> or <mouse-2> on the printed text toggles between an abbreviated
6458 printed representation and an unabbreviated one.
6459
6460 The default value of eval-expression-debug-on-error is t, so any error
6461 during evaluation produces a backtrace.
6462
6463 *** The function `eval-defun' (C-M-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
6464 code when called with a prefix argument.
6465
6466 ** CC mode changes.
6467
6468 Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
6469 current user setups (although it's believed that these
6470 incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
6471 However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
6472 back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
6473 compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
6474 release.
6475
6476 *** The hardcoded switch to "java" style in Java mode is gone.
6477 CC Mode used to automatically set the style to "java" when Java mode
6478 is entered. This has now been removed since it caused too much
6479 confusion.
6480
6481 However, to keep backward compatibility to a certain extent, the
6482 default value for c-default-style now specifies the "java" style for
6483 java-mode, but "gnu" for all other modes (as before). So you won't
6484 notice the change if you haven't touched that variable.
6485
6486 *** New cleanups, space-before-funcall and compact-empty-funcall.
6487 Two new cleanups have been added to c-cleanup-list:
6488
6489 space-before-funcall causes a space to be inserted before the opening
6490 parenthesis of a function call, which gives the style "foo (bar)".
6491
6492 compact-empty-funcall causes any space before a function call opening
6493 parenthesis to be removed if there are no arguments to the function.
6494 It's typically useful together with space-before-funcall to get the
6495 style "foo (bar)" and "foo()".
6496
6497 *** Some keywords now automatically trigger reindentation.
6498 Keywords like "else", "while", "catch" and "finally" have been made
6499 "electric" to make them reindent automatically when they continue an
6500 earlier statement. An example:
6501
6502 for (i = 0; i < 17; i++)
6503 if (a[i])
6504 res += a[i]->offset;
6505 else
6506
6507 Here, the "else" should be indented like the preceding "if", since it
6508 continues that statement. CC Mode will automatically reindent it after
6509 the "else" has been typed in full, since it's not until then it's
6510 possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a continuation of
6511 the preceding "if".
6512
6513 CC Mode uses Abbrev mode to achieve this, which is therefore turned on
6514 by default.
6515
6516 *** M-a and M-e now moves by sentence in multiline strings.
6517 Previously these two keys only moved by sentence in comments, which
6518 meant that sentence movement didn't work in strings containing
6519 documentation or other natural language text.
6520
6521 The reason it's only activated in multiline strings (i.e. strings that
6522 contain a newline, even when escaped by a '\') is to avoid stopping in
6523 the short strings that often reside inside statements. Multiline
6524 strings almost always contain text in a natural language, as opposed
6525 to other strings that typically contain format specifications,
6526 commands, etc. Also, it's not that bothersome that M-a and M-e misses
6527 sentences in single line strings, since they're short anyway.
6528
6529 *** Support for autodoc comments in Pike mode.
6530 Autodoc comments for Pike are used to extract documentation from the
6531 source, like Javadoc in Java. Pike mode now recognize this markup in
6532 comment prefixes and paragraph starts.
6533
6534 *** The comment prefix regexps on c-comment-prefix may be mode specific.
6535 When c-comment-prefix is an association list, it specifies the comment
6536 line prefix on a per-mode basis, like c-default-style does. This
6537 change came about to support the special autodoc comment prefix in
6538 Pike mode only.
6539
6540 *** Better handling of syntactic errors.
6541 The recovery after unbalanced parens earlier in the buffer has been
6542 improved; CC Mode now reports them by dinging and giving a message
6543 stating the offending line, but still recovers and indent the
6544 following lines in a sane way (most of the time). An "else" with no
6545 matching "if" is handled similarly. If an error is discovered while
6546 indenting a region, the whole region is still indented and the error
6547 is reported afterwards.
6548
6549 *** Lineup functions may now return absolute columns.
6550 A lineup function can give an absolute column to indent the line to by
6551 returning a vector with the desired column as the first element.
6552
6553 *** More robust and warning-free byte compilation.
6554 Although this is strictly not a user visible change (well, depending
6555 on the view of a user), it's still worth mentioning that CC Mode now
6556 can be compiled in the standard ways without causing trouble. Some
6557 code have also been moved between the subpackages to enhance the
6558 modularity somewhat. Thanks to Martin Buchholz for doing the
6559 groundwork.
6560
6561 *** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
6562 This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
6563 of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
6564 non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
6565 want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
6566 have to bother.
6567
6568 Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
6569 situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
6570 and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
6571 If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
6572 the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
6573 by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
6574
6575 *** New initialization procedure for the style system.
6576 When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
6577 variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
6578 take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
6579 is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
6580 settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
6581 possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
6582 Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
6583
6584 By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
6585 special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
6586 the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
6587 of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
6588 above.
6589
6590 Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
6591 when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
6592 function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
6593 call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
6594 then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
6595 values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
6596 only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
6597 function documentation for more info.
6598
6599 The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
6600 especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
6601 with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
6602 intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
6603 such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
6604 is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
6605 configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
6606 global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
6607
6608 (Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
6609
6610 **** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
6611 This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
6612
6613 This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
6614 variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
6615 completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
6616 the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
6617 empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
6618 style system.
6619
6620 **** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
6621 In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
6622 c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
6623 as far as possible.
6624
6625 *** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
6626 CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
6627 surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
6628 chapter about this in the manual.
6629
6630 **** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
6631 The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
6632 recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
6633 primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
6634 adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
6635
6636 **** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
6637 This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
6638 c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
6639
6640 **** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
6641 This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
6642
6643 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
6644 Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
6645 A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
6646 inside CC Mode.
6647
6648 Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
6649 causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
6650 the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
6651 available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
6652 cc-mode/).
6653
6654 **** The variables `c-hanging-comment-starter-p' and
6655 `c-hanging-comment-ender-p', which controlled how comment starters and
6656 enders were filled, are not used anymore. The new version of the
6657 function `c-fill-paragraph' keeps the comment starters and enders as
6658 they were before the filling.
6659
6660 **** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
6661 The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
6662 specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
6663 literals.
6664
6665 **** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
6666 It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
6667 prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
6668 you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
6669 this function.
6670
6671 *** Fixes to IDL mode.
6672 It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
6673 to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
6674 struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
6675 Thanks to Eric Eide.
6676
6677 *** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
6678 It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
6679 opening braces hangs and when they don't.
6680
6681 **** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
6682
6683 *** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
6684 See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
6685 better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
6686 and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
6687
6688 *** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
6689 previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
6690 the column specified by comment-column.
6691
6692 *** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
6693 In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
6694 is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
6695 prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
6696 contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
6697 don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
6698
6699 *** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
6700 instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
6701 arguments.
6702
6703 *** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
6704
6705 *** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
6706 c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
6707 c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
6708 variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
6709 Provan).
6710
6711 *** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
6712
6713 ** Dired changes
6714
6715 *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
6716 command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
6717 is, delete only empty directories.
6718
6719 *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
6720 command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
6721 copy directories recursively.
6722
6723 *** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
6724 in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
6725 the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
6726
6727 *** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
6728 replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
6729 directory.
6730
6731 *** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `y') shows
6732 a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
6733 This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
6734 will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
6735 accurate or inaccurate as it is.
6736
6737 *** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
6738 from ls switches.
6739
6740 *** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
6741 of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
6742 which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
6743 source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
6744
6745 ** Gnus changes.
6746
6747 The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
6748 four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
6749 internationalization and mail-fetching.
6750
6751 *** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
6752 many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
6753
6754 If you used procmail like in
6755
6756 (setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
6757 (setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
6758 (setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
6759 (setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
6760
6761 this now has changed to
6762
6763 (setq mail-sources
6764 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
6765 :suffix ".in")))
6766
6767 More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
6768 Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
6769
6770 *** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
6771 Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
6772 Separate MIME packages like RMIME, mime-compose etc., will probably no
6773 longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
6774
6775 The FLIM/SEMI package still works with Emacs 21, but if you want to
6776 use the native facilities, you must remove any mailcap.el[c] that was
6777 installed by FLIM/SEMI version 1.13 or earlier.
6778
6779 *** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
6780 parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
6781 are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
6782 now just a compatibility layer.
6783
6784 *** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
6785 Gnus facilities.
6786
6787 *** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
6788 called to position point.
6789
6790 *** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
6791 summary buffers and NOV files.
6792
6793 *** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
6794 of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
6795
6796 *** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
6797 subtly different manner.
6798
6799 *** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
6800 and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
6801 ever-changing layouts.
6802
6803 *** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
6804
6805 *** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support.
6806
6807 ** Changes in Texinfo mode.
6808
6809 *** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
6810 macros
6811
6812 Key binding Macro
6813 -------------------------
6814 C-c C-c C-s @strong
6815 C-c C-c C-e @emph
6816 C-c C-c u @uref
6817 C-c C-c q @quotation
6818 C-c C-c m @email
6819 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
6820 M-RET @item
6821
6822 *** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
6823
6824 ** Changes in Outline mode.
6825
6826 There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
6827 `outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
6828 the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
6829
6830 ** Changes to Emacs Server
6831
6832 *** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
6833 with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
6834 are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
6835 Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
6836 buffers to kill, as before.
6837
6838 Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
6839 i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
6840 this way.
6841
6842 ** Both emacsclient and Emacs itself now accept command line options
6843 of the form +LINE:COLUMN in addition to +LINE.
6844
6845 ** Changes to Show Paren mode.
6846
6847 *** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
6848 The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
6849 use. Default is 1000.
6850
6851 ** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
6852 groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
6853
6854 ** Changes to hideshow.el
6855
6856 *** Generalized block selection and traversal
6857
6858 A block is now recognized by its start and end regexps (both strings),
6859 and an integer specifying which sub-expression in the start regexp
6860 serves as the place where a `forward-sexp'-like function can operate.
6861 See the documentation of variable `hs-special-modes-alist'.
6862
6863 *** During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active,
6864 hidden blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' can
6865 be used in the mode line format to show the line at the beginning of
6866 the open block.
6867
6868 *** User option `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' specifies a
6869 function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead of
6870 the normal block-hiding function.
6871
6872 *** The command `hs-show-region' has been removed.
6873
6874 *** The key bindings have changed to fit the Emacs conventions,
6875 roughly imitating those of Outline minor mode. Notably, the prefix
6876 for all bindings is now `C-c @'. For details, see the documentation
6877 for `hs-minor-mode'.
6878
6879 *** The variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' has been removed, and
6880 hideshow.el now always behaves as if this variable were set to t.
6881
6882 ** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
6883
6884 *** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
6885 an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
6886 log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
6887
6888 **** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
6889 current buffer.
6890
6891 *** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
6892 in a log file.
6893
6894 *** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
6895 entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
6896 Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
6897 version number is performed based on regular expressions from
6898 `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be customized.
6899 Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
6900
6901 *** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
6902
6903 ** Changes to cmuscheme
6904
6905 *** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
6906 `cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
6907
6908 ** Changes in Font Lock
6909
6910 *** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
6911 font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
6912
6913 *** Multi-line patterns are now supported. Modes using this, should
6914 set font-lock-multiline to t in their font-lock-defaults.
6915
6916 *** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
6917 the face used for each string/comment.
6918
6919 *** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'.
6920 Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code".
6921
6922 ** Changes to Shell mode
6923
6924 *** The `shell' command now accepts an optional argument to specify the buffer
6925 to use, which defaults to "*shell*". When used interactively, a
6926 non-default buffer may be specified by giving the `shell' command a
6927 prefix argument (causing it to prompt for the buffer name).
6928
6929 ** Comint (subshell) changes
6930
6931 These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
6932 include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
6933
6934 *** Comint now by default interprets some carriage-control characters.
6935 Comint now removes CRs from CR LF sequences, and treats single CRs and
6936 BSs in the output in a way similar to a terminal (by deleting to the
6937 beginning of the line, or deleting the previous character,
6938 respectively). This is achieved by adding `comint-carriage-motion' to
6939 the `comint-output-filter-functions' hook by default.
6940
6941 *** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
6942 to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
6943 parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
6944 user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
6945 this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
6946 respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
6947 feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
6948 `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
6949
6950 *** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
6951 and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
6952
6953 *** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
6954 buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
6955 buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
6956
6957 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
6958 M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
6959 the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
6960
6961 *** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
6962 and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
6963 see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
6964
6965 *** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
6966 saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
6967 argument, it appends to the file.
6968
6969 *** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
6970 (usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
6971 compatibility.
6972
6973 *** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
6974 ring (history).
6975
6976 *** The new variable `comint-input-history-ignore' is a regexp for
6977 identifying history lines that should be ignored, like tcsh time-stamp
6978 strings, starting with a `#'. The default value of this variable is "^#".
6979
6980 ** Changes to Rmail mode
6981
6982 *** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
6983 set to fine tune the identification of the correspondent when
6984 receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
6985 recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
6986 `user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
6987 as correspondent.
6988
6989 Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
6990 mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
6991 regexp matching your mail addresses.
6992
6993 *** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
6994 to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
6995 Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
6996 with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
6997 for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
6998
6999 *** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
7000 like `j'.
7001
7002 *** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
7003 specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
7004 digest message.
7005
7006 *** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
7007 in which folder to put messages automatically.
7008
7009 *** The new function `rmail-redecode-body' allows to fix a message
7010 with non-ASCII characters if Emacs happens to decode it incorrectly
7011 due to missing or malformed "charset=" header.
7012
7013 ** The new user-option `mail-envelope-from' can be used to specify
7014 an envelope-from address different from user-mail-address.
7015
7016 ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
7017 use the -f option when sending mail.
7018
7019 ** The Rmail command `o' (`rmail-output-to-rmail-file') now writes the
7020 current message in the internal `emacs-mule' encoding, rather than in
7021 the encoding taken from the variable `buffer-file-coding-system'.
7022 This allows to save messages whose characters cannot be safely encoded
7023 by the buffer's coding system, and makes sure the message will be
7024 displayed correctly when you later visit the target Rmail file.
7025
7026 If you want your Rmail files be encoded in a specific coding system
7027 other than `emacs-mule', you can customize the variable
7028 `rmail-file-coding-system' to set its value to that coding system.
7029
7030 ** Changes to TeX mode
7031
7032 *** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
7033 `latex-mode'.
7034
7035 *** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
7036
7037 *** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
7038
7039 *** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
7040
7041 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
7042
7043 *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
7044 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
7045 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
7046 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
7047 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
7048 can be edited from that buffer.
7049
7050 *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
7051 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
7052 `A' to use all marked entries).
7053
7054 *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
7055 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
7056
7057 *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
7058 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
7059 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
7060 been cited.
7061
7062 ** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
7063 The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
7064 semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
7065 in column 1 are always made leaves.
7066
7067 ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
7068 has the following new features:
7069
7070 *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
7071 may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
7072 to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
7073 time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
7074
7075 *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
7076 feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
7077 file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
7078 compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
7079 pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
7080 defaults to 1.
7081
7082 ** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
7083 file names.
7084
7085 ** Ispell changes
7086
7087 *** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
7088 transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
7089 spell-checks the current buffer.
7090
7091 *** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
7092 added.
7093
7094 *** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
7095 correction is made and re-checked.
7096
7097 *** Italian, Portuguese, and Slovak dictionary definitions have been added.
7098
7099 *** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
7100 cases.
7101
7102 *** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
7103 on syntax errors.
7104
7105 *** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
7106 end of the buffer.
7107
7108 *** Spell checking now works in the MS-DOS version of Emacs.
7109
7110 ** Makefile mode changes
7111
7112 *** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
7113
7114 *** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
7115 Fontlock mode is active.
7116
7117 ** Isearch changes
7118
7119 *** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
7120 so that searches can be resumed.
7121
7122 *** In Isearch mode, C-M-s and C-M-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
7123 respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
7124 that started the search.
7125
7126 *** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
7127 selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
7128
7129 *** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
7130
7131 Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
7132 `isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
7133 search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
7134 before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
7135 highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
7136 `secondary-selection'.
7137
7138 The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
7139 will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
7140 Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
7141 using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
7142 usual snappy response.
7143
7144 If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
7145 matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
7146 set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
7147 isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
7148
7149 ** VC Changes
7150
7151 VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
7152 easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
7153 Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
7154 to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
7155 changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
7156 `vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of symbols that identify
7157 version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
7158 each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
7159 file is registered in that backend.
7160
7161 When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
7162 backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
7163 directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
7164 master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
7165 the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
7166 As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
7167
7168 The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
7169 still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
7170 RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
7171 vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
7172 where it doesn't make sense.)
7173
7174 The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
7175 obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
7176 `CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
7177
7178 *** General Changes
7179
7180 The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
7181 checks are always done now.
7182
7183 VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
7184 operations.
7185
7186 `vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
7187 `vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
7188 `vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
7189
7190 The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the
7191 first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the
7192 current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into
7193 the working file (``merge news'').
7194
7195 The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
7196 (vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work
7197 downwards.
7198
7199 *** Multiple Backends
7200
7201 VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is
7202 useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS
7203 repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally
7204 commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your
7205 local RCS archives.
7206
7207 To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example)
7208 should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote''
7209 backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of
7210 `vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.)
7211
7212 You can then commit changes to another backend (say, RCS), by typing
7213 C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a backend name as
7214 a revision number). VC registers the file in the more local backend
7215 if that hasn't already happened, and commits to a branch based on the
7216 current revision number from the more remote backend.
7217
7218 If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to
7219 another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change
7220 any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to
7221 pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally.
7222
7223 After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your
7224 changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the
7225 local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry
7226 buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file.
7227
7228 *** Changes for CVS
7229
7230 There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
7231 default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
7232 remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
7233 by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
7234 regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
7235 that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
7236 queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
7237
7238 If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of
7239 repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and
7240 revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without
7241 any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version
7242 backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version
7243 number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~
7244 (vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter
7245 of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other,
7246 the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted
7247 automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS,
7248 since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file
7249 name.)
7250
7251 If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
7252 repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
7253 If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
7254 commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the
7255 current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
7256 entire directory tree.
7257
7258 The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
7259 "cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
7260 is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
7261 "watched" by other developers.)
7262
7263 The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
7264 (vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give
7265 an empty snapshot name to the latter, that performs a `cvs update',
7266 starting at the given directory.
7267
7268 *** Lisp Changes in VC
7269
7270 VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
7271 add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
7272 library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
7273 then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
7274 a version system named SYS, you write a library named vc-sys.el, which
7275 provides a number of functions vc-sys-... (see commentary at the top
7276 of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
7277 you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the symbol
7278 `SYS' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
7279
7280 ** The customizable EDT emulation package now supports the EDT
7281 SUBS command and EDT scroll margins. It also works with more
7282 terminal/keyboard configurations and it now works under XEmacs.
7283 See etc/edt-user.doc for more information.
7284
7285 ** New modes and packages
7286
7287 *** The new global minor mode `minibuffer-electric-default-mode'
7288 automatically hides the `(default ...)' part of minibuffer prompts when
7289 the default is not applicable.
7290
7291 *** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines,
7292 rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The
7293 shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \.
7294
7295 Features are:
7296
7297 - Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is
7298 drawn, like this: | \ /
7299 --+-- X
7300 | / \
7301
7302 - Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the
7303 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If
7304 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a
7305 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will
7306 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line
7307 you are drawing.
7308
7309 - Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight)
7310 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >.
7311
7312 - Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by
7313 flood-filling.
7314
7315 - Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular
7316 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be
7317 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in
7318 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa.
7319
7320 - Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can
7321 also do without the mouse.
7322
7323 - Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to
7324 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares
7325 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your
7326 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio,
7327 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round.
7328
7329 - Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented:
7330
7331 lines straight-lines
7332 rectangles squares
7333 poly-lines straight poly-lines
7334 ellipses circles
7335 text (see-thru) text (overwrite)
7336 spray-can setting size for spraying
7337 vaporize line vaporize lines
7338 erase characters erase rectangles
7339
7340 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or
7341 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in
7342 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while
7343 drawing.
7344
7345 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines
7346 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are
7347 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired
7348 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>.
7349
7350 - Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this
7351 can be turned off).
7352
7353 *** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
7354 implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
7355 It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
7356 functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
7357 history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
7358 will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
7359 the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
7360 rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
7361 all within the scope of your Emacs process.
7362
7363 *** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
7364 intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
7365 typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
7366 on certain projects.
7367
7368 *** The new package hi-lock.el provides commands to highlight matches
7369 of interactively entered regexps. For example,
7370
7371 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
7372
7373 will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
7374 face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
7375 typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
7376 Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
7377 appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
7378 current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
7379 corresponding file is read. There are commands to highlight matches
7380 to phrases and to highlight entire lines containing a match.
7381
7382 *** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
7383 Emacs is idle.
7384
7385 *** The new package tildify.el allows to add hard spaces or other text
7386 fragments in accordance with the current major mode.
7387
7388 *** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
7389 parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
7390
7391 *** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
7392 package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
7393 be more robust while offering the same functionality.
7394 `comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only
7395 comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary.
7396
7397 *** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
7398 facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
7399 separate Texinfo file.
7400
7401 *** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
7402 by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
7403 provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
7404 `log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
7405 enter check-in log messages.
7406
7407 *** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
7408 without invoking external programs.
7409
7410 The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
7411 and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
7412 `manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
7413 is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
7414 Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
7415
7416 The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
7417 page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
7418
7419 *** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
7420 authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
7421
7422 The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
7423 the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
7424 the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
7425 Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
7426 even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
7427 single step.
7428
7429 On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
7430 matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
7431 probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
7432 contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
7433
7434 *** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
7435 unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
7436 actually modifying content of a buffer.
7437
7438 *** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
7439 PostScript.
7440
7441 Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
7442
7443 The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
7444
7445 ; comment (until end of line)
7446 A non-terminal
7447 "C" terminal
7448 ?C? special
7449 $A default non-terminal
7450 $"C" default terminal
7451 $?C? default special
7452 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
7453 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
7454 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
7455 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
7456 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
7457 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
7458 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
7459 C+ one or more occurrences of C
7460 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
7461 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
7462 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
7463 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
7464 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
7465 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
7466 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
7467
7468 Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
7469
7470 *** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
7471 align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
7472 determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
7473 example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
7474 equal signs of assignments.
7475
7476 *** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
7477 paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
7478
7479 *** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
7480 list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
7481 buffer menu with this package. See the Custom group `bs'.
7482
7483 *** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
7484
7485 *** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
7486 replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
7487 is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
7488 and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
7489 not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
7490 which answers different needs.
7491
7492 *** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
7493 suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
7494 expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
7495 course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
7496 reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
7497 to be enabled.
7498
7499 *** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
7500 containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
7501
7502 *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
7503
7504 *** hl-line.el provides `hl-line-mode', a minor mode to highlight the
7505 current line in the current buffer. It also provides
7506 `global-hl-line-mode' to provide the same behavior in all buffers.
7507
7508 *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
7509
7510 Please note: if `ansi-color-for-comint-mode' and
7511 `global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
7512 disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
7513 `comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
7514 displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
7515 and background colors.
7516
7517 *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
7518 Pascal) language.
7519
7520 *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
7521 the text at point.
7522
7523 *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
7524
7525 *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
7526
7527 *** whitespace.el is a package for warning about and cleaning bogus
7528 whitespace in a file.
7529
7530 *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
7531 files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
7532 (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
7533 interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
7534 often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
7535 uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
7536 codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
7537
7538 *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
7539
7540 Here is an example of columns:
7541
7542 horse apple bus
7543 dog pineapple car EXTRA
7544 porcupine strawberry airplane
7545
7546 Doing the following settings:
7547
7548 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
7549 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
7550 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
7551 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
7552
7553
7554 Selecting the lines above and typing:
7555
7556 M-x delimit-columns-region
7557
7558 It results:
7559
7560 [ horse , apple , bus , ]
7561 [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
7562 [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
7563
7564 delim-col has the following options:
7565
7566 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
7567 before all columns.
7568
7569 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
7570 between each column.
7571
7572 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
7573 after all columns.
7574
7575 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
7576 each column.
7577
7578 delim-col has the following commands:
7579
7580 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
7581 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
7582
7583 *** Recentf mode maintains a menu for visiting files that were
7584 operated on recently. User option recentf-menu-filter specifies a
7585 menu filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the
7586 recent file list can be displayed:
7587
7588 - organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
7589 - sorted by file paths, file names, ascending or descending.
7590 - showing paths relative to the current default-directory
7591
7592 The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
7593 dynamically change the menu appearance.
7594
7595 *** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
7596 text.
7597
7598 *** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
7599 of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
7600 specific to Message mode.
7601
7602 *** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
7603 viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
7604 with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
7605
7606 *** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
7607 interface to access directory servers using different directory
7608 protocols. It has a separate manual.
7609
7610 *** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
7611 for Autoconf, selected automatically.
7612
7613 *** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
7614
7615 *** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
7616 minibuffer with completion.
7617
7618 *** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
7619 with the diary features.
7620
7621 *** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
7622 numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
7623
7624 *** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
7625 Fill mode.
7626
7627 *** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
7628 facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
7629 difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
7630 they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
7631
7632 *** antlr-mode is a new major mode for editing ANTLR grammar files.
7633 It is automatically turned on for files whose names have the extension
7634 `.g'.
7635
7636 ** Changes in sort.el
7637
7638 The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
7639 as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
7640 new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
7641 numeric base.
7642
7643 ** Changes to Ange-ftp
7644
7645 *** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
7646 names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
7647 sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
7648
7649 *** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
7650 ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
7651
7652 *** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
7653 output ^M at the end of lines.
7654
7655 ** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
7656 mode `iswitchb-mode'.
7657
7658 ** Just loading the msb package doesn't switch on Msb mode anymore.
7659 If you have `(require 'msb)' in your .emacs, please replace it with
7660 `(msb-mode 1)'.
7661
7662 ** Flyspell mode has various new options. See the `flyspell' Custom
7663 group.
7664
7665 ** The user option `backward-delete-char-untabify-method' controls the
7666 behavior of `backward-delete-char-untabify'. The following values
7667 are recognized:
7668
7669 `untabify' -- turn a tab to many spaces, then delete one space;
7670 `hungry' -- delete all whitespace, both tabs and spaces;
7671 `all' -- delete all whitespace, including tabs, spaces and newlines;
7672 nil -- just delete one character.
7673
7674 Default value is `untabify'.
7675
7676 [This change was made in Emacs 20.3 but not mentioned then.]
7677
7678 ** In Cperl mode `cperl-invalid-face' should now be a normal face
7679 symbol, not double-quoted.
7680
7681 ** Some packages are declared obsolete, to be removed in a future
7682 version. They are: auto-show, c-mode, hilit19, hscroll, ooutline,
7683 profile, rnews, rnewspost, and sc. Their implementations have been
7684 moved to lisp/obsolete.
7685
7686 ** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
7687 To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
7688 `auto-compression-mode' command.
7689
7690 ** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
7691 `browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME, and
7692 `browse-url-kde' can be chosen for invoking the KDE browser.
7693
7694 ** The user-option `browse-url-new-window-p' has been renamed to
7695 `browse-url-new-window-flag'.
7696
7697 ** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
7698 operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
7699
7700 ** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
7701 is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
7702
7703 ** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
7704 support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
7705 use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
7706 buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
7707 M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
7708 new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
7709
7710 ** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
7711 a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
7712
7713 ** Hexl mode allows to insert non-ASCII characters.
7714
7715 The non-ASCII characters are encoded using the same encoding as the
7716 file you are visiting in Hexl mode.
7717
7718 ** Shell script mode changes.
7719
7720 Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
7721 derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizable, and
7722 sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
7723
7724 ** Etags changes.
7725
7726 *** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
7727
7728 *** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
7729 possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
7730 {lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
7731 This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
7732 a regular expression. The manual contains details.
7733
7734 *** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
7735 declarations when given the --declarations option.
7736
7737 *** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
7738 "operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
7739
7740 *** You shouldn't generally need any more the -C or -c++ option: etags
7741 automatically switches to C++ parsing when it meets the `class' or
7742 `template' keywords.
7743
7744 *** Etags now is able to delve at arbitrary deeps into nested structures in
7745 C-like languages. Previously, it was limited to one or two brace levels.
7746
7747 *** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
7748 types.
7749
7750 *** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
7751
7752 *** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
7753
7754 *** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
7755 are now tagged.
7756
7757 *** In makefiles, tags the targets.
7758
7759 *** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
7760 variables are tagged.
7761
7762 *** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
7763
7764 *** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
7765 for PSWrap.
7766
7767 ** Changes in etags.el
7768
7769 *** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
7770 tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
7771 is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
7772
7773 *** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
7774 the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
7775
7776 If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
7777 FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
7778 TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
7779 obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
7780
7781 TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
7782
7783 FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
7784 List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
7785
7786 A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
7787
7788 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
7789 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
7790 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
7791
7792 *** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
7793 of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
7794
7795 *** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
7796 names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
7797
7798 *** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself.
7799 If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c
7800 /tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c",
7801 "dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the file name,
7802 point will go to the beginning of the file.
7803
7804 *** Compressed files are now transparently supported if
7805 auto-compression-mode is active. You can tag (with Etags) and search
7806 (with find-tag) both compressed and uncompressed files.
7807
7808 *** Tags commands like M-x tags-search no longer change point
7809 in buffers where no match is found. In buffers where a match is
7810 found, the original value of point is pushed on the marker ring.
7811
7812 ** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
7813 remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
7814 appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
7815
7816 ** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
7817
7818 ** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
7819
7820 ** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
7821 containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
7822 expression from that list, are not checked.
7823
7824 ** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
7825 When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
7826 and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
7827 the buffer, just like for the local files.
7828
7829 ** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
7830
7831 ** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
7832 displays local abbrevs, only.
7833
7834 ** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
7835 paragraphs filled as you modify them.
7836
7837 ** The variable `double-click-fuzz' specifies how much the mouse
7838 may be moved between clicks that are recognized as a pair. Its value
7839 is measured in pixels.
7840
7841 ** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
7842 to be visited as images.
7843
7844 ** Two new user-options `grep-command' and `grep-find-command'
7845 were added to compile.el.
7846
7847 ** Withdrawn packages
7848
7849 *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
7850 functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
7851
7852 *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
7853
7854 *** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
7855
7856 \f
7857 * Incompatible Lisp changes
7858
7859 There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and
7860 may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference.
7861 See the sections below for details.
7862
7863 ** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom
7864 `(format "%s" foo)' no longer works to copy and remove properties.
7865 Use `copy-sequence' to copy the string, then use `set-text-properties'
7866 to remove the properties of the copy.
7867
7868 ** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code
7869 which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability)
7870 may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from
7871 these properties are active.
7872
7873 ** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search
7874 ranges may affect some code.
7875
7876 ** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook
7877 buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might
7878 make a difference to some code.
7879
7880 ** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which
7881 operates on the minibuffer.
7882
7883 ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
7884 cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce
7885 different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters
7886 (previously, both coding systems would produce the same results).
7887 Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate
7888 character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading
7889 multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE
7890 encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program
7891 reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte
7892 sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as
7893 a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in
7894 the buffer as multibyte characters.
7895
7896 Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal
7897 MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only
7898 appropriate for reading truly binary files.
7899
7900 ** Code that relies on the obsolete `before-change-function' and
7901 `after-change-function' to detect buffer changes will now fail. Use
7902 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' instead.
7903
7904 ** Code that uses `concat' with integer args now gets an error, as
7905 long promised. So does any code that uses derivatives of `concat',
7906 such as `mapconcat'.
7907
7908 ** The function base64-decode-string now always returns a unibyte
7909 string.
7910
7911 ** Not a Lisp incompatibility as such but, with the introduction of
7912 extra private charsets, there is now only one slot free for a new
7913 dimension-2 private charset. User code which tries to add more than
7914 one extra will fail unless you rebuild Emacs with some standard
7915 charset(s) removed; that is probably inadvisable because it changes
7916 the emacs-mule encoding. Also, files stored in the emacs-mule
7917 encoding using Emacs 20 with additional private charsets defined will
7918 probably not be read correctly by Emacs 21.
7919
7920 ** The variable `directory-sep-char' is slated for removal.
7921 Not really a change (yet), but a projected one that you should be
7922 aware of: The variable `directory-sep-char' is deprecated, and should
7923 not be used. It was always ignored on GNU/Linux and Unix systems and
7924 on MS-DOS, but the MS-Windows port tried to support it by adapting the
7925 behavior of certain primitives to the value of this variable. It
7926 turned out that such support cannot be reliable, so it was decided to
7927 remove this variable in the near future. Lisp programs are well
7928 advised not to set it to anything but '/', because any different value
7929 will not have any effect when support for this variable is removed.
7930
7931 \f
7932 * Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
7933 (Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
7934
7935 ** Function assq-delete-all replaces function assoc-delete-all.
7936
7937 ** The new function animate-string, from lisp/play/animate.el
7938 allows the animated display of strings.
7939
7940 ** The new function `interactive-form' can be used to obtain the
7941 interactive form of a function.
7942
7943 ** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
7944 between custom options. Example:
7945
7946 (defcustom default-input-method nil
7947 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
7948 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
7949 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
7950 :group 'mule
7951 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
7952 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
7953
7954 This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
7955 current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
7956 first in a custom-set-variables statement.
7957
7958 ** The new hook `kbd-macro-termination-hook' is run at the end of
7959 function execute-kbd-macro. Functions on this hook are called with no
7960 args. The hook is run independent of how the macro was terminated
7961 (signal or normal termination).
7962
7963 ** Functions `butlast' and `nbutlast' for removing trailing elements
7964 from a list are now available without requiring the CL package.
7965
7966 ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
7967 to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
7968
7969 ** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
7970 alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
7971
7972 ** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum".
7973
7974 ** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
7975 deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
7976 being deleted.
7977
7978 ** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
7979
7980 ** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
7981 If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
7982 skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
7983 with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
7984 C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
7985 charset.
7986
7987 ** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
7988 the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
7989 message.
7990
7991 ** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
7992 expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
7993
7994 ** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
7995 with the more general `:mask' property.
7996
7997 ** Image specifications accept more `:conversion's.
7998
7999 ** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
8000 backslash.
8001
8002 ** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
8003 is running in batch mode. For example,
8004
8005 (message "%s" (read t))
8006
8007 will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
8008 to standard output.
8009
8010 ** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
8011 `kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
8012
8013 ** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
8014 will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
8015 frame or window.
8016
8017 ** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
8018 were added
8019
8020 - Function: remove ELT SEQ
8021
8022 Return a copy of SEQ with all occurrences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
8023 a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
8024
8025 - Function: remq ELT LIST
8026
8027 Return a copy of LIST with all occurrences of ELT removed. The
8028 comparison is done with `eq'.
8029
8030 ** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
8031
8032 ** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
8033 has been changed: WEAK can now have new values `key-or-value' and
8034 `key-and-value', in addition to `nil', `key', `value', and `t'.
8035
8036 ** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
8037 without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
8038 convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
8039
8040 ** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
8041 or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
8042
8043 ** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
8044 function was declared obsolete.
8045
8046 ** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
8047 retained as an alias).
8048
8049 ** Easy-menu's :filter now takes the unconverted form of the menu and
8050 the result is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
8051
8052 ** The new function `window-list' has been defined
8053
8054 - Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF
8055
8056 Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or
8057 omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use
8058 the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window,
8059 even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the
8060 minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t
8061 means never include the minibuffer window.
8062
8063 ** There's a new function `get-window-with-predicate' defined as follows
8064
8065 - Function: get-window-with-predicate PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
8066
8067 Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
8068
8069 This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
8070 calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
8071 argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
8072 value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
8073 returned.
8074
8075 Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
8076 if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
8077 it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
8078 minibuffer even if it is active.
8079
8080 Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
8081 counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
8082 too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
8083 and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
8084 `walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
8085 entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
8086
8087 ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
8088 ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
8089 ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
8090 ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
8091 ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
8092 If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
8093 Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
8094
8095 ** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
8096 event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
8097 argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
8098
8099 ** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
8100 call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
8101 message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
8102 Default value is nil.
8103
8104 ** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
8105 meaning no limit.
8106
8107 ** The new user option `line-number-display-limit-width' controls
8108 the maximum width of lines in a buffer for which Emacs displays line
8109 numbers in the mode line. The default is 200.
8110
8111 ** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
8112 coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
8113 DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
8114
8115 ** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument
8116 list of a primitive.
8117
8118 ** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
8119
8120 ** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
8121 buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
8122 This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
8123 than replacing the local map.
8124
8125 ** The obsolete variables `before-change-function' and
8126 `after-change-function' are no longer acted upon and have been
8127 removed. Use `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions'
8128 instead.
8129
8130 ** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
8131
8132 ** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
8133 as promised long ago.
8134
8135 ** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
8136
8137 ** The new variable auto-coding-regexp-alist specifies coding systems
8138 for reading specific files, analogous to auto-coding-alist, but
8139 patterns are checked against file contents instead of file names.
8140
8141 \f
8142 * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
8143
8144 ** The new package rx.el provides an alternative sexp notation for
8145 regular expressions.
8146
8147 - Function: rx-to-string SEXP
8148
8149 Translate SEXP into a regular expression in string notation.
8150
8151 - Macro: rx SEXP
8152
8153 Translate SEXP into a regular expression in string notation.
8154
8155 The following are valid subforms of regular expressions in sexp
8156 notation.
8157
8158 STRING
8159 matches string STRING literally.
8160
8161 CHAR
8162 matches character CHAR literally.
8163
8164 `not-newline'
8165 matches any character except a newline.
8166 .
8167 `anything'
8168 matches any character
8169
8170 `(any SET)'
8171 matches any character in SET. SET may be a character or string.
8172 Ranges of characters can be specified as `A-Z' in strings.
8173
8174 '(in SET)'
8175 like `any'.
8176
8177 `(not (any SET))'
8178 matches any character not in SET
8179
8180 `line-start'
8181 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of a line
8182 in the text being matched
8183
8184 `line-end'
8185 is similar to `line-start' but matches only at the end of a line
8186
8187 `string-start'
8188 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the
8189 string being matched against.
8190
8191 `string-end'
8192 matches the empty string, but only at the end of the
8193 string being matched against.
8194
8195 `buffer-start'
8196 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the
8197 buffer being matched against.
8198
8199 `buffer-end'
8200 matches the empty string, but only at the end of the
8201 buffer being matched against.
8202
8203 `point'
8204 matches the empty string, but only at point.
8205
8206 `word-start'
8207 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a
8208 word.
8209
8210 `word-end'
8211 matches the empty string, but only at the end of a word.
8212
8213 `word-boundary'
8214 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a
8215 word.
8216
8217 `(not word-boundary)'
8218 matches the empty string, but not at the beginning or end of a
8219 word.
8220
8221 `digit'
8222 matches 0 through 9.
8223
8224 `control'
8225 matches ASCII control characters.
8226
8227 `hex-digit'
8228 matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
8229
8230 `blank'
8231 matches space and tab only.
8232
8233 `graphic'
8234 matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
8235 space, and DEL.
8236
8237 `printing'
8238 matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
8239 and DEL.
8240
8241 `alphanumeric'
8242 matches letters and digits. (But at present, for multibyte characters,
8243 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
8244
8245 `letter'
8246 matches letters. (But at present, for multibyte characters,
8247 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
8248
8249 `ascii'
8250 matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
8251
8252 `nonascii'
8253 matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
8254
8255 `lower'
8256 matches anything lower-case.
8257
8258 `upper'
8259 matches anything upper-case.
8260
8261 `punctuation'
8262 matches punctuation. (But at present, for multibyte characters,
8263 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
8264
8265 `space'
8266 matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
8267
8268 `word'
8269 matches anything that has word syntax.
8270
8271 `(syntax SYNTAX)'
8272 matches a character with syntax SYNTAX. SYNTAX must be one
8273 of the following symbols.
8274
8275 `whitespace' (\\s- in string notation)
8276 `punctuation' (\\s.)
8277 `word' (\\sw)
8278 `symbol' (\\s_)
8279 `open-parenthesis' (\\s()
8280 `close-parenthesis' (\\s))
8281 `expression-prefix' (\\s')
8282 `string-quote' (\\s\")
8283 `paired-delimiter' (\\s$)
8284 `escape' (\\s\\)
8285 `character-quote' (\\s/)
8286 `comment-start' (\\s<)
8287 `comment-end' (\\s>)
8288
8289 `(not (syntax SYNTAX))'
8290 matches a character that has not syntax SYNTAX.
8291
8292 `(category CATEGORY)'
8293 matches a character with category CATEGORY. CATEGORY must be
8294 either a character to use for C, or one of the following symbols.
8295
8296 `consonant' (\\c0 in string notation)
8297 `base-vowel' (\\c1)
8298 `upper-diacritical-mark' (\\c2)
8299 `lower-diacritical-mark' (\\c3)
8300 `tone-mark' (\\c4)
8301 `symbol' (\\c5)
8302 `digit' (\\c6)
8303 `vowel-modifying-diacritical-mark' (\\c7)
8304 `vowel-sign' (\\c8)
8305 `semivowel-lower' (\\c9)
8306 `not-at-end-of-line' (\\c<)
8307 `not-at-beginning-of-line' (\\c>)
8308 `alpha-numeric-two-byte' (\\cA)
8309 `chinse-two-byte' (\\cC)
8310 `greek-two-byte' (\\cG)
8311 `japanese-hiragana-two-byte' (\\cH)
8312 `indian-two-byte' (\\cI)
8313 `japanese-katakana-two-byte' (\\cK)
8314 `korean-hangul-two-byte' (\\cN)
8315 `cyrillic-two-byte' (\\cY)
8316 `ascii' (\\ca)
8317 `arabic' (\\cb)
8318 `chinese' (\\cc)
8319 `ethiopic' (\\ce)
8320 `greek' (\\cg)
8321 `korean' (\\ch)
8322 `indian' (\\ci)
8323 `japanese' (\\cj)
8324 `japanese-katakana' (\\ck)
8325 `latin' (\\cl)
8326 `lao' (\\co)
8327 `tibetan' (\\cq)
8328 `japanese-roman' (\\cr)
8329 `thai' (\\ct)
8330 `vietnamese' (\\cv)
8331 `hebrew' (\\cw)
8332 `cyrillic' (\\cy)
8333 `can-break' (\\c|)
8334
8335 `(not (category CATEGORY))'
8336 matches a character that has not category CATEGORY.
8337
8338 `(and SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)'
8339 matches what SEXP1 matches, followed by what SEXP2 matches, etc.
8340
8341 `(submatch SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)'
8342 like `and', but makes the match accessible with `match-end',
8343 `match-beginning', and `match-string'.
8344
8345 `(group SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)'
8346 another name for `submatch'.
8347
8348 `(or SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)'
8349 matches anything that matches SEXP1 or SEXP2, etc. If all
8350 args are strings, use `regexp-opt' to optimize the resulting
8351 regular expression.
8352
8353 `(minimal-match SEXP)'
8354 produce a non-greedy regexp for SEXP. Normally, regexps matching
8355 zero or more occurrences of something are \"greedy\" in that they
8356 match as much as they can, as long as the overall regexp can
8357 still match. A non-greedy regexp matches as little as possible.
8358
8359 `(maximal-match SEXP)'
8360 produce a greedy regexp for SEXP. This is the default.
8361
8362 `(zero-or-more SEXP)'
8363 matches zero or more occurrences of what SEXP matches.
8364
8365 `(0+ SEXP)'
8366 like `zero-or-more'.
8367
8368 `(* SEXP)'
8369 like `zero-or-more', but always produces a greedy regexp.
8370
8371 `(*? SEXP)'
8372 like `zero-or-more', but always produces a non-greedy regexp.
8373
8374 `(one-or-more SEXP)'
8375 matches one or more occurrences of A.
8376
8377 `(1+ SEXP)'
8378 like `one-or-more'.
8379
8380 `(+ SEXP)'
8381 like `one-or-more', but always produces a greedy regexp.
8382
8383 `(+? SEXP)'
8384 like `one-or-more', but always produces a non-greedy regexp.
8385
8386 `(zero-or-one SEXP)'
8387 matches zero or one occurrences of A.
8388
8389 `(optional SEXP)'
8390 like `zero-or-one'.
8391
8392 `(? SEXP)'
8393 like `zero-or-one', but always produces a greedy regexp.
8394
8395 `(?? SEXP)'
8396 like `zero-or-one', but always produces a non-greedy regexp.
8397
8398 `(repeat N SEXP)'
8399 matches N occurrences of what SEXP matches.
8400
8401 `(repeat N M SEXP)'
8402 matches N to M occurrences of what SEXP matches.
8403
8404 `(eval FORM)'
8405 evaluate FORM and insert result. If result is a string,
8406 `regexp-quote' it.
8407
8408 `(regexp REGEXP)'
8409 include REGEXP in string notation in the result.
8410
8411 *** The features `md5' and `overlay' are now provided by default.
8412
8413 *** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
8414 buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
8415 the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
8416 restriction to be restored incorrectly.
8417
8418 *** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
8419 `eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
8420 when they find 8-bit characters. Previously, they included `ascii' in a
8421 multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
8422
8423 *** The functions `set-buffer-multibyte', `string-as-multibyte' and
8424 `string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer or a string
8425 if it contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
8426
8427 *** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
8428 changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
8429 [\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
8430 regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
8431 the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
8432 extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
8433 bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
8434 eight-bit-graphic.
8435
8436 ** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
8437
8438 A fontset can now be specified for each independent character, for
8439 a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
8440 character set as previously.
8441
8442 *** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
8443 They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
8444 modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
8445
8446 CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
8447 characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
8448 range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
8449 case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
8450
8451 FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
8452 name of a font and REGISTRY is a registry name of a font.
8453
8454 *** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
8455 registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
8456 "fontset-default".
8457
8458 *** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
8459 argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
8460
8461 ** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
8462 composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
8463 buffers and strings.
8464
8465 *** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
8466 character' which is an independent character with a unique character
8467 code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
8468 have been deleted: composite-char-component,
8469 composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
8470 composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
8471 The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
8472 also been deleted.
8473
8474 *** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
8475 specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
8476 `reference-point-alist' for more detail.
8477
8478 *** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
8479 MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
8480 composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
8481 may differ between buffer and string text.
8482
8483 *** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
8484 COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
8485
8486 *** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
8487 directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
8488 Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
8489 `composition' from STRING.
8490
8491 *** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
8492 a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
8493
8494 *** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
8495 obsolete.
8496
8497 ** The new coding system `mac-roman' is primarily intended for use on
8498 the Macintosh but may be used generally for Macintosh-encoded text.
8499
8500 ** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
8501 `mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' have been
8502 introduced for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF,
8503 U+2500..U+33FF, U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
8504
8505 Note that the character sets are not yet unified in Emacs, so
8506 characters which belong to charsets such as Latin-2, Greek, Hebrew,
8507 etc. and the same characters in the `mule-unicode-*' charsets are
8508 different characters, as far as Emacs is concerned. For example, text
8509 which includes Unicode characters from the Latin-2 locale cannot be
8510 encoded by Emacs with ISO 8859-2 coding system.
8511
8512 ** The new coding system `mule-utf-8' has been added.
8513 It provides limited support for decoding/encoding UTF-8 text. For
8514 details, please see the documentation string of this coding system.
8515
8516 ** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
8517 `japanese-jisx0213-2' have been introduced for the new Japanese
8518 standard JIS X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
8519
8520 ** The new character sets `latin-iso8859-14' and `latin-iso8859-15'
8521 have been introduced.
8522
8523 ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
8524 have been introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
8525 0xA0..0xFF respectively. Note that the multibyte representation of
8526 eight-bit-control is never exposed; this leads to an exception in the
8527 emacs-mule coding system, which encodes everything else to the
8528 buffer/string internal representation. Note that to search for
8529 eight-bit-graphic characters in a multibyte buffer, the search string
8530 must be multibyte, otherwise such characters will be converted to
8531 their multibyte equivalent.
8532
8533 ** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
8534 that offset in the file before writing.
8535
8536 ** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
8537 compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
8538
8539 ** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
8540 `*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
8541 from which the command was issued.
8542
8543 ** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
8544 `query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
8545 `replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
8546 additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
8547 operate on.
8548
8549 ** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
8550 to `window-buffer-height'.
8551
8552 - Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
8553
8554 Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
8555 The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
8556 lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
8557
8558 Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
8559 respectively.
8560
8561 If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optional third argument
8562 COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
8563
8564 The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
8565 obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
8566 on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
8567
8568 Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
8569 buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
8570 possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
8571 is currently displayed in some window.
8572
8573 ** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
8574 argument function's results.
8575
8576 ** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
8577 signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails. Also,
8578 `base64-decode-string' now always returns a unibyte string (in Emacs
8579 20, it returned a multibyte string when the result was a valid multibyte
8580 sequence).
8581
8582 ** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
8583 header in the list of headers passed to it.
8584
8585 ** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
8586 ignores differences in case and text representation.
8587
8588 ** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
8589 cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
8590 as follows:
8591
8592 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
8593 nil don't display a cursor
8594 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
8595 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
8596 others display a box cursor.
8597
8598 ** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
8599 an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
8600 defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
8601 set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
8602
8603 ** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
8604 specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
8605 the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
8606 text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
8607
8608 Example:
8609
8610 (string-to-syntax "()")
8611 => (4 . 41)
8612
8613 ** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
8614 other than 10.
8615
8616 *** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
8617 INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
8618
8619 #b1111
8620 => 15
8621 #b-1111
8622 => -15
8623
8624 *** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
8625
8626 #o666
8627 => 438
8628
8629 *** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
8630
8631 #xbeef
8632 => 48815
8633
8634 *** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
8635
8636 #2R-111
8637 => -7
8638 #25rah
8639 => 267
8640
8641 ** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
8642 the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
8643 and isn't a string.
8644
8645 ** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
8646 a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
8647 value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
8648 not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
8649
8650 ** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
8651
8652 ** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
8653 for a regexp in a string.
8654
8655 ** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
8656 `mouse-position-function'.
8657
8658 ** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
8659 that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
8660
8661 ** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
8662 Keywords are now always considered constants.
8663
8664 ** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
8665 returns it.
8666
8667 ** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
8668 returned by function `recent-keys'.
8669
8670 ** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
8671 can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
8672 Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding C-M-a
8673 etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
8674 mode.
8675
8676 ** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
8677 and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
8678
8679 ** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
8680 has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
8681 function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
8682 returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
8683 been performed."
8684
8685 When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
8686 and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
8687 hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
8688 then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
8689
8690 ** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
8691 In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
8692 and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
8693
8694 ** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
8695 with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
8696 specified table.
8697
8698 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
8699
8700 Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
8701 TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
8702 saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
8703 what BODY returns.
8704
8705 ** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
8706 Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8707 Also back-references like \2 are now considered as an error if the
8708 corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet).
8709 Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\').
8710
8711 ** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
8712 removed since it wasn't used by anything.
8713
8714 ** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
8715 instead of being optional.
8716
8717 ** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
8718 modify read-only text.
8719
8720 ** New functions and variables for locales.
8721
8722 The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
8723 decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
8724 time functions like strftime. The new variables
8725 `system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
8726 locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
8727
8728 The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
8729 environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
8730 the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
8731 environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
8732 not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
8733 `locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
8734 `locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
8735
8736 ** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
8737 To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
8738 modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
8739 start sequences.
8740
8741 ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
8742 because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
8743
8744 ** New function `propertize'
8745
8746 The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
8747 strings with text properties.
8748
8749 - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
8750
8751 Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
8752 by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
8753 PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
8754 specified value of that property. Example:
8755
8756 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
8757
8758 ** push and pop macros.
8759
8760 Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
8761 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
8762 as the place that holds the list to be changed.
8763
8764 (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
8765 (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
8766 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
8767
8768 ** New dolist and dotimes macros.
8769
8770 Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
8771 are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
8772
8773 (dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
8774 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
8775 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
8776 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
8777
8778 (dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
8779 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
8780 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
8781 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
8782
8783 ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as
8784 [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character
8785 class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period
8786 or a sign.
8787
8788 [:digit:] matches 0 through 9
8789 [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
8790 [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
8791 [:blank:] matches space and tab only
8792 [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
8793 space, and DEL.
8794 [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
8795 and DEL.
8796 [:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
8797 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
8798 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
8799 [:alpha:] matches letters.
8800 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
8801 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
8802 [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
8803 [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
8804 [:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
8805 [:punct:] matches punctuation.
8806 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
8807 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
8808 [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
8809 [:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
8810 [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
8811
8812 ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
8813
8814 The following functions are defined for hash tables:
8815
8816 - Function: make-hash-table ARGS
8817
8818 The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
8819 are optional. The following arguments are defined:
8820
8821 :test TEST
8822
8823 TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
8824 Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
8825 it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
8826
8827 :size SIZE
8828
8829 SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
8830 many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
8831
8832 :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
8833
8834 REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
8835 full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
8836 size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
8837 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
8838 old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
8839
8840 :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
8841
8842 THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
8843 hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
8844 (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
8845
8846 :weakness WEAK
8847
8848 WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
8849 `key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
8850 `key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
8851 collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
8852 outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
8853
8854 - Function: makehash &optional TEST
8855
8856 Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
8857
8858 - Function: hash-table-p TABLE
8859
8860 Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
8861
8862 - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
8863
8864 Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
8865 values are shared.
8866
8867 - Function: hash-table-count TABLE
8868
8869 Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
8870
8871 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
8872
8873 Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
8874
8875 - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
8876
8877 Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
8878
8879 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
8880
8881 Returns the size of TABLE.
8882
8883 - Function: hash-table-test TABLE
8884
8885 Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
8886
8887 - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
8888
8889 Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
8890
8891 - Function: clrhash TABLE
8892
8893 Clear TABLE.
8894
8895 - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
8896
8897 Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
8898 not found.
8899
8900 - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
8901
8902 Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
8903 another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
8904
8905 - Function: remhash KEY TABLE
8906
8907 Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
8908
8909 - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
8910
8911 Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
8912 arguments KEY and VALUE.
8913
8914 - Function: sxhash OBJ
8915
8916 Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
8917
8918 - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
8919
8920 Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
8921 a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
8922 comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
8923 and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
8924 of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
8925
8926 TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
8927
8928 HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
8929 code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
8930 integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
8931
8932 Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
8933 be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
8934
8935 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
8936 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
8937
8938 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
8939 (sxhash (upcase a)))
8940
8941 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
8942 'case-fold-string-hash))
8943
8944 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
8945
8946 ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
8947
8948 It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
8949 circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
8950 a cons cell which is its own cdr.
8951
8952 ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
8953
8954 If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
8955 #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
8956
8957 ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
8958 t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
8959 specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
8960 is too short to reach that column.
8961
8962 ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
8963 now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
8964 after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
8965 two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
8966
8967 If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
8968 perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
8969 and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
8970
8971 ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
8972 to specify which buffer to return the size of.
8973
8974 ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
8975 calendar-move-hook after moving point.
8976
8977 ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
8978 directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
8979 small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
8980 small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
8981 temporary-file-directory instead.
8982
8983 ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
8984 the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
8985 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
8986 hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
8987
8988 ** assq-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
8989 elements of an alist which have a car `eq' to a particular value.
8990
8991 ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
8992
8993 make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
8994 creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
8995 ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
8996
8997 ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
8998
8999 The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
9000 on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
9001 is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
9002 never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
9003 ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
9004 overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
9005
9006 If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
9007 that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
9008 to get an error if the file exists at that time.
9009 The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
9010
9011 ** Function `format' now handles text properties.
9012
9013 Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
9014 If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
9015 ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
9016 result string.
9017
9018 Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
9019 string where arguments appear in the result string.
9020
9021 Example:
9022
9023 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
9024 (s2 "world"))
9025 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
9026 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
9027 (format s1 s2))
9028
9029 results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
9030
9031 ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
9032
9033 Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
9034 The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
9035 argument in it.
9036
9037 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
9038 (arg "world"))
9039 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
9040 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
9041 (message msg arg))
9042
9043 ** Sound support
9044
9045 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
9046 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
9047
9048 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
9049 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
9050 to enable sound support.
9051
9052 Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
9053 list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
9054 when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
9055 functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
9056 sound to play, before playing the sound.
9057
9058 The following sound properties are supported:
9059
9060 - `:file FILE'
9061
9062 FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
9063 searched relative to `data-directory'.
9064
9065 - `:data DATA'
9066
9067 DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
9068 may be present, but not both.
9069
9070 - `:volume VOLUME'
9071
9072 VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
9073 0..1. This property is optional.
9074
9075 - `:device DEVICE'
9076
9077 DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the
9078 sound. The default device is system-dependent.
9079
9080 Other properties are ignored.
9081
9082 An alternative interface is called as
9083 (play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE).
9084
9085 ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
9086
9087 ** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
9088 a keyword symbol.
9089
9090 ** Changes to garbage collection
9091
9092 *** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
9093 of live and free strings.
9094
9095 *** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
9096 strings that have been consed so far.
9097
9098 \f
9099 * Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
9100 Lisp Manual
9101
9102 ** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
9103 mini-windows.
9104
9105 ** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third optional
9106 argument, PARTIALLY. If a character is only partially visible, nil is
9107 returned, unless PARTIALLY is non-nil.
9108
9109 ** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
9110
9111 ** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
9112
9113 ** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
9114 image.
9115
9116 - Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
9117
9118 Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
9119
9120 SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
9121 measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
9122 character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
9123 font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
9124 FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
9125
9126 ** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
9127 has a mask bitmap.
9128
9129 - Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
9130
9131 Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
9132 FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
9133 or omitted means use the selected frame.
9134
9135 ** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
9136 satisfying one of a list of specifications.
9137
9138 ** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
9139 optional.
9140
9141 ** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
9142 below).
9143
9144 \f
9145 * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
9146
9147 ** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
9148 to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
9149
9150 Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
9151 text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
9152 is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
9153 your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
9154 laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
9155 just display it black instead.
9156
9157 This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
9158 a line like
9159
9160 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
9161
9162 in your `.emacs'.
9163
9164 ** New face implementation.
9165
9166 Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
9167 font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
9168
9169 *** New faces.
9170
9171 Each face can specify the following display attributes:
9172
9173 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
9174
9175 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
9176 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
9177
9178 3. Font height in 1/10pt
9179
9180 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
9181
9182 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
9183
9184 6. Foreground color.
9185
9186 7. Background color.
9187
9188 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
9189
9190 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
9191
9192 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
9193
9194 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
9195
9196 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
9197 color.
9198
9199 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
9200 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
9201
9202 Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
9203 same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
9204 frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
9205 faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
9206 with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each of the face
9207 attributes mentioned above.
9208
9209 There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
9210 definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
9211 created frames.
9212
9213 A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
9214 have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
9215 `fully-specified'.
9216
9217 *** Face merging.
9218
9219 The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
9220 combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
9221 aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
9222 properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
9223 that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
9224 results in a fully-specified face.
9225
9226 *** Face realization.
9227
9228 After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
9229 merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
9230 realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
9231 available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
9232 face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
9233 cache of the frame on which it was realized.
9234
9235 Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
9236 character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
9237 for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
9238 charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
9239
9240 Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
9241 specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
9242 being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
9243 the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
9244 statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
9245
9246 In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
9247 `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
9248 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
9249 the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
9250 initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
9251 Emacs.
9252
9253 Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
9254 `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
9255 registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
9256 with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
9257
9258 **** Clearing face caches.
9259
9260 The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
9261 on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
9262 unused fonts.
9263
9264 *** Font selection.
9265
9266 Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
9267 given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
9268 for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
9269
9270 If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
9271 pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
9272 family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
9273 property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
9274 an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
9275
9276 Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
9277 against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
9278 match for the given face attributes in this font list.
9279
9280 Font selection can be influenced by the user.
9281
9282 The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
9283 attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
9284 face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
9285 names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
9286 that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
9287 width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
9288 to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
9289
9290 Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
9291 alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
9292 doesn't exist.
9293
9294 Setting `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows the user to specify
9295 all alternative font registry names to try for a face specifying a
9296 registry.
9297
9298 Please note that the interpretations of the above two variables are
9299 slightly different.
9300
9301 Setting face-ignored-fonts allows the user to ignore specific fonts.
9302
9303
9304 **** Scalable fonts
9305
9306 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
9307 since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
9308 servers.
9309
9310 To enable scalable font use, set the variable
9311 `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
9312 scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
9313 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
9314 scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
9315 that list. Example:
9316
9317 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
9318
9319 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
9320
9321 *** Functions and variables related to font selection.
9322
9323 - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
9324
9325 Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
9326 is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
9327 string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
9328
9329 If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
9330 the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
9331 FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
9332 POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
9333 SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
9334 These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
9335 if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
9336 REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
9337 the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
9338 of the face font sort order.
9339
9340 - Function: x-font-family-list
9341
9342 Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
9343 omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
9344 (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
9345 non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
9346
9347 - Variable: font-list-limit
9348
9349 Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
9350 won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
9351 matching font. The default is currently 100.
9352
9353 *** Setting face attributes.
9354
9355 For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
9356 with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
9357 implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
9358 `face-attribute'.
9359
9360 Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
9361 symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
9362
9363 The following attributes are recognized:
9364
9365 `:family'
9366
9367 VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
9368 or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
9369 and `?' are allowed.
9370
9371 `:width'
9372
9373 VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
9374 It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
9375 `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
9376 `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
9377
9378 `:height'
9379
9380 VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
9381 in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
9382 scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
9383 height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
9384
9385 `:weight'
9386
9387 VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
9388 symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
9389 `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
9390
9391 `:slant'
9392
9393 VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
9394 symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
9395 `reverse-oblique'.
9396
9397 `:foreground', `:background'
9398
9399 VALUE must be a color name, a string.
9400
9401 `:underline'
9402
9403 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
9404 VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
9405 a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
9406 don't underline.
9407
9408 `:overline'
9409
9410 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
9411 VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
9412 string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
9413 overline.
9414
9415 `:strike-through'
9416
9417 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
9418 striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
9419 face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
9420 is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
9421
9422 `:box'
9423
9424 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
9425 around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
9426 VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
9427 of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
9428 and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
9429 VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
9430 :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
9431 the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
9432 specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
9433 defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
9434 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
9435 color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
9436 should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
9437 like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
9438 that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
9439 the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
9440 box.
9441
9442 `:inverse-video'
9443
9444 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
9445 inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
9446
9447 `:stipple'
9448
9449 If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
9450 The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
9451 searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
9452 HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
9453 is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
9454 explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
9455
9456 For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
9457 and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
9458
9459 `:font'
9460
9461 Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
9462 XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
9463 is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
9464 versions of Emacs.
9465
9466 For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
9467 be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
9468 must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
9469
9470 Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
9471 `defface'.
9472
9473 `:inherit'
9474
9475 VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
9476 of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
9477 like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
9478
9479 *** Face attributes and X resources
9480
9481 The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
9482 from X resources:
9483
9484 Face attribute X resource class
9485 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
9486 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
9487 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
9488 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
9489 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
9490 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
9491 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
9492 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
9493 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
9494 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
9495 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
9496 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
9497 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
9498 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
9499 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
9500 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
9501 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
9502 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
9503 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
9504 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
9505
9506 *** Text property `face'.
9507
9508 The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
9509 specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
9510 specification can be
9511
9512 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
9513
9514 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
9515 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
9516 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
9517 for face attribute names.
9518
9519 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
9520 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
9521 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
9522
9523 ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
9524
9525 The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
9526 on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
9527 the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
9528 default. You can get defined colors with a call to
9529 `defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
9530 used to clear the mapping table.
9531
9532 ** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
9533
9534 The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
9535 and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
9536 type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
9537 color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
9538 display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
9539 old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
9540 `x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
9541 compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
9542 should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
9543 modify their color-related behavior.
9544
9545 The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
9546 any frame type.
9547
9548 ** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
9549
9550 The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
9551 `display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
9552 `display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
9553 `display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
9554 `display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
9555 `display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
9556 display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
9557 the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
9558 platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
9559
9560 The new function `display-images-p' returns non-nil if a particular
9561 display can display image files.
9562
9563 ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
9564
9565 This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
9566 To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize
9567 the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the
9568 `Inviolable' option.
9569
9570 The function `minibuffer-prompt-end' returns the current position of the
9571 end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
9572 Otherwise, it returns `(point-min)'.
9573
9574 ** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
9575
9576 There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
9577 buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
9578 property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
9579
9580 Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
9581 forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9582 to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
9583 not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
9584 commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
9585 boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
9586 `inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
9587 functions.
9588
9589 Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9590 a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
9591 editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
9592
9593 The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
9594
9595 - Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9596
9597 Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
9598
9599 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
9600 If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
9601 constrained position if that is different.
9602
9603 If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
9604 positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
9605 ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
9606 constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9607 as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
9608 is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
9609 fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
9610 the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
9611 also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9612
9613 If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
9614 NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
9615 unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
9616 C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
9617 only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
9618
9619 If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
9620 a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
9621
9622 Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
9623
9624 - Function: delete-field &optional POS
9625
9626 Delete the field surrounding POS.
9627 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
9628 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9629
9630 - Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
9631
9632 Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
9633 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
9634 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9635 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9636 field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
9637
9638 - Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
9639
9640 Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
9641 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
9642 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9643 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9644 then the end of the *following* field is returned.
9645
9646 - Function: field-string &optional POS
9647
9648 Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
9649 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
9650 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9651
9652 - Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
9653
9654 Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
9655 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
9656 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9657
9658 ** Image support.
9659
9660 Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
9661 strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
9662 (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
9663 replaces the display of the characters having that property.
9664
9665 If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
9666 `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
9667 AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
9668 window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
9669 area.
9670
9671 IMAGE is an image specification.
9672
9673 *** Image specifications
9674
9675 Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
9676 is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
9677 specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
9678 symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
9679 described below are ignored.
9680
9681 The following is a list of properties all image types share.
9682
9683 `:ascent ASCENT'
9684
9685 ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
9686 If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
9687 to use for its ascent.
9688
9689 If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
9690 image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
9691
9692 If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
9693 centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
9694 of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
9695 overlays that apply to the image.
9696
9697 `:margin MARGIN'
9698
9699 MARGIN must be either a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put
9700 as margin around the image, or a pair (X . Y) with X specifying the
9701 horizontal margin and Y specifying the vertical margin. Default is 0.
9702
9703 `:relief RELIEF'
9704
9705 RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
9706 around an image.
9707
9708 `:conversion ALGO'
9709
9710 Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
9711
9712 ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
9713 edge-detection algorithm to the image.
9714
9715 ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
9716 apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
9717 nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
9718 position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
9719 around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
9720 neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
9721 transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
9722 x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
9723 below.
9724
9725 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
9726 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
9727 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
9728
9729 The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
9730 resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
9731 multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
9732 of the factors' absolute values.
9733
9734 Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
9735
9736 (1 0 0
9737 0 0 0
9738 9 9 -1)
9739
9740 Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
9741
9742 ( 2 -1 0
9743 -1 0 1
9744 0 1 -2)
9745
9746 ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
9747 ``disabled''.
9748
9749 `:mask MASK'
9750
9751 If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
9752 the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
9753 image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
9754 background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
9755 image, assuming the most frequently occurring color from the corners is
9756 the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
9757 GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
9758 image.
9759
9760 If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
9761 in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
9762 `:mask nil'.
9763
9764 `:file FILE'
9765
9766 Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
9767 search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
9768 building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
9769 may be present in the image specification.
9770
9771 `:data DATA'
9772
9773 Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
9774 supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
9775 present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
9776 support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
9777
9778 *** Supported image types
9779
9780 **** XBM, image type `xbm'.
9781
9782 XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
9783 properties supported are:
9784
9785 `:foreground FG'
9786
9787 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil
9788 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground color.
9789
9790 `:background BG'
9791
9792 BG must be a string specifying the image background color, or nil
9793 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color.
9794
9795 XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
9796 case, the image specification must contain the following properties
9797 instead of a `:file' property.
9798
9799 `:width WIDTH'
9800
9801 WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
9802
9803 `:height HEIGHT'
9804
9805 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
9806
9807 `:data DATA'
9808
9809 DATA must be either
9810
9811 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
9812 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
9813
9814 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
9815
9816 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
9817 bitmap.
9818
9819 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
9820 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
9821 in the file.
9822
9823 **** XPM, image type `xpm'
9824
9825 XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
9826 `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
9827 found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
9828 `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
9829
9830 Additional image properties supported are:
9831
9832 `:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
9833
9834 SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
9835 name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
9836 name.
9837
9838 XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
9839 add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
9840
9841 The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
9842 to display compressed images.
9843
9844 **** PBM, image type `pbm'
9845
9846 PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
9847 mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
9848 mono images are:
9849
9850 `:foreground FG'
9851
9852 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil
9853 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground color.
9854
9855 `:background FG'
9856
9857 BG must be a string specifying the image background color, or nil
9858 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color.
9859
9860 **** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
9861
9862 Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
9863 package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
9864 properties defined.
9865
9866 **** TIFF, image type `tiff'
9867
9868 Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
9869 package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
9870 properties defined.
9871
9872 **** GIF, image type `gif'
9873
9874 Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
9875 `libungif-4.1.0', or later.
9876
9877 Additional image properties supported are:
9878
9879 `:index INDEX'
9880
9881 INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
9882 multi-image GIF file. If INDEX is too large, the image displays
9883 as a hollow box.
9884
9885 This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
9886 For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
9887 at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
9888 every 0.1 seconds.
9889
9890 (defun show-anim (file max)
9891 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
9892 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
9893
9894 (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
9895 (when (= idx max)
9896 (setq idx 0))
9897 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
9898 (save-excursion
9899 (set-buffer buffer)
9900 (goto-char (point-min))
9901 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
9902 (insert-image img "x"))
9903 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
9904
9905 **** PNG, image type `png'
9906
9907 Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
9908 package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
9909 properties defined.
9910
9911 **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
9912
9913 Additional image properties supported are:
9914
9915 `:pt-width WIDTH'
9916
9917 WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
9918 integer. This is a required property.
9919
9920 `:pt-height HEIGHT'
9921
9922 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
9923 must be a integer. This is an required property.
9924
9925 `:bounding-box BOX'
9926
9927 BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
9928 the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
9929 files. This is an required property.
9930
9931 Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
9932 lisp/gs.el.
9933
9934 *** Lisp interface.
9935
9936 The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
9937 which are supported in the current configuration.
9938
9939 Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
9940 they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
9941 The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
9942 manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
9943 images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
9944
9945 *** Simplified image API, image.el
9946
9947 The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
9948 creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
9949 can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
9950 define an image based on available image types. The functions
9951 `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
9952 buffer.
9953
9954 ** Display margins.
9955
9956 Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
9957 and images.
9958
9959 To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
9960 `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
9961 `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
9962 obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
9963 `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
9964 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
9965 of the display margins.
9966
9967 You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
9968 containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
9969 one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
9970 string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
9971 in this file).
9972
9973 ** Help display
9974
9975 Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
9976 moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
9977 `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
9978 that have a `help-echo' property.
9979
9980 If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
9981 is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
9982 the window in which the help was found.
9983
9984 If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
9985 `help-echo' text property was found.
9986
9987 If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
9988 POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
9989
9990 If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
9991 the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
9992 mouse.
9993
9994 If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
9995 string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
9996
9997 For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
9998 determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
9999 property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
10000 For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
10001 used as help string.
10002
10003 The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
10004 the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
10005 causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
10006
10007 ** Vertical fractional scrolling.
10008
10009 The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
10010 This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
10011
10012 The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
10013 scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
10014 The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
10015 scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
10016 used.
10017
10018 (global-set-key [A-down]
10019 #'(lambda ()
10020 (interactive)
10021 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
10022 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
10023 (global-set-key [A-up]
10024 #'(lambda ()
10025 (interactive)
10026 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
10027 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
10028
10029 ** New hook `fontification-functions'.
10030
10031 Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
10032 when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
10033 variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
10034 is called with one argument, POS.
10035
10036 At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
10037 characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
10038 as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
10039 property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
10040 `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
10041
10042 ** Tool bar support.
10043
10044 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
10045 parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
10046 controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
10047 suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
10048 `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
10049 automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
10050
10051 *** Tool bar item definitions
10052
10053 Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
10054 `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
10055 where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
10056
10057 CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
10058 evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
10059 the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
10060 property (see below).
10061
10062 BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
10063 binding are currently ignored.
10064
10065 The following properties are recognized:
10066
10067 `:enable FORM'.
10068
10069 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
10070 or disabled.
10071
10072 `:visible FORM'
10073
10074 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
10075
10076 `:filter FUNCTION'
10077
10078 FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
10079 FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
10080 used instead of BINDING to display this item.
10081
10082 `:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
10083
10084 TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
10085 and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
10086
10087 `:image IMAGES'
10088
10089 IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
10090 image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
10091 meaning of each of the four elements:
10092
10093 Index Use when item is
10094 ----------------------------------------
10095 0 enabled and selected
10096 1 enabled and deselected
10097 2 disabled and selected
10098 3 disabled and deselected
10099
10100 If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
10101 algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
10102
10103 `:help HELP-STRING'.
10104
10105 Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
10106 is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
10107
10108 The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
10109 toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
10110 to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
10111 menu bar.
10112
10113 The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
10114 dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
10115 buffer-locally to override the global map.
10116
10117 *** Tool-bar-related variables.
10118
10119 If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
10120 resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
10121 than 1/4 of the frame's size.
10122
10123 If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
10124 raised when the mouse moves over them.
10125
10126 You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
10127 `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
10128 pixels, or a pair of integers (X . Y) specifying horizontal and
10129 vertical margins . Default is 1.
10130
10131 You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
10132 `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
10133
10134 *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
10135
10136 You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
10137 a tool bar item. If
10138
10139 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
10140 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
10141 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
10142
10143 is the original tool bar item definition, then
10144
10145 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
10146
10147 makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
10148 item.
10149
10150 ** Mode line changes.
10151
10152 *** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
10153
10154 The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
10155 that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
10156 a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
10157
10158 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
10159 a `local-map' text property.
10160
10161 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
10162 that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
10163
10164 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
10165 is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
10166 `local-map' property.
10167
10168 The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
10169 properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
10170 example.
10171
10172 *** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
10173 evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
10174
10175 *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
10176 variable mode-line-format to nil.
10177
10178 *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
10179
10180 This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
10181 `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
10182 completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
10183 `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
10184 line.
10185
10186 The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
10187 `header-line'.
10188
10189 The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
10190 position in the header-line.
10191
10192 ** Text property `display'
10193
10194 The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
10195 replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
10196 also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
10197 the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
10198 below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
10199
10200 *** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
10201
10202 To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
10203 text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
10204
10205 If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
10206 marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
10207 the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
10208 is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
10209 simpler form STRING as property value.
10210
10211 *** Variable width and height spaces
10212
10213 To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
10214 specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
10215 `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
10216 area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
10217 marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
10218 displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
10219 simpler form STRETCH as property value.
10220
10221 The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
10222 PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
10223 properties described below.
10224
10225 The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
10226 characters having the `display' property.
10227
10228 - :width WIDTH
10229
10230 Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
10231 character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
10232
10233 - :relative-width FACTOR
10234
10235 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
10236 first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
10237 same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
10238 width of that character by FACTOR.
10239
10240 - :align-to HPOS
10241
10242 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
10243 value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
10244
10245 Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
10246
10247 - :height HEIGHT
10248
10249 Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
10250 normal line height.
10251
10252 - :relative-height FACTOR
10253
10254 The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
10255 of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
10256
10257 - :ascent ASCENT
10258
10259 Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
10260 used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
10261 baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
10262 equal to 100.
10263
10264 You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
10265
10266 *** Images
10267
10268 A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
10269 . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
10270 in the display, the characters having this display specification in
10271 their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
10272 the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
10273 `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
10274 area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
10275 the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
10276 as display specification.
10277
10278 *** Other display properties
10279
10280 - (space-width FACTOR)
10281
10282 Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
10283 should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
10284 integer or float.
10285
10286 - (height HEIGHT)
10287
10288 Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
10289
10290 If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
10291 means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
10292 the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
10293 ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
10294 a font is available counts as a step.
10295
10296 If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
10297 as tall as the frame's default font.
10298
10299 If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
10300 height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
10301
10302 Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
10303 `height' bound to the current specified font height.
10304
10305 - (raise FACTOR)
10306
10307 FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
10308 font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
10309 raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
10310 amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
10311 `height' subproperty.
10312
10313 *** Conditional display properties
10314
10315 All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
10316 has the form `(when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC applies
10317 only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated. During the
10318 evaluation, `object' is bound to the string or buffer having the
10319 conditional display property; `position' and `buffer-position' are
10320 bound to the position within `object' and the buffer position where
10321 the display property was found, respectively. Both positions can be
10322 different when object is a string.
10323
10324 The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
10325 `(when t . SPEC)'.
10326
10327 ** New menu separator types.
10328
10329 Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
10330 item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
10331 treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
10332 to specify other menu separator types.
10333
10334 - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
10335
10336 No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
10337 separator occurs.
10338
10339 - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
10340
10341 A single line in the menu's foreground color.
10342
10343 - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
10344
10345 A double line in the menu's foreground color.
10346
10347 - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
10348
10349 A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
10350
10351 - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
10352
10353 A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
10354
10355 - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
10356
10357 A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the form
10358 displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
10359
10360 - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
10361
10362 A single line with 3D raised appearance.
10363
10364 - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
10365
10366 A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
10367
10368 - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
10369
10370 A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
10371
10372 - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
10373
10374 Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
10375
10376 - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
10377
10378 Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
10379
10380 - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
10381
10382 Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
10383
10384 - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
10385
10386 Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
10387
10388 Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
10389 the corresponding single-line separators.
10390
10391 ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
10392
10393 The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
10394 `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
10395 Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
10396 that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
10397 default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
10398 default background is the background color of the frame, and the
10399 default foreground is black.
10400
10401 The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
10402 (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
10403 `ScrollBarBackground').
10404
10405 Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
10406 settings for scroll bar colors.
10407
10408 ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
10409 display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
10410
10411 ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
10412 starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
10413 on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
10414 line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
10415 the original window start.
10416
10417 ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
10418 `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
10419 now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
10420
10421 ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
10422
10423 A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
10424 `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
10425 windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
10426 other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
10427
10428 The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
10429 fixed-width and fixed-height.
10430
10431 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
10432
10433 A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
10434 fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
10435 window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
10436 change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
10437 temporarily to nil, for example
10438
10439 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
10440 (enlarge-window 10))
10441
10442 Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
10443 or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
10444
10445 ** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
10446 terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
10447 to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
10448 overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
10449 horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
10450 support a vertical-bar cursor).
10451
10452
10453 \f
10454 * Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
10455
10456 ** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
10457 input.
10458
10459 ** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
10460
10461 ** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
10462
10463 ** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
10464 only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
10465 exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
10466 (e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
10467 (e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
10468
10469 ** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
10470 been added.
10471
10472 \f
10473 * Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
10474
10475 ** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
10476
10477
10478 \f
10479 * Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
10480
10481 ** Not new, but not mentioned before:
10482 M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
10483 \f
10484 * Changes in Emacs 20.4
10485
10486 ** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
10487
10488 You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
10489 Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
10490 `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
10491
10492 If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
10493 is the one that is used.
10494
10495 ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
10496 the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
10497 Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
10498 separate from the command's regular output.
10499 Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
10500 says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
10501 In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
10502 the buffer name.
10503
10504 When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
10505 output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
10506 it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
10507 cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
10508
10509 ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
10510 the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
10511 is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
10512 created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
10513
10514 ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
10515 example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
10516 match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
10517 quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
10518
10519 ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
10520 now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
10521 if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
10522 they never ignore case.
10523
10524 ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
10525 under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
10526 applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
10527 of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
10528 just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
10529 convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
10530 part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
10531
10532 If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
10533 the same format that was used in the file before.
10534
10535 You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
10536 `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
10537
10538 ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
10539 renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
10540 This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
10541
10542 ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
10543 The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
10544 buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
10545 your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
10546 is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
10547 end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
10548 Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
10549
10550 The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
10551 eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
10552 control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
10553 format. You can now customize these variables.
10554
10555 ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
10556 filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
10557 filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
10558 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
10559
10560 ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
10561 in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
10562 windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
10563
10564 ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
10565 dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
10566 doesn't have any effect.
10567
10568 ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
10569 not one per buffer.
10570
10571 ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
10572 use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
10573 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
10574
10575 ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
10576 To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
10577 `auto-show-mode' command.
10578
10579 ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
10580 avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
10581 versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
10582 choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
10583 occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
10584
10585 ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
10586 cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
10587
10588 ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
10589 character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
10590 feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
10591
10592 ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
10593 the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
10594 interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
10595 and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
10596
10597 ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
10598
10599 The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
10600 that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
10601 one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
10602 codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
10603 set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
10604
10605 Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
10606 from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
10607
10608 IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
10609 equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
10610 a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
10611 `?' on other systems.
10612
10613 IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
10614 feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
10615 Unix.
10616
10617 Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
10618 current codepage when it starts.
10619
10620 ** Mail changes
10621
10622 *** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
10623 `mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
10624 appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
10625 non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
10626 MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
10627 headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
10628 latin-1:
10629
10630 MIME-version: 1.0
10631 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
10632 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
10633
10634 *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
10635 default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
10636 default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
10637 sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
10638 buffer-file-coding-system.
10639
10640 You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
10641 sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
10642 mail.
10643
10644 *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
10645 if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
10646 Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
10647 list of possible coding systems.
10648
10649 ** CC Mode changes
10650
10651 *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
10652 modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
10653 longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
10654 docstring for details.
10655
10656 *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
10657 symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
10658 found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
10659 prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
10660 lineup functions use this feature currently.
10661
10662 *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
10663 "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
10664
10665 *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
10666 "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
10667
10668 *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
10669 from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
10670 symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
10671 c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
10672 anonymous classes.
10673
10674 *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
10675 syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
10676
10677 *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
10678 inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
10679 support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
10680 function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
10681
10682 *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
10683 (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
10684 brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
10685 c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
10686 (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
10687
10688 *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
10689
10690 *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
10691
10692 *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
10693 for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
10694
10695 *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
10696
10697 *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
10698 associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
10699 This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
10700 circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
10701 class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
10702
10703 ** Gnus changes.
10704
10705 *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
10706 added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
10707 Gnus manual for the full story.
10708
10709 *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
10710 before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
10711 group, which is created automatically.
10712
10713 *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
10714 values.
10715
10716 *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
10717
10718 *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
10719 outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
10720
10721 *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
10722 `C-u C-c C-c'.
10723
10724 *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
10725
10726 *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
10727 re-highlighting of the article buffer.
10728
10729 *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
10730
10731 *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
10732 Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
10733
10734 *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
10735 `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
10736
10737 *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
10738 control over simplification.
10739
10740 *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
10741
10742 *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
10743 limit.
10744
10745 *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
10746
10747 *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
10748
10749 *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
10750 If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
10751 rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
10752
10753 *** Canceling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
10754 `a' forces normal posting method.
10755
10756 *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
10757 -- `W d'.
10758
10759 *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
10760 to a non-nil value.
10761
10762 *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
10763 where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
10764
10765 *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
10766 has been added.
10767
10768 *** A history of where mails have been split is available.
10769
10770 *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
10771
10772 *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
10773 `gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
10774
10775 *** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
10776 `message-cite-original-without-signature'.
10777
10778 *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
10779
10780 *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
10781 been added.
10782
10783 *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
10784 `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
10785
10786 *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
10787 updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
10788
10789 *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
10790
10791 *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
10792
10793 *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
10794
10795 ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
10796
10797 *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
10798 options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
10799 nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
10800
10801 *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
10802 TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
10803 of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
10804 TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
10805 can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
10806
10807 *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
10808 All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
10809 but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
10810 the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
10811
10812 *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
10813 the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
10814 buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
10815 mismatch.
10816
10817 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
10818
10819 *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
10820 file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
10821
10822 *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
10823 lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
10824 characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
10825 removed from the label.
10826
10827 *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
10828 a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
10829
10830 *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
10831 customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
10832
10833 *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
10834 `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
10835 expressions.
10836
10837 *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
10838
10839 ** New/deleted modes and packages
10840
10841 *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
10842 SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
10843
10844 *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
10845 editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
10846 SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
10847
10848 *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
10849 this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
10850 Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
10851 \f
10852 * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
10853
10854 ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
10855 This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
10856 conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
10857 and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
10858 check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
10859
10860 The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
10861 Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
10862 distribution when the config.bat script is run.
10863
10864 ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
10865 MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
10866 controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
10867 directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
10868 Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
10869 on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
10870 string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
10871 program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
10872 printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
10873
10874 ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
10875 output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
10876 available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
10877 input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
10878 temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
10879 program.
10880
10881 An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
10882 and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
10883 programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
10884 automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
10885 as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
10886 ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
10887
10888 ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
10889 a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
10890 MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
10891 was not documented clearly before.
10892
10893 ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
10894 This includes Tetris and Snake.
10895 \f
10896 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
10897
10898 ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
10899 return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
10900 They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
10901 meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
10902
10903 ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
10904 WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
10905 and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
10906
10907 ** Changes in the file-attributes function.
10908
10909 *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
10910 It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
10911
10912 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
10913 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
10914 integers.
10915
10916 ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
10917 files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
10918 arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
10919 file names and attributes are returned.
10920
10921 ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
10922 sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
10923 accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its attributes.
10924 It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
10925 returns the result.
10926
10927 ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
10928 to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
10929
10930 ** New functions for base64 conversion:
10931
10932 The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
10933 into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
10934 performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
10935 optionally.
10936
10937 Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
10938 job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
10939
10940 **
10941 The new function process-running-child-p
10942 will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
10943 terminal to its own child process.
10944
10945 ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
10946 when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
10947 to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
10948 itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
10949
10950 ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
10951 be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
10952
10953 ** easymenu.el now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
10954 :included is an alias for :visible.
10955
10956 easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
10957 easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
10958 to move or copy menu entries.
10959
10960 ** Multibyte editing changes
10961
10962 *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
10963 an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
10964 make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
10965 work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
10966 char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
10967 (setq char (sref str idx)
10968 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
10969 The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
10970
10971 If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
10972 (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
10973 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
10974
10975 *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
10976 region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
10977 deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
10978
10979 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibited
10980
10981 This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
10982 across the boundary.
10983
10984 *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
10985 `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
10986 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
10987 contains 8-bit characters.
10988 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
10989 contains invalid characters.
10990
10991 *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
10992 text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
10993 preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
10994 text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
10995 way.
10996
10997 *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
10998 If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
10999 end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
11000 prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
11001
11002 *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
11003 compose Thai characters in a string.
11004
11005 ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
11006 argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
11007 for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
11008 menus should always use the third argument.
11009
11010 ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
11011 read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
11012 arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
11013 input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
11014
11015 ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
11016 of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
11017 programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
11018 inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
11019
11020 ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
11021 the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
11022 returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
11023 echo area contents.
11024
11025 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
11026
11027 ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
11028 NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
11029 requested feature cannot be loaded.
11030
11031 ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
11032 foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
11033 means to clear out that attribute.
11034
11035 ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
11036 gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
11037
11038 ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
11039 read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
11040 unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
11041 end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
11042
11043 ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
11044 the gap of the current buffer.
11045
11046 ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
11047 to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
11048 current buffer.
11049
11050 ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
11051 facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
11052 These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
11053 it back in after any modifications have been made.
11054 \f
11055 * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
11056
11057 ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
11058 the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
11059 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
11060 directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
11061 subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
11062
11063 Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
11064 names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
11065 Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
11066 which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
11067 these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
11068
11069 Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
11070 starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
11071 time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
11072
11073 This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
11074 Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
11075 to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
11076 subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
11077 `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
11078 results.
11079
11080 ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
11081 GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
11082 that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
11083 fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
11084 \f
11085 * Changes in Emacs 20.3
11086
11087 ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
11088 including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
11089 it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
11090 perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
11091
11092 ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
11093 specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
11094 region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
11095 further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
11096 command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
11097 within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
11098 are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
11099 region.
11100
11101 In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
11102 selective undo.
11103
11104 ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
11105 unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
11106 buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
11107 effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
11108 Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
11109
11110 The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
11111 though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
11112 -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
11113 load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
11114
11115 ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
11116 no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
11117 enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
11118 something that most users not do.
11119
11120 ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
11121 operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
11122 The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
11123 applications.
11124
11125 C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
11126 pasting operations.
11127
11128 ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
11129 setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
11130 like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
11131 printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
11132 `ps-printer-name'.
11133
11134 ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
11135 minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
11136 any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
11137 except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
11138 incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
11139 hits a new word.
11140
11141 Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
11142 Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
11143 to be confused by TeX commands.
11144
11145 You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
11146 correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
11147 clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
11148 of various alternative replacements and actions.
11149
11150 Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
11151 the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
11152 corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
11153 alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
11154 flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
11155
11156 Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
11157 flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
11158
11159 ** Changes in input method usage.
11160
11161 Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
11162 the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
11163 respectively.
11164
11165 You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
11166
11167 If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
11168 of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
11169
11170 The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
11171 that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
11172
11173 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
11174
11175 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
11176
11177 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
11178 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
11179
11180 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
11181 given in the following case:
11182 o When you are using a complex input method.
11183 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
11184
11185 If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
11186 input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
11187 and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
11188 setting it to t is helpful.
11189
11190 The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
11191
11192 In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
11193 keys:
11194 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
11195 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
11196 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
11197 These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
11198 environment.
11199
11200 ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
11201 names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
11202 minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
11203 get
11204
11205 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
11206
11207 which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
11208
11209 Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
11210 Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
11211
11212 ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
11213 at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
11214 its owner and group.
11215
11216 ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
11217 Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
11218
11219 ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
11220 contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
11221
11222 ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
11223 which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
11224 in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
11225 by the left edge of the rectangle.
11226
11227 ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
11228 increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
11229 C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
11230 for writing keyboard macros.
11231
11232 ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
11233 files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
11234 frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
11235 the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
11236 additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
11237 info.
11238
11239 ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
11240
11241 ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
11242 query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
11243 contents only.
11244
11245 ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
11246 confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
11247 the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
11248 says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
11249
11250 ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
11251 non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
11252 literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
11253
11254 ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
11255 now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
11256 Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
11257 inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
11258
11259 ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
11260 failure if the command produces no output.
11261
11262 ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
11263 manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
11264 the mouse.
11265
11266 ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
11267 mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
11268 function and variable names.
11269
11270 ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
11271 reading specific files. This has higher priority than
11272 file-coding-system-alist.
11273
11274 ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
11275 t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
11276 converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
11277 the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
11278 according to the current fontset.
11279
11280 ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
11281
11282 The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
11283 that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
11284 nonascii-insert-offset.
11285
11286 For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
11287 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
11288 nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
11289 characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
11290
11291 ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
11292 an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
11293
11294 ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
11295 letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
11296
11297 ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
11298 are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
11299 command keys.
11300
11301 ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
11302 user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
11303
11304 Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
11305 user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
11306 all variables that have documentation.
11307
11308 ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
11309 shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
11310 that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
11311 minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
11312 it should show; the default is 20.
11313
11314 Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
11315 the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
11316 of your input.
11317
11318 ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
11319 all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
11320 recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
11321 argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
11322 the customizable options which were changed since that version.
11323 Newly added options are included as well.
11324
11325 If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
11326 then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
11327 for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
11328
11329 This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
11330 Customize menu.
11331
11332 ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
11333 the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
11334
11335 ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
11336 buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
11337 invoked.
11338
11339 ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
11340 that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
11341 The default is 1.
11342
11343 ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
11344 syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
11345 new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
11346 (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
11347 sensibly.
11348
11349 ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
11350
11351 ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
11352 value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
11353 two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
11354
11355 ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
11356 reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
11357 for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
11358 every night.
11359
11360 ** Desktop changes
11361
11362 *** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
11363 the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
11364
11365 *** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
11366 and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
11367
11368 ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
11369 read and post multi-lingual articles.
11370
11371 ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
11372 doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
11373 be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
11374 outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
11375 the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
11376 made invisible again.
11377
11378 ** Mail reading and sending changes
11379
11380 *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
11381 the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
11382 changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
11383 toggle.
11384
11385 *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
11386 now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
11387 summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
11388 the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
11389 rmail-default-body-file.
11390
11391 *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
11392 longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
11393 handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
11394
11395 *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
11396 it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
11397 is evaluated to insert the signature.
11398
11399 *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
11400 outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
11401 handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
11402 putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
11403 transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
11404 especially interested in trying feedmail.
11405
11406 feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
11407 feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
11408 provided by feedmail are:
11409
11410 **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
11411 stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
11412 there is also a queue for draft messages
11413
11414 **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
11415 be prompted for confirmation
11416
11417 **** does smart filling of address headers
11418
11419 **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
11420 the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
11421 can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
11422
11423 **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
11424 the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
11425 /usr/lib/sendmail, and Emacs Lisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
11426 function for something else (10-20 lines of Lisp code).
11427
11428 ** Dired changes
11429
11430 *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
11431 files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
11432
11433 *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
11434 run Dired on the directory name at point.
11435
11436 *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
11437 files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
11438 for a specified regexp.
11439
11440 ** VC Changes
11441
11442 *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
11443 conveniently.
11444
11445 *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
11446 faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
11447 Dired.
11448
11449 VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
11450 directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
11451 listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
11452 currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
11453
11454 You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
11455 then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
11456 vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
11457 control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
11458 on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
11459
11460 All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
11461 is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
11462 `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
11463 the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
11464 `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
11465
11466 The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
11467 toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
11468 VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
11469 `* l', to mark all files currently locked.
11470
11471 Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
11472 ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
11473 command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
11474
11475 *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
11476 file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
11477 session to resolve them.
11478
11479 Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
11480 resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
11481 contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
11482 uses as well).
11483
11484 *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
11485 command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
11486 you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
11487 either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
11488 branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
11489 If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
11490 using ediff.
11491
11492 ** Changes in Font Lock
11493
11494 *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
11495 are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
11496 use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
11497 unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
11498 compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
11499
11500 ** Frame name display changes
11501
11502 *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
11503 frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
11504 raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
11505 when many frames are invisible or iconified.
11506
11507 *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
11508 frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
11509 menu.
11510
11511 ** Comint (subshell) changes
11512
11513 *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
11514 subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
11515 with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
11516
11517 *** There are new commands in Comint mode.
11518
11519 C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
11520 that is, the line after the last line you got.
11521 You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
11522
11523 C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
11524 send the current line together with the following line, when you send
11525 the following line.
11526
11527 C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
11528 which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
11529 previously sent input.
11530
11531 C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
11532 it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
11533 as the search string.
11534
11535 *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
11536 automatically in compilation-mode windows.
11537
11538 ** C mode changes
11539
11540 *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
11541 and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
11542 assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
11543 definition.
11544
11545 *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
11546 (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
11547 Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
11548 style is still the default however.
11549
11550 *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
11551
11552 *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
11553 are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
11554 them. They do not have key bindings by default.
11555
11556 *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
11557 and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
11558
11559 *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
11560 namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
11561
11562 *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
11563 makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
11564
11565 *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
11566 c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
11567
11568 *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
11569 should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
11570 package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
11571 variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
11572
11573 ** Changes to hippie-expand.
11574
11575 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
11576 non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
11577 which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
11578
11579 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
11580 non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
11581 expanding dynamically.
11582
11583 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
11584 non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
11585
11586 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
11587 non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
11588 this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
11589 expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
11590
11591 *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
11592
11593 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
11594
11595 *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
11596 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
11597 automatic key generation. This replaces variable
11598 bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
11599 against the first word in the title.
11600
11601 *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
11602 capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
11603 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
11604 lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
11605 lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
11606 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
11607
11608 *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
11609 generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
11610 replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
11611 bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
11612
11613 ** Changes in vcursor.el.
11614
11615 *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
11616 and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
11617 variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
11618 entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
11619 `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
11620 in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
11621
11622 *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
11623 Editing group once the package is loaded.
11624
11625 *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
11626 generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
11627 vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behavior.
11628
11629 *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
11630 vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
11631
11632 ** Ispell changes.
11633
11634 *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
11635 buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
11636 are identified by syntax tables in effect.
11637
11638 *** Generic region skipping implemented.
11639 A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
11640 and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
11641 defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
11642 include:
11643
11644 o URLs are automatically skipped
11645 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
11646
11647 *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
11648
11649 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
11650
11651 RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
11652 large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
11653 re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
11654 section `Optimizations' in the manual.
11655
11656 *** New recursive parser.
11657
11658 The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
11659 entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
11660 recursive parser scans the individual files.
11661
11662 *** Parsing only part of a document.
11663
11664 Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
11665 partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
11666 the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
11667
11668 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
11669
11670 *** Storing parsing information in a file.
11671
11672 This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
11673
11674 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
11675
11676 *** Using multiple selection buffers
11677
11678 If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
11679 for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
11680
11681 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
11682
11683 *** References to external documents.
11684
11685 The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
11686 documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
11687 documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
11688 macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
11689 RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
11690 the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
11691 The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
11692
11693 *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
11694
11695 The built-in command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
11696 and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
11697
11698 Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
11699 the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
11700
11701 *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
11702
11703 The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
11704 buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
11705
11706 *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
11707
11708 The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
11709 contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
11710 `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
11711 have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
11712 enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
11713 at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
11714 more.
11715
11716 *** Support for the varioref package
11717
11718 The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
11719
11720 *** New hooks
11721
11722 Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
11723 and citations are created. These hooks are
11724 `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
11725 `reftex-format-cite-function'.
11726
11727 *** Citations outside LaTeX
11728
11729 The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
11730 a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
11731
11732 *** Short context is no longer fontified.
11733
11734 The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
11735 fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
11736 fontified, use
11737
11738 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
11739
11740 ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
11741 With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
11742 the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
11743 directories that contain the same file name.
11744
11745 Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
11746 Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
11747 file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
11748 Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
11749 have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
11750 names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
11751 directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
11752 directory.
11753
11754 ** New modes and packages
11755
11756 *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
11757 It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
11758 it, but some do not.
11759
11760 *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
11761 code.
11762
11763 *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
11764 current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
11765 around in a buffer.
11766
11767 Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
11768
11769 *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
11770 uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
11771 be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
11772 established system of notation similar to Chess.
11773
11774 *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
11775 documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
11776 guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
11777
11778 *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
11779 available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
11780 system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc.); others are implementations of
11781 simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
11782 functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
11783 the like.
11784
11785 *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
11786 identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
11787
11788 *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
11789 within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
11790 used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
11791 the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
11792
11793 *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
11794
11795 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
11796 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
11797 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
11798 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
11799 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc.)
11800 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
11801 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
11802 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
11803 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
11804 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
11805 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
11806
11807 Platform-specific modes:
11808
11809 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
11810 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
11811 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
11812 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
11813 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
11814 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
11815 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
11816 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
11817 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
11818 \f
11819 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
11820
11821 ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
11822 use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
11823 That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
11824 Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
11825
11826 Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
11827 you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
11828 consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
11829
11830 ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
11831 and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
11832 specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
11833 searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
11834
11835 ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
11836 multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
11837 character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
11838 environment.
11839
11840 ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
11841 take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
11842 string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
11843 current input method for reading this one event.
11844
11845 ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
11846 now control whether to output certain characters as
11847 backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
11848 non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
11849 characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
11850 in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
11851 \f
11852 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
11853
11854 ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
11855 of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
11856
11857 ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
11858 in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
11859 always increases point by 1.
11860
11861 The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
11862 considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
11863
11864 See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
11865
11866 ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
11867 Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
11868 default value changed. For example,
11869
11870 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
11871 :type 'integer
11872 :group 'foo
11873 :version "20.3")
11874
11875 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
11876 :version "20.3")
11877
11878 If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
11879 default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
11880 is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
11881 `:version' in the top level group.
11882
11883 This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
11884
11885 ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
11886 starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
11887
11888 However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
11889 symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
11890 support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
11891 to themselves.
11892
11893 If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
11894 this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
11895 values whatever.
11896
11897 ** There is a new debugger command, R.
11898 It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
11899 in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
11900
11901 ** Frame-local variables.
11902
11903 You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
11904 the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
11905 local bindings for that variable.
11906
11907 These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
11908 frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
11909 modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
11910 parameter name.
11911
11912 Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
11913 Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
11914 active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
11915 that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
11916
11917 It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
11918 clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
11919 very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
11920 through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
11921
11922 ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
11923 "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
11924 evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
11925 makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
11926 See the documentation in sregex.el.
11927
11928 ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
11929 is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
11930 parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
11931 The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
11932
11933 ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
11934 If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
11935
11936 ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
11937 known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
11938 define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
11939
11940 ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
11941 when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
11942 it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
11943 history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
11944
11945 The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
11946 return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
11947 empty input.
11948
11949 ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
11950 for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
11951 `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
11952 Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
11953 `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
11954
11955 ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
11956 echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
11957 a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
11958 default password to use if the user enters nothing.
11959
11960 ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
11961 specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
11962 function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
11963 place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
11964 non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
11965
11966 ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
11967 If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
11968 up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
11969 end of the window, even if this requires computation.
11970
11971 ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
11972 which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
11973 If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
11974
11975 ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
11976 holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
11977 was directed to display this buffer.
11978
11979 ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
11980 with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
11981 describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
11982 other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
11983 set-window-configuration.
11984
11985 ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
11986 window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
11987 positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
11988 windows and the choice of buffers to display.
11989
11990 ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
11991 override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
11992 look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
11993
11994 If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
11995 non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
11996 map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
11997
11998 minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
11999 and it is meant to be set by major modes.
12000
12001 ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
12002 except that it discards all text properties from the result.
12003
12004 ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
12005 USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
12006 floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
12007
12008 ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
12009 to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
12010 in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
12011 it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
12012
12013 ** Menu changes
12014
12015 *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
12016 keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
12017 better supported.
12018
12019 The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
12020 a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
12021 you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
12022 can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
12023 then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
12024
12025 *** A new format for menu items is supported.
12026
12027 In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
12028 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
12029 defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
12030 starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
12031
12032 The format is:
12033 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
12034 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
12035 where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
12036 string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
12037 The supported properties include
12038
12039 :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
12040 item is enabled.
12041 :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
12042 item should appear in the menu.
12043 :filter FILTER-FN
12044 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
12045 which will be REAL-BINDING.
12046 It should return a binding to use instead.
12047 :keys DESCRIPTION
12048 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
12049 binding for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
12050 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
12051 :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
12052 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
12053 keyboard binding.
12054 :key-sequence nil
12055 This means that the command normally has no
12056 keyboard equivalent.
12057 :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
12058 :button (TYPE . SELECTED)
12059 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
12060 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
12061 value says whether this button is currently selected.
12062
12063 Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
12064 Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
12065
12066 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
12067
12068 ** New event types
12069
12070 *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
12071 mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
12072 corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
12073 which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
12074
12075 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
12076
12077 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
12078 same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
12079 indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
12080 negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
12081 the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
12082 forward, away from the user.
12083
12084 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
12085
12086 *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
12087 files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
12088 and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
12089 filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
12090 loaded into Emacs. The format is:
12091
12092 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
12093
12094 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
12095 same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
12096 that were dragged and dropped.
12097
12098 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
12099
12100 ** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
12101
12102 *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
12103 any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
12104 to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
12105
12106 *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
12107 can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
12108 that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
12109
12110 *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
12111 in Emacs 19 and before.
12112
12113 The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
12114 The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
12115
12116 *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
12117 buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
12118 unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
12119 representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
12120
12121 This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
12122 as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
12123 viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
12124 one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
12125 will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
12126
12127 This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
12128 representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
12129 (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
12130 consistent with the new representation.
12131
12132 *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
12133 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
12134 about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
12135 however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
12136
12137 The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
12138 nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
12139 using the table nonascii-translation-table.
12140
12141 *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
12142 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
12143 representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
12144
12145 The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
12146 loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
12147 is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
12148
12149 *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
12150 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
12151
12152 *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
12153 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
12154
12155 *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
12156 portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
12157 so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
12158 You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
12159
12160 *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
12161 it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
12162
12163 *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
12164 convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
12165 buffer or string being searched.
12166
12167 One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
12168 [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
12169 searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
12170 searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
12171 obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
12172 you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
12173 expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
12174
12175 *** Structure of coding system changed.
12176
12177 All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
12178 by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
12179 which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
12180 as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
12181 vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
12182 your own alias name of a coding system by the function
12183 define-coding-system-alias.
12184
12185 The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
12186 the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
12187 access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
12188 pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
12189 character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
12190 safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
12191 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
12192 `iso-8859-1'.
12193
12194 Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
12195 The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
12196 coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
12197 (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
12198
12199 Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
12200 also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
12201 are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
12202 the other character sets and read it back correctly.
12203
12204 *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
12205 proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
12206 This function requires a user interaction.
12207
12208 *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
12209 find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
12210 select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
12211 systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
12212 a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
12213 select-safe-coding-system.
12214
12215 *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
12216 decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
12217 last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
12218 was done.
12219
12220 *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
12221 used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
12222 coding systems used by some specific language environment.
12223
12224 *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
12225 return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
12226 characters are found, they now return a list of single element
12227 `undecided' or its subsidiaries.
12228
12229 *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
12230 coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
12231 coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
12232 converted.
12233
12234 *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
12235 coding system for communicating with other X clients.
12236
12237 *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
12238 character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
12239 character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
12240 each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
12241 either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
12242 range of characters.
12243
12244 *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
12245 Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
12246
12247 *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
12248 in the current buffer at position POS.
12249
12250 *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
12251 input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
12252 function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
12253 character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
12254 event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
12255 binding input-method-function to nil.
12256
12257 The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
12258 method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
12259 input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
12260 the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
12261 not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
12262
12263 The input method function is not called when reading the second and
12264 subsequent events of a key sequence.
12265
12266 *** You can customize any language environment by using
12267 set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
12268
12269 The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
12270 customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
12271 instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
12272 environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
12273 exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
12274 \f
12275 * Changes in Emacs 20.1
12276
12277 ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
12278 options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
12279 at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
12280 tree structure.
12281
12282 M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
12283 user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
12284
12285 With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
12286 session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
12287 in your .emacs file.)
12288
12289 ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
12290 You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
12291
12292 ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
12293 This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
12294
12295 ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
12296 immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
12297 kills the region.
12298
12299 The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
12300 delete the character before point, as usual.
12301
12302 ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
12303 on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
12304 by setting search-highlight to nil.)
12305
12306 ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
12307 insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
12308 the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
12309 onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
12310 history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
12311 past.)
12312
12313 ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
12314 This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
12315 in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
12316 TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
12317 makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
12318
12319 As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
12320 and is an alias for it.
12321
12322 If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
12323 use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
12324
12325 ** Scrolling changes
12326
12327 *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
12328 position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
12329
12330 In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
12331 on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
12332 where it started.
12333
12334 *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
12335 move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
12336 screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
12337 does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
12338
12339 *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
12340 top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
12341 comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
12342 recenters the window.
12343
12344 ** International character set support (MULE)
12345
12346 Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
12347 including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
12348 Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
12349 Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
12350 features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
12351 MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
12352
12353 Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
12354 coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
12355 character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
12356 variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
12357 into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
12358
12359 Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
12360 generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
12361 supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
12362 language, to make it possible to type them.
12363
12364 The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
12365 character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
12366
12367 The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
12368 to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
12369
12370 You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
12371
12372 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
12373
12374 Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
12375 characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
12376 argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
12377 already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
12378 characters for their work until they want to change.
12379
12380 *** Input methods
12381
12382 An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
12383 specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
12384 has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
12385 the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
12386 support several input methods.
12387
12388 The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
12389 another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
12390 work.
12391
12392 A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
12393 characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
12394 composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
12395 consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
12396 sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
12397 letter.
12398
12399 The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
12400 by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
12401 First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
12402 marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
12403 mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
12404
12405 None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
12406 they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
12407 phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
12408 converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
12409
12410 Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
12411 word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
12412 typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
12413 the first guess is wrong.
12414
12415 *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
12416 turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
12417
12418 If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
12419 byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
12420 they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
12421 the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
12422
12423 However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
12424 use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
12425 includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
12426 translate automatically to and from either one.
12427
12428 *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
12429
12430 Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
12431 file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
12432 sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
12433 what you want.
12434
12435 If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
12436 example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
12437 system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
12438 multibyte characters in that buffer.
12439
12440 If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
12441 character conversion as well.
12442
12443 *** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
12444
12445 A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
12446 Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
12447 requires using many fonts.
12448
12449 Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
12450 collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
12451
12452 A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
12453 the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
12454 have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
12455 you would use a font.
12456
12457 If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
12458 specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
12459 display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
12460
12461 The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
12462 (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
12463 characters).
12464
12465 *** Defining fontsets.
12466
12467 Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
12468 chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
12469 with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
12470
12471 Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
12472 of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
12473 `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
12474 standard fontset are created automatically.
12475
12476 If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
12477 argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
12478 FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
12479 with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
12480 name is `fontset-startup'.
12481
12482 Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
12483 The resource value should have this form:
12484 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
12485 FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
12486 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
12487 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
12488 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
12489 The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
12490 of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
12491 CHARSET-NAME should be the name of a character set, and FONT-NAME
12492 should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
12493
12494 Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
12495 last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
12496 You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
12497
12498 For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
12499 font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
12500 following resource,
12501 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
12502 the font for ASCII is generated as below:
12503 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
12504 Here is the substitution rule:
12505 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
12506 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
12507 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
12508 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
12509 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
12510
12511 The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
12512 fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
12513 that function explicitly to create a fontset.
12514
12515 With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
12516 like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
12517 name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
12518 fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
12519 fontsets.
12520
12521 *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
12522 defaults for a particular choice of language.
12523
12524 Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
12525 method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
12526 visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
12527 already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
12528 language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
12529 system for new files that you create.
12530
12531 It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
12532 set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
12533 whole Emacs session.
12534
12535 For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
12536 chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
12537 with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
12538
12539 *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
12540 specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
12541 specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
12542 the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
12543 coding systems that Emacs supports.
12544
12545 *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
12546 lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
12547 This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
12548 After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
12549 is used for *the immediately following command*.
12550
12551 So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
12552 write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
12553
12554 If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
12555 then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
12556
12557 For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
12558 visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
12559
12560 *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
12561 construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
12562 to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
12563 specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
12564 of the file.
12565
12566 *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
12567 the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
12568 code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
12569 translated into that character code.
12570
12571 This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
12572 various countries to support the languages of those countries.
12573
12574 By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
12575
12576 *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
12577 the coding system for keyboard input.
12578
12579 Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
12580 with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
12581 some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
12582
12583 By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
12584
12585 Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
12586 input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
12587 translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
12588 to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
12589 designed to work with terminals.
12590
12591 *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
12592 specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
12593 This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
12594 has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
12595 translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
12596 in the corresponding buffer.
12597
12598 By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
12599
12600 *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
12601 to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
12602 It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
12603
12604 *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
12605 an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
12606 command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
12607 want to use.
12608
12609 C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
12610 method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
12611
12612 *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
12613 layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
12614 remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
12615 which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
12616
12617 *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
12618 the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
12619 related information.
12620
12621 *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
12622 HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
12623 scripts.
12624
12625 *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
12626 information about the support for a particular language.
12627 You specify the language as an argument.
12628
12629 *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
12630 the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
12631 first dash.
12632
12633 A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
12634 (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
12635 whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
12636 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
12637
12638 A alternativnyj (Russian)
12639 B big5 (Chinese)
12640 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
12641 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
12642 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
12643 E euc-japan (Japanese)
12644 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
12645 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
12646 K euc-korea (Korean)
12647 R koi8 (Russian)
12648 Q tibetan
12649 S shift_jis (Japanese)
12650 T lao
12651 T tis620 (Thai)
12652 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
12653 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
12654 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
12655 v viqr (Vietnamese)
12656 z hz (Chinese)
12657
12658 When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
12659 two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
12660 coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
12661 keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
12662
12663 *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
12664 conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
12665
12666 When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
12667 into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
12668 rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
12669 Rmail files themselves.
12670
12671 *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
12672 conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
12673
12674 Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
12675 for sending mail:
12676
12677 - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
12678 - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
12679 - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
12680 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
12681 - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
12682
12683 *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
12684 to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
12685 Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
12686 translations.
12687
12688 ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
12689 of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
12690 insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
12691 without any conversion.
12692
12693 ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
12694 You can now specify any number of octal digits.
12695 RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
12696 any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
12697
12698 ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
12699 functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
12700
12701 Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
12702 Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
12703
12704 Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
12705 mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
12706
12707 ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
12708 complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
12709 in the buffer before point.
12710
12711 With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
12712 symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
12713 you are using.
12714
12715 With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
12716 just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
12717
12718 ** File locking works with NFS now.
12719
12720 The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
12721 in the same directory as FILENAME.
12722
12723 This means that collision detection between two different machines now
12724 works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
12725 can become a bottleneck.
12726
12727 The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
12728 does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
12729 create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
12730 file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
12731 rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
12732 so useful that the change is worth while.
12733
12734 When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
12735 are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
12736 collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
12737 tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
12738
12739 ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
12740 it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
12741 show-paren-mode.
12742
12743 ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
12744 selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
12745 delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
12746
12747 ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
12748 within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
12749 complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
12750
12751 ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
12752 it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
12753 set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
12754
12755 ** Changes in View mode.
12756
12757 *** Several new commands are available in View mode.
12758 Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
12759
12760 *** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
12761 view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
12762
12763 *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
12764 previous state.
12765
12766 *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
12767 scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
12768
12769 *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
12770 non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
12771 not just the selected window.
12772
12773 *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
12774 read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
12775 turns View mode on or off.
12776
12777 *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
12778 how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
12779 delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
12780
12781 ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
12782 now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
12783
12784 ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
12785 has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
12786 presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
12787 which version to compare with.
12788
12789 ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
12790 blocks if a match is inside the block.
12791
12792 The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
12793 is outside the block. By customizing the variable
12794 isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
12795 shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
12796
12797 By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
12798 of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
12799 blocks, all of them or none.
12800
12801 ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
12802 current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
12803 confirmation first.
12804
12805 ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
12806 now changes the major mode according to that file name.
12807 However, the mode will not be changed if
12808 (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
12809 (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
12810 not suitable for ordinary files, or
12811 (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
12812
12813 This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
12814
12815 However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
12816 these commands do not change the major mode.
12817
12818 ** M-x occur changes.
12819
12820 *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
12821 it performs a case-sensitive search.
12822
12823 *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
12824 if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
12825 using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
12826
12827 ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
12828 in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
12829 window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
12830 that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
12831 buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
12832
12833 ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
12834 after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
12835 appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
12836 come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
12837
12838 ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
12839 selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
12840 buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
12841
12842 ** Outline mode changes.
12843
12844 *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
12845
12846 *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
12847
12848 ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
12849 you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
12850 Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
12851 was already active.
12852
12853 The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
12854 unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
12855 get confused by it.
12856
12857 If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
12858 set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
12859
12860 ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
12861
12862 *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
12863 conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
12864 character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
12865 including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
12866
12867 The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
12868 mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
12869 copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
12870
12871 *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
12872 are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
12873 values.
12874
12875 `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
12876 case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
12877 `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
12878 case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
12879
12880 ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
12881 certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
12882 can be. The default value is 30.
12883
12884 ** Changes in Mail mode.
12885
12886 *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
12887 Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
12888 composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
12889 `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
12890 `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
12891 behavior.
12892
12893 C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
12894 compose-mail-other-frame.
12895
12896 *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
12897 the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
12898 replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
12899 buffer that shows the original message.
12900
12901 *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
12902 with separator lines around the contents.
12903
12904 *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
12905 in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
12906 definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
12907 need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
12908
12909 *** New features in the mail-complete command.
12910
12911 **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
12912 for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
12913 controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
12914 Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
12915
12916 **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
12917 to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
12918 /etc/passwd.
12919
12920 **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
12921 to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
12922 /etc/passwd.
12923
12924 ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
12925 special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
12926 directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
12927 reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
12928
12929 Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
12930 when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
12931 be taken to be magic.
12932
12933 ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
12934 files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
12935 available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
12936
12937 M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
12938 (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
12939
12940 ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
12941 suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
12942
12943 In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
12944
12945 new key dired.el binding old key
12946 ------- ---------------- -------
12947 * c dired-change-marks c
12948 * m dired-mark m
12949 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
12950 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
12951 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
12952 * u dired-unmark u
12953 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
12954 * ? dired-unmark-all-files C-M-?
12955 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
12956 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
12957 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
12958 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
12959
12960 ** Rmail changes.
12961
12962 *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
12963 saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
12964 chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
12965 each time you run it.
12966
12967 *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
12968 whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
12969
12970 *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
12971 messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
12972 means to move in the opposite direction.
12973
12974 *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
12975 you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
12976
12977 *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
12978 just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
12979 It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
12980 can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
12981 for output.
12982
12983 ** Gnus changes.
12984
12985 *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
12986
12987 *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
12988 Gnus.
12989
12990 *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
12991 `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
12992
12993 *** Article washing status can be displayed in the
12994 article mode line.
12995
12996 *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
12997
12998 *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
12999
13000 (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
13001
13002 *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
13003 are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
13004 `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
13005
13006 *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
13007
13008 *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
13009
13010 *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
13011 See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
13012
13013 *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
13014 Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
13015 used to pick articles.
13016
13017 *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
13018 another have been added.
13019
13020 `M-x gnus-change-server'
13021
13022 *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
13023 generating lines in buffers.
13024
13025 *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
13026 `C-M-_'.
13027
13028 *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
13029
13030 *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
13031
13032 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
13033
13034 *** Scores can be decayed.
13035
13036 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
13037
13038 *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
13039 Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
13040
13041 *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
13042 the native server.
13043
13044 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
13045
13046 *** A new command for reading collections of documents
13047 (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `C-M-d'.
13048
13049 *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
13050
13051 *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
13052 even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
13053
13054 *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
13055 (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
13056
13057 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
13058 a group.
13059
13060 *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
13061 sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
13062
13063 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
13064
13065 *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
13066
13067 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
13068
13069 *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
13070
13071 Use the `Y c' command.
13072
13073 *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
13074
13075 *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
13076
13077 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
13078
13079 *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
13080 from incoming mail before saving the mail.
13081
13082 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
13083
13084 *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
13085
13086 *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
13087 the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
13088
13089 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
13090
13091 Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
13092 and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
13093 from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
13094 hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
13095 this issue.)
13096
13097 Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
13098 automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
13099 particular news group. This can be done by:
13100
13101 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
13102
13103 Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
13104 of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
13105 "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
13106 system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
13107 for reading and posting).
13108
13109 CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
13110 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
13111 Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
13112 newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
13113 there.
13114
13115 Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
13116 default. Here are some of these default settings:
13117
13118 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
13119 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
13120 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
13121 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
13122 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
13123
13124 When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
13125 the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
13126
13127 ** CC mode changes.
13128
13129 *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
13130 code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
13131 values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
13132 this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
13133 Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
13134 loaded.
13135
13136 If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
13137 Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
13138 style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
13139 share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
13140 c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
13141 must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
13142
13143 *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
13144 of the current buffer.
13145
13146 *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
13147 it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
13148 of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
13149
13150 *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
13151 style that the Python developers like.
13152
13153 *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
13154 This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
13155 just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
13156
13157 ** VC Changes [new]
13158
13159 *** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
13160 name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
13161 directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
13162
13163 This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
13164 master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
13165 developers.
13166
13167 You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
13168 RET in a buffer visiting that file.
13169
13170 *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
13171 other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
13172 writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
13173 calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
13174
13175 *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
13176 version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
13177
13178 ** Calendar changes.
13179
13180 *** A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or
13181 subclasses of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow
13182 you do this for the year of the selected date, or the
13183 following/previous years.
13184
13185 *** There is now support for the Baha'i calendar system. Use `pb' in
13186 the *Calendar* buffer to display the current Baha'i date. The Baha'i
13187 calendar, or "Badi calendar" is a system of 19 months with 19 days
13188 each, and 4 intercalary days (5 during a Gregorian leap year). The
13189 calendar begins May 23, 1844, with each of the months named after a
13190 supposed attribute of God.
13191
13192 ** ps-print changes
13193
13194 There are some new user variables and subgroups for customizing the page
13195 layout.
13196
13197 *** Headers & Footers (subgroup)
13198
13199 Some printer systems print a header page and force the first page to
13200 be printed on the back of the header page when using duplex. If your
13201 printer system has this behavior, set variable
13202 `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' to t.
13203
13204 If variable `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' is non-nil, it prints a
13205 blank page as the very first printed page. So, it behaves as if the
13206 very first character of buffer (or region) were a form feed ^L (\014).
13207
13208 The variable `ps-spool-config' specifies who is responsible for
13209 setting duplex mode and page size. Valid values are:
13210
13211 lpr-switches duplex and page size are configured by `ps-lpr-switches'.
13212 Don't forget to set `ps-lpr-switches' to select duplex
13213 printing for your printer.
13214
13215 setpagedevice duplex and page size are configured by ps-print using the
13216 setpagedevice PostScript operator.
13217
13218 nil duplex and page size are configured by ps-print *not* using
13219 the setpagedevice PostScript operator.
13220
13221 The variable `ps-spool-tumble' specifies how the page images on
13222 opposite sides of a sheet are oriented with respect to each other. If
13223 `ps-spool-tumble' is nil, ps-print produces output suitable for
13224 bindings on the left or right. If `ps-spool-tumble' is non-nil,
13225 ps-print produces output suitable for bindings at the top or bottom.
13226 This variable takes effect only if `ps-spool-duplex' is non-nil.
13227 The default value is nil.
13228
13229 The variable `ps-header-frame-alist' specifies a header frame
13230 properties alist. Valid frame properties are:
13231
13232 fore-color Specify the foreground frame color.
13233 Value should be a float number between 0.0 (black
13234 color) and 1.0 (white color), or a string which is a
13235 color name, or a list of 3 float numbers which
13236 correspond to the Red Green Blue color scale, each
13237 float number between 0.0 (dark color) and 1.0 (bright
13238 color). The default is 0 ("black").
13239
13240 back-color Specify the background frame color (similar to fore-color).
13241 The default is 0.9 ("gray90").
13242
13243 shadow-color Specify the shadow color (similar to fore-color).
13244 The default is 0 ("black").
13245
13246 border-color Specify the border color (similar to fore-color).
13247 The default is 0 ("black").
13248
13249 border-width Specify the border width.
13250 The default is 0.4.
13251
13252 Any other property is ignored.
13253
13254 Don't change this alist directly; instead use Custom, or the
13255 `ps-value', `ps-get', `ps-put' and `ps-del' functions (see there for
13256 documentation).
13257
13258 Ps-print can also print footers. The footer variables are:
13259 `ps-print-footer', `ps-footer-offset', `ps-print-footer-frame',
13260 `ps-footer-font-family', `ps-footer-font-size', `ps-footer-line-pad',
13261 `ps-footer-lines', `ps-left-footer', `ps-right-footer' and
13262 `ps-footer-frame-alist'. These variables are similar to those
13263 controlling headers.
13264
13265 *** Color management (subgroup)
13266
13267 If `ps-print-color-p' is non-nil, the buffer's text will be printed in
13268 color.
13269
13270 *** Face Management (subgroup)
13271
13272 If you need to print without worrying about face background colors,
13273 set the variable `ps-use-face-background' which specifies if face
13274 background should be used. Valid values are:
13275
13276 t always use face background color.
13277 nil never use face background color.
13278 (face...) list of faces whose background color will be used.
13279
13280 *** N-up printing (subgroup)
13281
13282 The variable `ps-n-up-printing' specifies the number of pages per
13283 sheet of paper.
13284
13285 The variable `ps-n-up-margin' specifies the margin in points (pt)
13286 between the sheet border and the n-up printing.
13287
13288 If variable `ps-n-up-border-p' is non-nil, a border is drawn around
13289 each page.
13290
13291 The variable `ps-n-up-filling' specifies how the page matrix is filled
13292 on each sheet of paper. Following are the valid values for
13293 `ps-n-up-filling' with a filling example using a 3x4 page matrix:
13294
13295 `left-top' 1 2 3 4 `left-bottom' 9 10 11 12
13296 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8
13297 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
13298
13299 `right-top' 4 3 2 1 `right-bottom' 12 11 10 9
13300 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5
13301 12 11 10 9 4 3 2 1
13302
13303 `top-left' 1 4 7 10 `bottom-left' 3 6 9 12
13304 2 5 8 11 2 5 8 11
13305 3 6 9 12 1 4 7 10
13306
13307 `top-right' 10 7 4 1 `bottom-right' 12 9 6 3
13308 11 8 5 2 11 8 5 2
13309 12 9 6 3 10 7 4 1
13310
13311 Any other value is treated as `left-top'.
13312
13313 *** Zebra stripes (subgroup)
13314
13315 The variable `ps-zebra-color' controls the zebra stripes grayscale or
13316 RGB color.
13317
13318 The variable `ps-zebra-stripe-follow' specifies how zebra stripes
13319 continue on next page. Visually, valid values are (the character `+'
13320 to the right of each column indicates that a line is printed):
13321
13322 `nil' `follow' `full' `full-follow'
13323 Current Page -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
13324 1 XXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXX + 1 XXXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13325 2 XXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXX + 2 XXXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13326 3 XXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXX + 3 XXXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13327 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 +
13328 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 +
13329 6 + 6 + 6 + 6 +
13330 7 XXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXX + 7 XXXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13331 8 XXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXX + 8 XXXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13332 9 XXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXX + 9 XXXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13333 10 + 10 +
13334 11 + 11 +
13335 -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
13336 Next Page -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
13337 12 XXXXX + 12 + 10 XXXXXX + 10 +
13338 13 XXXXX + 13 XXXXXXXX + 11 XXXXXX + 11 +
13339 14 XXXXX + 14 XXXXXXXX + 12 XXXXXX + 12 +
13340 15 + 15 XXXXXXXX + 13 + 13 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13341 16 + 16 + 14 + 14 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13342 17 + 17 + 15 + 15 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
13343 18 XXXXX + 18 + 16 XXXXXX + 16 +
13344 19 XXXXX + 19 XXXXXXXX + 17 XXXXXX + 17 +
13345 20 XXXXX + 20 XXXXXXXX + 18 XXXXXX + 18 +
13346 21 + 21 XXXXXXXX +
13347 22 + 22 +
13348 -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
13349
13350 Any other value is treated as `nil'.
13351
13352
13353 *** Printer management (subgroup)
13354
13355 The variable `ps-printer-name-option' determines the option used by
13356 some utilities to indicate the printer name; it's used only when
13357 `ps-printer-name' is a non-empty string. If you're using the lpr
13358 utility to print, for example, `ps-printer-name-option' should be set
13359 to "-P".
13360
13361 The variable `ps-manual-feed' indicates if the printer requires manual
13362 paper feeding. If it's nil, automatic feeding takes place. If it's
13363 non-nil, manual feeding takes place.
13364
13365 The variable `ps-end-with-control-d' specifies whether C-d (\x04)
13366 should be inserted at end of the generated PostScript. Non-nil means
13367 do so.
13368
13369 *** Page settings (subgroup)
13370
13371 If variable `ps-warn-paper-type' is nil, it's *not* treated as an
13372 error if the PostScript printer doesn't have a paper with the size
13373 indicated by `ps-paper-type'; the default paper size will be used
13374 instead. If `ps-warn-paper-type' is non-nil, an error is signaled if
13375 the PostScript printer doesn't support a paper with the size indicated
13376 by `ps-paper-type'. This is used when `ps-spool-config' is set to
13377 `setpagedevice'.
13378
13379 The variable `ps-print-upside-down' determines the orientation for
13380 printing pages: nil means `normal' printing, non-nil means
13381 `upside-down' printing (that is, the page is rotated by 180 degrees).
13382
13383 The variable `ps-selected-pages' specifies which pages to print. If
13384 it's nil, all pages are printed. If it's a list, list elements may be
13385 integers specifying a single page to print, or cons cells (FROM . TO)
13386 specifying to print from page FROM to TO. Invalid list elements, that
13387 is integers smaller than one, or elements whose FROM is greater than
13388 its TO, are ignored.
13389
13390 The variable `ps-even-or-odd-pages' specifies how to print even/odd
13391 pages. Valid values are:
13392
13393 nil print all pages.
13394
13395 `even-page' print only even pages.
13396
13397 `odd-page' print only odd pages.
13398
13399 `even-sheet' print only even sheets.
13400 That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like
13401 `even-page', but for values greater than 1, it'll
13402 print only the even sheet of paper.
13403
13404 `odd-sheet' print only odd sheets.
13405 That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like
13406 `odd-page'; but for values greater than 1, it'll print
13407 only the odd sheet of paper.
13408
13409 Any other value is treated as nil.
13410
13411 If you set `ps-selected-pages' (see there for documentation), pages
13412 are filtered by `ps-selected-pages', and then by
13413 `ps-even-or-odd-pages'. For example, if we have:
13414
13415 (setq ps-selected-pages '(1 4 (6 . 10) (12 . 16) 20))
13416
13417 and we combine this with `ps-even-or-odd-pages' and
13418 `ps-n-up-printing', we get:
13419
13420 `ps-n-up-printing' = 1:
13421 `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED
13422 nil 1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 20
13423 even-page 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20
13424 odd-page 1, 7, 9, 13, 15
13425 even-sheet 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20
13426 odd-sheet 1, 7, 9, 13, 15
13427
13428 `ps-n-up-printing' = 2:
13429 `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED
13430 nil 1/4, 6/7, 8/9, 10/12, 13/14, 15/16, 20
13431 even-page 4/6, 8/10, 12/14, 16/20
13432 odd-page 1/7, 9/13, 15
13433 even-sheet 6/7, 10/12, 15/16
13434 odd-sheet 1/4, 8/9, 13/14, 20
13435
13436 *** Miscellany (subgroup)
13437
13438 The variable `ps-error-handler-message' specifies where error handler
13439 messages should be sent.
13440
13441 It is also possible to add a user-defined PostScript prologue code in
13442 front of all generated prologue code by setting the variable
13443 `ps-user-defined-prologue'.
13444
13445 The variable `ps-line-number-font' specifies the font for line numbers.
13446
13447 The variable `ps-line-number-font-size' specifies the font size in
13448 points for line numbers.
13449
13450 The variable `ps-line-number-color' specifies the color for line
13451 numbers. See `ps-zebra-color' for documentation.
13452
13453 The variable `ps-line-number-step' specifies the interval in which
13454 line numbers are printed. For example, if `ps-line-number-step' is set
13455 to 2, the printing will look like:
13456
13457 1 one line
13458 one line
13459 3 one line
13460 one line
13461 5 one line
13462 one line
13463 ...
13464
13465 Valid values are:
13466
13467 integer an integer specifying the interval in which line numbers are
13468 printed. If it's smaller than or equal to zero, 1
13469 is used.
13470
13471 `zebra' specifies that only the line number of the first line in a
13472 zebra stripe is to be printed.
13473
13474 Any other value is treated as `zebra'.
13475
13476 The variable `ps-line-number-start' specifies the starting point in
13477 the interval given by `ps-line-number-step'. For example, if
13478 `ps-line-number-step' is set to 3, and `ps-line-number-start' is set to
13479 3, the output will look like:
13480
13481 one line
13482 one line
13483 3 one line
13484 one line
13485 one line
13486 6 one line
13487 one line
13488 one line
13489 9 one line
13490 one line
13491 ...
13492
13493 The variable `ps-postscript-code-directory' specifies the directory
13494 where the PostScript prologue file used by ps-print is found.
13495
13496 The variable `ps-line-spacing' determines the line spacing in points,
13497 for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to
13498 `ps-font-size').
13499
13500 The variable `ps-paragraph-spacing' determines the paragraph spacing,
13501 in points, for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to
13502 `ps-font-size').
13503
13504 The variable `ps-paragraph-regexp' specifies the paragraph delimiter.
13505
13506 The variable `ps-begin-cut-regexp' and `ps-end-cut-regexp' specify the
13507 start and end of a region to cut out when printing.
13508
13509 ** hideshow changes.
13510
13511 *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
13512 C++, ; for lisp).
13513
13514 *** Support for java-mode added.
13515
13516 *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
13517 in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
13518
13519 *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the comments at
13520 the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
13521 way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
13522
13523 *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
13524 robust and a lot faster.
13525
13526 *** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
13527
13528 *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
13529 to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
13530 documentation for more details.
13531
13532 ** Changes in Enriched mode.
13533
13534 *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
13535 filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
13536 of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
13537 use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
13538 the next time unless the fill-column is different.
13539
13540 *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
13541 distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
13542 as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
13543 as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
13544
13545 ** Font Lock mode
13546
13547 *** Custom support
13548
13549 The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
13550 font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify
13551 the faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new
13552 custom group font-lock-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in your
13553 ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
13554 consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
13555
13556 You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
13557
13558 *** Maximum decoration
13559
13560 Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
13561 default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
13562 of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
13563 supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
13564 to get the old behavior.
13565
13566 *** New support
13567
13568 Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
13569
13570 Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
13571 support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
13572
13573 *** Configurable support
13574
13575 Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
13576 additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
13577 c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
13578 java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
13579 list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
13580 of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
13581 convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
13582
13583 Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
13584 way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
13585 it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
13586
13587 *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
13588
13589 You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
13590 highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
13591 for any mode.
13592
13593 For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
13594
13595 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
13596
13597 in your ~/.emacs.
13598
13599 *** New faces
13600
13601 Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
13602 font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
13603 distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
13604 to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
13605
13606 *** Changes to fast-lock support mode
13607
13608 The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
13609 cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
13610 same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
13611
13612 *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
13613
13614 The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
13615 according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
13616 the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
13617 non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
13618 refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
13619 the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
13620 Lock mode behavior and the behavior of Font Lock mode.
13621
13622 This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
13623 For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
13624 this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
13625 refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
13626 containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
13627 the command M-o M-o (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
13628
13629 As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
13630
13631 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
13632 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
13633 Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
13634 new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
13635
13636 If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
13637 settings.
13638
13639 ** Ada mode changes.
13640
13641 *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
13642 If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
13643 procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
13644 you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
13645 stubs.
13646
13647 *** There are two new commands:
13648 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
13649 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
13650
13651 The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
13652 `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
13653 `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
13654
13655 *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
13656 is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
13657 Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
13658
13659 *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
13660 formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
13661 places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
13662 space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
13663
13664 ** Scheme mode changes.
13665
13666 *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
13667 mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
13668 for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
13669 with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
13670 have any effect.
13671
13672 If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
13673 still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
13674 scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
13675 variables as buffer-local variables.
13676
13677 *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
13678 Use M-x dsssl-mode.
13679
13680 ** Changes to the emacsclient program
13681
13682 *** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
13683 USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
13684 associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
13685 can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
13686
13687 *** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
13688 it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
13689 buffer in Emacs.
13690
13691 *** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
13692 use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
13693 ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
13694 option takes precedence.
13695
13696 ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
13697 constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
13698 (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
13699
13700 ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
13701 which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
13702 the current defun.
13703
13704 ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
13705 following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
13706
13707 ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
13708 and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
13709 necessary).
13710
13711 ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
13712 if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
13713 these register values no longer become completely useless.
13714 If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
13715 asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
13716 it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
13717
13718 ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
13719 example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
13720 be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
13721 you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
13722
13723 You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
13724 variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
13725 file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
13726 revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
13727 only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
13728
13729 ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
13730 since it applies only to the current frame.
13731
13732 ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
13733 file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
13734 and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
13735
13736 This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
13737 multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
13738 variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
13739 tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
13740 instead of just the file you are editing.
13741
13742 ** RefTeX mode
13743
13744 RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
13745 and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
13746 different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
13747 multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
13748 turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
13749
13750 C-c ( reftex-label
13751 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
13752 knows which kind of label is needed.
13753
13754 C-c ) reftex-reference
13755 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
13756 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
13757
13758 C-c [ reftex-citation
13759 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
13760 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
13761
13762 C-c & reftex-view-crossref
13763 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
13764
13765 C-c = reftex-toc
13766 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
13767 can quickly jump to every section.
13768
13769 Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
13770 commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
13771 Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
13772 reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
13773 C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
13774
13775 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
13776
13777 *** Info documentation is now available.
13778
13779 *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
13780 both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
13781
13782 *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
13783 bibtex-user-optional-fields.
13784
13785 *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
13786 (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
13787
13788 *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
13789 entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
13790 appropriate functions.
13791
13792 *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
13793 entries. They are bound by default to C-M-l and C-M-h.
13794
13795 *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
13796 been cleaned.
13797
13798 *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
13799 bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
13800
13801 *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
13802 shall be delimited.
13803
13804 *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
13805 bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
13806 bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
13807
13808 *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
13809 field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
13810 prefixed with `ALT'.
13811
13812 *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
13813 bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
13814 formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
13815 documentation).
13816
13817 *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
13818 documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
13819 for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
13820
13821 *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
13822 comma should be inserted at end of last field.
13823
13824 *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
13825 alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
13826 signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
13827
13828 *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
13829
13830 *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
13831
13832 *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
13833 from alien sources.
13834
13835 *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
13836 to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
13837 crossref entries.
13838
13839 *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
13840 region.
13841
13842 *** Added support for imenu.
13843
13844 *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
13845 of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
13846 `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
13847 `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
13848
13849 *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
13850 from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
13851
13852 ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
13853
13854 ** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
13855
13856 ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
13857 functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
13858 Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
13859 as an argument.
13860
13861 When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
13862 and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
13863
13864 ** browse-url changes
13865
13866 *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
13867 Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
13868 (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
13869 non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
13870 customization variables.
13871
13872 *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
13873
13874 *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
13875 lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
13876 (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
13877
13878 ** Changes in Ediff
13879
13880 *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
13881 pops up the Info file for this command.
13882
13883 *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
13884 the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
13885 merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
13886 directories).
13887
13888 *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
13889 and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
13890 files in the same directory.
13891
13892 *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
13893 The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
13894 related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
13895
13896 ** Changes in Viper
13897
13898 *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
13899 *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
13900 instead of vip-.
13901 *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
13902 *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
13903 Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
13904 *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
13905 *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
13906 *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
13907 color when Viper is in insert state.
13908 *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
13909 Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
13910 viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
13911
13912 ** Etags changes.
13913
13914 *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
13915 default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
13916 Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
13917 variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
13918 not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
13919
13920 *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
13921
13922 *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
13923 constructs are tagged. Files are recognized by the extension .java.
13924
13925 *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
13926 recognized by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
13927 In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
13928
13929 *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
13930 C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
13931 recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
13932 methods and protocols.
13933
13934 *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognized by the extension
13935 .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
13936 column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
13937 paragraph name.
13938
13939 *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
13940 an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
13941 at least M times and as many as N times.
13942
13943 ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
13944 in files has changed slightly.
13945
13946 With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
13947 time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
13948 This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
13949 with old time-stamp-format values.
13950
13951 In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
13952 (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
13953 This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
13954 reasons.
13955
13956 In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
13957 natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
13958 fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
13959 (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
13960 time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
13961 specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
13962
13963 Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
13964 case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
13965 truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
13966
13967 The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
13968 being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
13969 future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
13970 recommended now will continue to work then.
13971
13972 See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
13973 details.
13974
13975 ** There are some additional major modes:
13976
13977 dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
13978 m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
13979 meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
13980
13981 ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
13982 copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
13983 into Emacs.
13984
13985 ** New Lisp packages include:
13986
13987 *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
13988
13989 *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
13990 be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
13991
13992 *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
13993
13994 *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
13995 in shell buffers.
13996
13997 *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
13998 See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
13999 and `elint-defun'.
14000
14001 *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
14002 meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
14003 ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
14004 strings or comments.
14005
14006 These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
14007 abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
14008 you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
14009 insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
14010 at these points.
14011
14012 *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
14013 can visit them by short forms of their names.
14014
14015 *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
14016 Emacs Lisp function at point.
14017
14018 *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
14019
14020 *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
14021 switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
14022
14023 *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
14024
14025 *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
14026
14027 *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
14028
14029 *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
14030 from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
14031
14032 *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
14033 You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
14034 inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
14035 original place after inserting the copy.
14036
14037 *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
14038 on the buffer.
14039
14040 You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
14041 velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
14042 (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
14043
14044 Enable mouse-drag with:
14045 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
14046 -or-
14047 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
14048
14049 *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
14050 mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
14051
14052 *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
14053 It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
14054
14055 *** ogonek
14056
14057 The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
14058 Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
14059 platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
14060 TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
14061 ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
14062 prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
14063 instance) and vice versa.
14064
14065 To use this package load it using
14066 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
14067 Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
14068 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
14069 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
14070 The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
14071 ways of customization in `.emacs'.
14072
14073 *** Interface to ph.
14074
14075 Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
14076
14077 The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
14078 services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
14079 these servers.
14080
14081 *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
14082
14083 *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
14084 You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
14085 while the real cursor does not move.
14086
14087 *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
14088 for visiting your favorite web sites.
14089
14090 *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
14091 so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
14092
14093 ** movemail change
14094
14095 Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
14096 mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
14097 supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
14098 user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
14099
14100 This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
14101 \f
14102 * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
14103
14104 ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
14105
14106 Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
14107 end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
14108 Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
14109 file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
14110 file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
14111
14112 To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
14113 C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
14114 coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
14115 specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
14116 LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
14117 save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
14118 \f
14119 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
14120
14121 ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
14122 Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
14123 vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
14124 Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
14125
14126 ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
14127 to start with w32- instead of win32-.
14128
14129 In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
14130 don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
14131 "win".
14132
14133 ** Basic Lisp changes
14134
14135 *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
14136 evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
14137
14138 *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
14139 be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
14140 or by the user.
14141
14142 The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
14143
14144 *** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
14145
14146 (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
14147 (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
14148
14149 *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
14150 usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
14151 its argument.
14152
14153 *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
14154
14155 *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
14156
14157 *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
14158
14159 *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
14160 error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
14161 include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
14162 `format' function.
14163
14164 *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
14165 or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
14166 whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
14167
14168 *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
14169 either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
14170 adding one of these suffixes.
14171
14172 *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
14173 which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
14174 If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
14175
14176 We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
14177 because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
14178
14179 *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
14180
14181 *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
14182 You must load the `cl' library to define it.
14183
14184 *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
14185 conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
14186
14187 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
14188
14189 BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
14190 BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
14191
14192 *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
14193 choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
14194 restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
14195 works using `save-current-buffer'.
14196
14197 *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
14198 write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
14199 of the last form.
14200
14201 *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
14202 which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
14203 last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
14204 as the last form.
14205
14206 *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
14207 characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
14208 matches.
14209
14210 For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
14211
14212 *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
14213 with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
14214 Then it returns that string.
14215
14216 For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
14217
14218 (with-output-to-string
14219 (princ "The buffer is ")
14220 (princ (buffer-name)))
14221
14222 returns "The buffer is foo".
14223
14224 ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
14225 is non-nil.
14226
14227 These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
14228 buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
14229 characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
14230
14231 *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
14232 a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
14233
14234 Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
14235 character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
14236 Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
14237 position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
14238 characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
14239 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
14240
14241 ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
14242 Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
14243 non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
14244 characters".
14245
14246 The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
14247 through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
14248 "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
14249 range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
14250 leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
14251
14252 *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
14253 (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
14254 multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
14255 character, which may be more than one buffer position.
14256
14257 This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
14258 always one buffer position, need to be changed.
14259
14260 However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
14261
14262 *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
14263 because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
14264 have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
14265 the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
14266 guaranteed.
14267
14268 *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
14269 between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
14270 character).
14271
14272 When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
14273
14274 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
14275 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
14276 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
14277 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
14278 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
14279
14280 *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
14281
14282 *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
14283 `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
14284 more than the number of characters.
14285
14286 You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
14287 it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
14288 \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
14289 is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
14290 follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
14291 newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
14292
14293 *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
14294 and returns a string containing those characters.
14295
14296 *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
14297 (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
14298 counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
14299 character, sref signals an error.
14300
14301 *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
14302 in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
14303 string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
14304
14305 *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
14306 in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
14307 region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
14308
14309 *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
14310 the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
14311 to a vector of the characters in it.
14312
14313 *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
14314 of a string. You call it as follows:
14315
14316 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
14317
14318 This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
14319 STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
14320 This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
14321 Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
14322 it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
14323
14324 *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
14325 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
14326
14327 *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
14328 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
14329
14330 *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
14331 to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
14332 not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
14333 which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
14334
14335 (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
14336
14337 This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
14338
14339 The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
14340 If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
14341 are not included in the resulting value.
14342
14343 The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
14344 at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
14345 WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
14346 is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
14347
14348 If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
14349 place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
14350 character extends across that column), then the padding character
14351 PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
14352 string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
14353 column START-COLUMN.
14354
14355 *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
14356 the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
14357 necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
14358 difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
14359 changed text, before the change.
14360
14361 *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
14362 sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
14363 one character set for each script, not for each language.
14364
14365 **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
14366
14367 **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
14368
14369 **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
14370 set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
14371
14372 **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
14373 name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
14374 which identify the character within that character set.
14375
14376 **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
14377 byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
14378 opposite of split-char.
14379
14380 **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
14381 of all the characters between BEG and END.
14382
14383 **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
14384 of all the characters in a string.
14385
14386 *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
14387 and specifying coding systems.
14388
14389 **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
14390 system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
14391 of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
14392 (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
14393 and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
14394 as what to do about code conversion.)
14395
14396 **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
14397 name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
14398
14399 **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
14400 for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
14401 except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
14402
14403 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
14404 which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
14405 to match against a file name.
14406
14407 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
14408 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
14409 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
14410 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
14411 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
14412 specifies the coding system for encoding.
14413
14414 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
14415 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
14416
14417 **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
14418 the coding system to use for network sockets.
14419
14420 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
14421 which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
14422 either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
14423 service names.
14424
14425 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
14426 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
14427 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
14428 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
14429 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
14430 specifies the coding system for encoding.
14431
14432 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
14433 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
14434
14435 **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
14436 for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
14437 except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
14438 start the subprocess.
14439
14440 **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
14441 systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
14442 when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
14443 (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
14444 to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
14445
14446 **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
14447 coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
14448 subprocess.
14449
14450 It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
14451 but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
14452 start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
14453 connection permanently or until overridden.
14454
14455 The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
14456 file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
14457 network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
14458 coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
14459 It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
14460 system for one operation at a time.
14461
14462 **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
14463 files, subprocesses or network connections.
14464
14465 **** The function process-coding-system tells you what
14466 coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
14467 The value is a cons cell,
14468 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
14469 where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
14470 the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
14471 input to the subprocess.
14472
14473 **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
14474 change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
14475
14476 ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
14477 customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
14478 you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
14479
14480 You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
14481 variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
14482 information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
14483 legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
14484 customization.
14485
14486 Thus, instead of writing
14487
14488 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
14489 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
14490
14491 you would now write this:
14492
14493 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
14494 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
14495 :type 'boolean
14496 :group foo)
14497
14498 The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
14499 two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
14500 describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
14501 for a description of them.
14502
14503 The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
14504 should belong to. You define a new group like this:
14505
14506 (defgroup ispell nil
14507 "Spell checking using Ispell."
14508 :group 'processes)
14509
14510 The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
14511 group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
14512 but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
14513 to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
14514 second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
14515
14516 Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
14517 package should have just one group; a more complex package should
14518 have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
14519 package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
14520 first-level subgroups.
14521
14522 ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
14523
14524 This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
14525 separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
14526
14527 ** easy-mmode
14528
14529 The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
14530 developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
14531 only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
14532 predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
14533 `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
14534 `easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
14535
14536 ** Text property changes
14537
14538 *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
14539 text property.
14540
14541 *** The new functions next-char-property-change and
14542 previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
14543 place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
14544 functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
14545 starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
14546
14547 If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
14548 LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
14549 of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
14550 position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
14551
14552 *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
14553 value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
14554 is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
14555
14556 ** Changes in invisibility features
14557
14558 *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
14559 hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
14560 is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
14561 should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
14562 would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
14563 make the overlay visible.
14564
14565 During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
14566 invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
14567 needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
14568 which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
14569 the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
14570 t when it should hide it.
14571
14572 *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
14573
14574 Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
14575 invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
14576 and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
14577 Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
14578 manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
14579 Here is an example of how to do this:
14580
14581 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
14582 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
14583 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
14584 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
14585
14586 ...
14587 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
14588
14589 ...
14590 ;; When done with the overlays:
14591 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
14592 ;; Or respectively:
14593 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
14594
14595 ** Changes in syntax parsing.
14596
14597 *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
14598 `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
14599 obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
14600 `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
14601
14602 If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
14603 is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
14604 used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
14605
14606 When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
14607 character in the buffer is calculated thus:
14608
14609 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
14610 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
14611
14612 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
14613 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
14614 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
14615
14616 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
14617 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
14618 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
14619 determine the syntax type of the character.
14620
14621 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
14622 of the current buffer.
14623
14624 *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
14625 value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
14626 for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
14627
14628 *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
14629 and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
14630 only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
14631 character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
14632 another character with the same code (unless quoted).
14633
14634 These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
14635 text property.
14636
14637 *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
14638 arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
14639 of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
14640
14641 *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
14642 (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
14643 element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
14644 nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
14645 string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
14646
14647 *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
14648 syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
14649 `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
14650
14651 ** Changes in face features
14652
14653 *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
14654 if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
14655
14656 *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
14657 of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
14658
14659 *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
14660 set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
14661
14662 *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
14663 set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
14664
14665 *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
14666 by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
14667 and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
14668 the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
14669 overlay property).
14670
14671 This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
14672 arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
14673
14674 ** Changes in file-handling functions
14675
14676 *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
14677 directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
14678 they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
14679 is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
14680
14681 This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
14682 begins with ~.
14683
14684 *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
14685 it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
14686
14687 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
14688 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
14689
14690 *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
14691 as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
14692
14693 *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
14694 character code conversion as well as other things.
14695
14696 Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
14697 (formerly it did not).
14698
14699 *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
14700 environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
14701
14702 *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
14703 instead of constant strings.
14704
14705 *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
14706 to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
14707 any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
14708
14709 substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
14710 in the same way as before.
14711
14712 *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
14713 The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
14714 which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
14715
14716 *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
14717 error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
14718 else, and returns nil.
14719
14720 *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
14721 directory cannot be listed.
14722
14723 ** Changes in minibuffer input
14724
14725 *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
14726 read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
14727 additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
14728 argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
14729 ways:
14730
14731 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
14732 It is available through the history command M-n.
14733
14734 *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
14735 read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
14736 argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
14737 minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
14738 enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
14739
14740 In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
14741 argument in this way.
14742
14743 *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
14744 from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
14745 minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
14746
14747 ** Echo area features
14748
14749 *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
14750 echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
14751 minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
14752 after the echo area is cleared.
14753
14754 *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
14755 in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
14756
14757 ** Keyboard input features
14758
14759 *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
14760 set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
14761
14762 *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
14763 received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
14764 by keyboard macros.
14765
14766 ** Frame-related changes
14767
14768 *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
14769 creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
14770 hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
14771
14772 *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
14773 the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
14774 has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
14775
14776 *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
14777 selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
14778 value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
14779 in the selected frame.
14780
14781 *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
14782 is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
14783 which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
14784
14785 ** X Windows features
14786
14787 *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
14788 x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
14789 x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
14790
14791 *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
14792 The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
14793
14794 *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
14795 MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
14796 A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
14797
14798 If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
14799 it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
14800
14801 ** Subprocess features
14802
14803 *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
14804 functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
14805 automatically.
14806
14807 *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
14808 and returns the output from the command as a string.
14809
14810 *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
14811 and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
14812
14813 ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
14814 does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
14815
14816 ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
14817 at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
14818 goes after the other menu items.
14819
14820 ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
14821 of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
14822 around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
14823 are in use.
14824
14825 The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
14826 series of several changes--if that seems safe.
14827
14828 Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
14829 after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
14830 form.
14831
14832 ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
14833 is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
14834 but its hook is still run.
14835
14836 ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
14837 for errors that are handled by condition-case.
14838
14839 If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
14840 regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
14841 useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
14842
14843 This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
14844 are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
14845 filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
14846 warned.
14847
14848 ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
14849 way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
14850
14851 ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
14852 integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
14853 functions like display-time.
14854
14855 ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
14856 name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
14857
14858 ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
14859 can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
14860 is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
14861
14862 ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
14863 if there is an error in compilation.
14864
14865 ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
14866 switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
14867 argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
14868 they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
14869
14870 ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
14871 Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
14872 the *scratch* buffer.
14873
14874 ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
14875 The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
14876 where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
14877 e.g., in Font Lock mode.
14878
14879 ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
14880 and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
14881 It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
14882
14883 ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
14884 using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
14885 variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
14886 and compose-mail-other-frame.
14887
14888 ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
14889 can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
14890 full name of the specified user will be returned.
14891
14892 ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
14893 of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
14894 where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
14895 in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
14896 option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
14897 files at all.
14898
14899 ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
14900 and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
14901 width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
14902 the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
14903
14904 For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
14905 minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
14906 with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
14907 is how %S normally pads to two positions.
14908
14909 ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
14910
14911 ** imenu.el changes.
14912
14913 You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
14914 item from menu created by imenu.
14915
14916 An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
14917 #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
14918 select one of those items.
14919 \f
14920 * For older news, see the file ONEWS
14921
14922 ----------------------------------------------------------------------
14923 Copyright information:
14924
14925 Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004,
14926 2005, 2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
14927
14928 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
14929 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
14930 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
14931 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
14932
14933 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
14934 of this document, or of portions of it,
14935 under the above conditions, provided also that they
14936 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
14937 \f
14938 Local variables:
14939 mode: outline
14940 paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
14941 end:
14942
14943 arch-tag: 1aca9dfa-2ac4-4d14-bebf-0007cee12793